Q0610_UM_USEn_Cover.fm Page 1 Monday, July 14, 2008 3:50 PM
DIGITAL CAMERA
User's Manual
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part
(except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be
made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
En_04
6MB02311-04
En
© 2008 Nikon Corporation
Printed in Japan
SB8G04(11)
En
Where to Find It
Find what you’re looking for from:
i
The Q&A Index
➜
pp. iv–ix
Know what you want to do but don’t know the function name? Find it
from the “question and answer” index.
i
The Table of Contents
➜
pp. x–xvii
➜
pp. 22–23
Find items by function or menu name.
i
The Quick Start Guide
A brief guide for those who want to get started taking pictures right away.
i
The Index
➜
pp. 438–443
➜
pp. 409–416
Search by key word.
i
Error Messages
If a warning is displayed in the viewfinder or monitor, find the solution
here.
i
Troubleshooting
➜
pp. 402–408
Camera behaving unexpectedly? Find the solution here.
A For Your Safety
Before using the camera for the first time, read the safety
instructions in “For Your Safety” (pg. xviii).
Digitutor
Digitutor, a series of “watch and learn” manuals in movie form, is available
from the following website:
http://www.nikondigitutor.com/index_eng.html
Package Contents
Be sure all items listed here were included with your camera.
Memory cards are sold separately.
• D700 digital
camera (pg. 3)
• Body cap
(pp. 36, 388)
• BM-9 LCD monitor
cover (pg. 21)
• MH-18a quick
• EN-EL3e
charger with
rechargeable
power cable
Li-ion battery with
(pg. 32)
terminal cover
(pp. 32, 34)
• AN-D700 strap
(pg. 21)
• EG-D100 video
cable (pg. 255)
• BS-1 accessory shoe
cover (pg. 377)
• UC-E4 USB cable
(pp. 238, 245)
• Warranty
• User’s Manual (this guide)
• Quick Guide
• Software Installation Guide
• Software Suite CD-ROM
• Registration card
(U. S. A. only)
i
Symbols and Conventions
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following
symbols and conventions are used:
D
This icon marks cautions; information that should be read before
use to prevent damage to the camera.
A
This icon marks notes; information that should be read before
using the camera.
Menu items, options, and messages displayed in the camera monitor
are shown in bold.
A
Trademark Information
Macintosh, Mac OS, and QuickTime are registered trademarks of Apple
Inc. Microsoft, Windows and Windows Vista are either registered
trademarks, or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States
and/or other countries. CompactFlash is a trademark of SanDisk
Corporation. HDMI, the HDMI logo and High-Definition Multimedia
Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC.
PictBridge is a trademark. All other trade names mentioned in this manual
or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are
trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective holders.
ii
X Introduction
s Tutorial
d Image Recording Options
N Focus
k Release Mode
S ISO Sensitivity
Z Exposure
r White Balance
J Image Enhancement
l Flash Photography
t Other Shooting Options
I More About Playback
Q Connections
U Menu Guide
n Technical Notes
iii
Q&A Index
Find what you’re looking for using this “question and answer”
index.
New Features
Question
How do I take pictures in FX format?
How do I take high-quality NEF (RAW)
photos?
Can I use the monitor as a viewfinder?
Can I control how photos are processed?
How do I preserve details in shadows
and highlights?
How do I focus on erratically moving
subjects?
How do I tell if the camera is level?
Can I adjust focus separately for
different lenses?
How do I remove dust from the low-pass
filter protecting the image sensor?
Key phrase
Image area
See page
58
14-bit NEF (RAW)
68
Live view
Picture Controls
89
160
Active D-Lighting
179
3D-tracking
286
Virtual horizon
99, 346
AF fine tune
347
Clean image sensor
392
Key phrase
Diopter adjustment
control
See page
Camera Setup
Question
How do I focus the viewfinder?
How do I keep the monitor from turning
Monitor off delay
off?
iv
45
297
Question
How do I keep the shutter speed and
aperture displays from turning off?
Can I display a framing grid in the
viewfinder?
How do I set the clock?
How do I set the clock for daylight
savings time?
How do I change time zones when I
travel?
How do I adjust monitor brightness for
menus or playback?
How do I restore default settings?
How do I restore shooting menu
defaults?
How do I restore Custom Setting
defaults?
How do I change the self-timer delay?
How do I turn the speaker off?
Can I reverse the electronic analog
exposure display?
Can I display the menus in a different
language?
Can I save menu settings for use on a
different D700 camera?
Key phrase
Auto meter off
Viewfinder grid display
World time
See page
48, 296
298
39, 334
LCD brightness
332
Two-button reset
196
Reset shooting menu
271
Reset custom settings
282
Self-timer delay
Beep
297
298
Reverse indicators
330
Language
334
Save/load settings
344
Menus and Displays
Question
How do I get more information on a
menu?
How do I use the menus?
Can I get quick access to frequentlyused settings?
Can I get quick access to recently-used
settings?
Key phrase
See page
Help
31
Using the menus
26
My Menu
364
Recent settings
368
v
Question
What do these indicators mean?
What information is in the shooting
information display?
What does this warning mean?
How much charge does the battery
have left?
How do I get more information about
the battery?
How do I keep the file number from
being reset when I insert a new memory
card?
How do I reset file numbering to zero?
How do I clean the camera or lens?
Key phrase
Viewfinder, control
panel, shooting
information display
Error messages and
displays
See page
8, 10, 12
409
Battery level
46
Battery info
340
File number sequence
300
Cleaning the camera
391
Key phrase
Number of exposures
remaining
See page
Image quality and size
64, 69
Taking Photographs
Question
How many more shots can I take with
this card?
How do I take bigger photographs?
How can I get more photos on the
memory card?
Can I control how the camera focuses?
Can I choose the focus point?
How do I take a lot of photographs
quickly?
Can I change the frame advance rate?
Can I shoot a self-portrait?
Can I take pictures under low light
without the flash?
Can the ISO sensitivity I choose be
adjusted to ensure optimal exposure?
vi
47
Autofocus
Focus point
71
76
Release mode
84
Shooting speed
Self-timer mode
86, 299
102
ISO sensitivity
106
ISO sensitivity auto
control
108
Question
Key phrase
See page
Exposure mode f
How do I freeze or blur moving objects?
118
(shutter-priority auto)
How do I blur background details or
Exposure mode g
keep both foreground and background
119
(aperture-priority auto)
in focus?
Can I set both shutter speed and
Exposure mode h
121
aperture manually?
(manual)
Can I make photos brighter or darker? Exposure compensation
128
Long time-exposures
How do I make a time exposure?
124
(A)
Can I vary exposure or flash level
Exposure and flash
131, 315
automatically over a series of photos?
bracketing
Can I create multiple copies of a photo White balance
135, 315
using different white balance settings? bracketing
How do I adjust white balance?
White balance
139
Can I take pictures with a flash?
Flash photography, flash
185
mode, red-eye
How can I reduce “red-eye”?
188
reduction
How can I record multiple shots as a
Multiple exposure
198
single photograph?
How do I reduce loss of brightness at
Vignette control
276
the edges of photographs?
Fine tune optimal
Can I pick the standard exposure level?
294
exposure
How can I reduce blur?
Exposure delay mode
302
Can the flash be used at shutter speeds
Flash sync speed
305
faster than 1/250 s?
Can I record an NEF copy of a
photograph while shooting JPEG
+NEF (RAW)
322
images?
vii
Viewing Photographs
Question
Can I view my photographs on the
camera?
Can I view more information about
photos?
Why do parts of my photos blink?
Key phrase
See page
Camera playback
218
Photo info
220
Photo info, highlights
Deleting individual
How do I get rid of an unwanted photo?
photos
Can I delete several photos at once?
Delete
Can I zoom in on pictures to make sure
Playback zoom
they’re in focus?
Can I protect photos from accidental
Protect
deletion?
Can I hide selected photos?
Hide image
How do I tell if parts of my photos may Display mode:
be overexposed?
highlights
Display mode: focus
How do I tell where the camera focused?
point
Can I view photos as they are taken?
Image review
Is there an automatic playback (“slide
Slide show
show”) option?
222, 264
236
262
234
235
263
264
264
265
266
Retouching Photographs
Question
How do I bring out details in shadows in
backlit areas or areas outside the range
of the flash?
Can I get rid of red eye?
Can I crop photographs on the camera?
Can I create a monochrome copy of a
photograph?
Can I create a copy with different colors?
viii
Key phrase
See page
D-Lighting
354
Red-eye correction
Trim
355
356
Monochrome
357
Filter effects
358
Question
Can I use the camera to create JPEG
copies of NEF (RAW) photographs?
Can I overlay two photos to make a
single image?
Key phrase
See page
Color balance
358
Image overlay
359
Viewing or Printing Photographs on Other Devices
Question
Can I view my photos on TV?
Can I view my photos in High
Definition?
Key phrase
Television playback
HDMI
Connecting to a
computer
How do I print photographs?
Printing photographs
Can I print photos without a computer? Printing via USB
Can I print the date on my photographs? Time stamp
How do I order professional prints?
Print set (DPOF)
How do I copy photos to my computer?
See page
255
257
238
243
244
247
253
Optional Accessories
Question
Key phrase
What optional flash units (Speedlights)
Optional flash units
can I use?
What lenses can I use?
Compatible lenses
What AC adapters, battery packs,
remote cords, and viewfinder
Other accessories
accessories are available for my camera?
Approved memory
What memory cards can I use?
cards
What software is available for my
Other accessories
camera?
See page
377
370
385
390
388
ix
Table of Contents
Q&A Index ................................................................................................iv
For Your Safety .................................................................................. xviii
Notices.....................................................................................................xxi
Introduction
1
Overview....................................................................................................2
Getting to Know the Camera..............................................................3
Camera Body ....................................................................................... 3
The Control Panel.............................................................................. 8
The Viewfinder Display..................................................................10
The Shooting Information Display ............................................12
The Command Dials .......................................................................16
Quick Start Guide................................................................................. 22
Tutorial
25
Camera Menus...................................................................................... 26
Using Camera Menus .....................................................................28
Help ......................................................................................................31
First Steps ............................................................................................... 32
Charge the Battery ..........................................................................32
Insert the Battery .............................................................................34
Attach a Lens.....................................................................................36
Basic Setup.........................................................................................38
Insert a Memory Card.....................................................................41
Formatting Memory Cards...........................................................43
Adjust Viewfinder Focus ...............................................................45
Basic Photography and Playback................................................... 46
Deleting Unwanted Photographs ................................................. 56
x
Image Recording Options
57
Image Area............................................................................................. 58
Image Quality........................................................................................ 64
Image Size .............................................................................................. 69
Focus
71
Focus Mode ........................................................................................... 72
AF-Area Mode....................................................................................... 74
Focus Point Selection......................................................................... 76
Focus Lock.............................................................................................. 78
Manual Focus........................................................................................ 81
Release Mode
83
Choosing a Release Mode ................................................................ 84
Continuous Mode................................................................................ 86
Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View) ............................. 89
Self-Timer Mode.................................................................................102
Mirror up Mode ..................................................................................104
ISO Sensitivity
105
Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually..............................................106
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control ..........................................................108
Exposure
111
Metering ...............................................................................................112
Exposure Mode ..................................................................................114
e: Programmed Auto...................................................................116
f: Shutter-Priority Auto...............................................................118
g: Aperture-Priority Auto............................................................119
h: Manual .........................................................................................121
xi
Long Time-Exposures.......................................................................124
Autoexposure (AE) Lock..................................................................126
Exposure Compensation.................................................................128
Bracketing ............................................................................................130
White Balance
139
White Balance Options ....................................................................140
Fine-Tuning White Balance............................................................143
Choosing a Color Temperature ....................................................147
Preset Manual .....................................................................................148
Image Enhancement
159
Picture Controls..................................................................................160
Creating Custom Picture Controls.......................................... 168
Active D-Lighting...............................................................................179
Color Space..........................................................................................181
Flash Photography
183
The Built-in Flash ...............................................................................184
Using the Built-in Flash....................................................................185
Flash Modes.........................................................................................188
Flash Compensation.........................................................................190
FV Lock ..................................................................................................192
Other Shooting Options
195
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings .......................196
Multiple Exposure .............................................................................198
Interval Timer Photography...........................................................203
Non-CPU Lenses.................................................................................210
Using a GPS Unit ................................................................................213
xii
More About Playback
217
Full-Frame Playback .........................................................................218
Photo Information.............................................................................220
Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback .....................232
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom........................................234
Protecting Photographs from Deletion.....................................235
Deleting Individual Photographs ................................................236
Connections
237
Connecting to a Computer ............................................................238
Direct USB Connection ...............................................................240
Wireless and Ethernet Networks .............................................242
Printing Photographs.......................................................................243
Direct USB Connection ...............................................................244
Viewing Photographs on TV..........................................................255
Standard Definition Devices .....................................................255
High-Definition Devices .............................................................257
Menu Guide
259
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images...............................260
Delete ...........................................................................................262
Playback Folder.........................................................................263
Hide Image..................................................................................263
Display Mode .............................................................................264
Image Review.............................................................................265
After Delete ................................................................................265
Rotate Tall ...................................................................................265
Slide Show...................................................................................266
Print Set (DPOF) ........................................................................267
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options ..............................268
Shooting Menu Bank...............................................................269
Reset Shooting Menu..............................................................271
xiii
Active Folder.............................................................................. 272
File Naming ................................................................................ 274
Image Quality ............................................................................ 274
Image Size................................................................................... 274
Image Area ................................................................................. 274
JPEG Compression................................................................... 275
NEF (RAW) Recording ............................................................. 275
White Balance............................................................................ 275
Set Picture Control................................................................... 275
Manage Picture Control......................................................... 275
Color Space ................................................................................ 275
Active D-Lighting ..................................................................... 276
Vignette Control....................................................................... 276
Long Exp. NR (Long Exposure Noise Reduction) .......... 277
High ISO NR................................................................................ 278
ISO Sensitivity Settings .......................................................... 278
Live View ..................................................................................... 278
Multiple Exposure.................................................................... 278
Interval Timer Shooting......................................................... 279
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning Camera Settings ..............280
Custom Setting Bank .............................................................. 282
Reset Custom Settings ........................................................... 282
a: Autofocus.................................................................................... 283
a1: AF-C Priority Selection..................................................... 283
a2: AF-S Priority Selection ..................................................... 284
a3: Dynamic AF Area............................................................... 285
a4: Focus Tracking with Lock-On ....................................... 287
a5: AF Activation ...................................................................... 287
a6: AF Point Illumination ....................................................... 288
a7: Focus Point Wrap-Around ............................................. 288
a8: AF Point Selection............................................................. 289
a9: Built-in AF-Assist Illuminator......................................... 290
a10: AF-On for MB-D10 .......................................................... 291
b: Metering/Exposure ................................................................. 292
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value .............................................. 292
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl........................................... 292
b3: Exp Comp/Fine Tune....................................................... 292
b4: Easy Exposure Compensation...................................... 293
xiv
b5: Center-Weighted Area ....................................................294
b6: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure.........................................294
c: Timers/AE Lock ..........................................................................296
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L .........................................296
c2: Auto Meter-off Delay........................................................296
c3: Self-Timer Delay .................................................................297
c4: Monitor off Delay...............................................................297
d: Shooting/Display......................................................................298
d1: Beep .......................................................................................298
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display ..................................................298
d3: Screen Tips...........................................................................298
d4: CL Mode Shooting Speed ..............................................299
d5: Max. Continuous Release ...............................................299
d6: File Number Sequence....................................................300
d7: Shooting Info Display ......................................................301
d8: LCD Illumination................................................................302
d9: Exposure Delay Mode......................................................302
d10: MB-D10 Battery Type ....................................................302
d11: Battery Order....................................................................304
e: Bracketing/Flash .......................................................................305
e1: Flash Sync Speed ...............................................................305
e2: Flash Shutter Speed..........................................................308
e3: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash...........................................309
e4: Modeling Flash...................................................................315
e5: Auto Bracketing Set..........................................................315
e6: Auto Bracketing (Mode M) .............................................316
e7: Bracketing Order................................................................317
f: Controls.........................................................................................318
f1: D Switch................................................................................318
f2: Multi Selector Center Button..........................................318
f3: Multi Selector.......................................................................319
f4: Photo Info/Playback ..........................................................320
f5: Assign FUNC. Button .........................................................320
f6: Assign Preview Button......................................................324
f7: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button..................................................325
f8: Shutter Speed and Aperture Lock................................326
f9: Customize Command Dials ............................................326
f10: Release Button to Use Dial............................................328
f11: No Memory Card? ............................................................329
xv
f12: Reverse Indicators ........................................................... 330
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup...............................................331
Format Memory Card ............................................................. 332
LCD Brightness.......................................................................... 332
Clean Image Sensor................................................................. 332
Lock Mirror up for Cleaning ................................................. 332
Video Mode................................................................................ 333
HDMI............................................................................................. 333
World Time ................................................................................. 334
Language .................................................................................... 334
Image Comment ...................................................................... 335
Auto Image Rotation .............................................................. 336
Dust off Ref Photo.................................................................... 337
Battery Info................................................................................. 340
Wireless Transmitter ............................................................... 341
Image Authentication ............................................................ 342
Copyright Information ........................................................... 343
Save/Load Settings.................................................................. 344
GPS ................................................................................................ 346
Virtual Horizon .......................................................................... 346
Non-CPU Lens Data................................................................. 346
AF Fine Tune .............................................................................. 347
Firmware Version ..................................................................... 348
N The Retouch Menu: Creating Retouched Copies .............349
D-Lighting................................................................................... 354
Red-Eye Correction.................................................................. 355
Trim ............................................................................................... 356
Monochrome............................................................................. 357
Filter Effects................................................................................ 358
Color Balance............................................................................. 358
Image Overlay ........................................................................... 359
Side-by-Side Comparison ..................................................... 362
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu ......................................364
Displaying Recent Settings ....................................................... 368
xvi
Technical Notes
369
Compatible Lenses ...........................................................................370
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights)..............................................377
Other Accessories..............................................................................385
Caring for the Camera......................................................................391
Storage..............................................................................................391
Cleaning ...........................................................................................391
The Low-Pass Filter.......................................................................392
“Clean Now” ...............................................................................392
“Clean at Startup/Shutdown” ..............................................393
Manual Cleaning.......................................................................395
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions..........................398
Troubleshooting ................................................................................402
Error Messages ...................................................................................409
Appendix ..............................................................................................417
Specifications......................................................................................428
Index.......................................................................................................438
xvii
For Your Safety
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to
others, read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using
this equipment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use
the product will read them.
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the
precautions listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:
icon marks warnings. To prevent possible injury, read all
A This
warnings before using this Nikon product.
❚❚ WARNINGS
A Keep the sun out of the frame
Keep the sun well out of the frame
when shooting backlit subjects.
Sunlight focused into the camera
when the sun is in or close to the
frame could cause a fire.
A Do not look at the sun through the
viewfinder
Viewing the sun or other strong
light source through the
viewfinder could cause
permanent visual impairment.
A Using the viewfinder diopter control
When operating the viewfinder
diopter control with your eye to
the viewfinder, care should be
taken not to put your finger in
your eye accidentally.
xviii
A Turn off immediately in the event of
malfunction
Should you notice smoke or an
unusual smell coming from the
equipment or AC adapter
(available separately), unplug the
AC adapter and remove the
battery immediately, taking care
to avoid burns. Continued
operation could result in injury.
After removing the battery, take
the equipment to a Nikonauthorized service center for
inspection.
A Do not disassemble
Touching the product’s internal
parts could result in injury. In the
event of malfunction, the product
should be repaired only by a
qualified technician. Should the
product break open as the result
of a fall or other accident, remove
the battery and/or AC adapter
and then take the product to a
Nikon-authorized service center
for inspection.
A Do not use in the presence of flammable
gas
Do not use electronic equipment
in the presence of flammable gas,
as this could result in explosion or
fire.
A Keep out of reach of children
Failure to observe this precaution
could result in injury.
A Do not place the strap around the neck of
an infant or child
Placing the camera strap around
the neck of an infant or child
could result in strangulation.
A Observe proper precautions when
handling batteries
Batteries may leak or explode if
improperly handled. Observe the
following precautions when
handling batteries for use in this
product:
• Use only batteries approved for
use in this equipment.
• Do not short or disassemble the
battery.
• Be sure the product is off before
replacing the battery. If you are
using an AC adapter, be sure it is
unplugged.
• Do not attempt to insert the
battery upside down or
backwards.
• Do not expose the battery to
flame or to excessive heat.
• Do not immerse in or expose to
water.
• Replace the terminal cover when
transporting the battery. Do not
transport or store the battery with
metal objects such as necklaces or
hairpins.
• Batteries are prone to leakage
when fully discharged. To avoid
damage to the product, be sure to
remove the battery when no
charge remains.
• When the battery is not in use,
attach the terminal cover and
store in a cool, dry place.
• The battery may be hot
immediately after use or when the
product has been used on battery
power for an extended period.
Before removing the battery turn
the camera off and allow the
battery to cool.
• Discontinue use immediately
should you notice any changes in
the battery, such as discoloration
or deformation.
xix
A Observe proper precautions when
A Use appropriate cables
handling the quick charger
When connecting cables to the
• Keep dry. Failure to observe this
input and output jacks, use only
precaution could result in fire or
the cables provided or sold by
electric shock.
Nikon for the purpose to maintain
• Dust on or near the metal parts of
compliance with product
the plug should be removed with
regulations.
a dry cloth. Continued use could
A CD-ROMs
result in fire.
CD-ROMs containing software or
• Do not handle the power cable or
manuals should not be played
go near the charger during
back on audio CD equipment.
thunderstorms. Failure to observe
Playing CD-ROMs on an audio CD
this precaution could result in
player could cause hearing loss or
electric shock.
damage the equipment.
• Do not damage, modify, or
A Observe caution when using the flash
forcibly tug or bend the power
• Using the camera with the flash in
cable. Do not place it under
close contact with the skin or
heavy objects or expose it to heat
other objects could cause burns.
or flame. Should the insulation be
• Using the flash close to the
damaged and the wires become
subject’s eyes could cause
exposed, take the power cable to
temporary visual impairment.
a Nikon-authorized service
Particular care should be
representative for inspection.
observed when photographing
Failure to observe this precaution
infants, when the flash should be
could result in fire or electric
no less than one meter (39 in.)
shock.
from the subject.
• Do not handle the plug or charger
with wet hands. Failure to
A Avoid contact with liquid crystal
observe this precaution could
Should the monitor break, care
result in electric shock.
should be taken to avoid injury
due to broken glass and to
prevent the liquid crystal from the
monitor touching the skin or
entering the eyes or mouth.
xx
Notices
• No part of the manuals included with this • Nikon will not be held liable for any
product may be reproduced, transmitted, damages resulting from the use of this
transcribed, stored in a retrieval system,
product.
or translated into any language in any
• While every effort has been made to
form, by any means, without Nikon’s prior ensure that the information in these
written permission.
manuals is accurate and complete, we
would appreciate it were you to bring
• Nikon reserves the right to change the
any errors or omissions to the attention
specifications of the hardware and
of the Nikon representative in your area
software described in these manuals at
(address provided separately).
any time and without prior notice.
Notices for Customers in the U.S.A.
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement
This equipment has been tested and found
to comply with the limits for a Class B digital
device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules.
D700
These limits are designed to provide
reasonable protection against harmful
CAUTIONS
interference in a residential installation.
Modifications
This equipment generates, uses, and can
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not The FCC requires the user be notified
installed and used in accordance with the that any changes or modifications made
to this device that are not expressly
instructions, may cause harmful
approved by Nikon Corporation may
interference to radio communications.
void the user’s authority to operate the
However, there is no guarantee that
equipment.
interference will not occur in a particular
installation. If this equipment does cause
harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by
turning the equipment off and on, the user
is encouraged to try to correct the
interference by one or more of the
following measures:
• Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.
• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that to which
the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/television technician for help.
Interface Cables
Use the interface cables sold or provided
by Nikon for your equipment. Using
other interface cables may exceed the
limits of Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.
Notice for Customers in the State of California
WARNING: Handling the cord on this product
may expose you to lead, a chemical known
to the State of California to cause birth
defects or other reproductive harm. Wash
hands after handling.
Nikon Inc., 1300 Walt Whitman Road,
Melville, New York 11747-3064, U.S.A.
Tel.: 631-547-4200
xxi
Notices for Customers in Canada
CAUTION
This Class B digital apparatus complies
with Canadian ICES-003.
ATTENTION
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est
conforme à la norme NMB-003 du
Canada.
Symbol for Separate Collection in European Countries
This symbol indicates that this product is to be collected separately.
The following apply only to users in European countries:
• This product is designated for separate collection at an appropriate
collection point. Do not dispose of as household waste.
• For more information, contact the retailer or the local authorities in
charge of waste management.
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or
reproduced by means of a scanner, digital camera, or other device may be
punishable by law.
• Items prohibited by law from being copied or
reproduced
Do not copy or reproduce paper
money, coins, securities, government
bonds, or local government bonds,
even if such copies or reproductions
are stamped “Sample.”
The copying or reproduction of paper
money, coins, or securities which are
circulated in a foreign country is
prohibited.
• Cautions on certain copies and reproductions
The government has issued cautions
on copies or reproductions of
securities issued by private companies
(shares, bills, checks, gift certificates,
etc.), commuter passes, or coupon
tickets, except when a minimum of
necessary copies are to be provided for
business use by a company. Also, do
not copy or reproduce passports
issued by the government, licenses
issued by public agencies and private
groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as
passes and meal coupons.
Unless the prior permission of the
government has been obtained, the
copying or reproduction or unused
• Comply with copyright notices
postage stamps or post cards issued by
The copying or reproduction of
the government is prohibited.
copyrighted creative works such as
The copying or reproduction of stamps books, music, paintings, woodcuts,
prints, maps, drawings, movies, and
issued by the government and of
photographs is governed by national
certified documents stipulated by law
and international copyright laws. Do
is prohibited.
not use this product for the purpose of
making illegal copies or to infringe
copyright laws.
xxii
Disposing of Data Storage Devices
Please note that deleting images or formatting memory cards or other data storage
devices does not completely erase the original image data. Deleted files can
sometimes be recovered from discarded storage devices using commercially
available software, potentially resulting in the malicious use of personal image
data. Ensuring the privacy of such data is the user’s responsibility.
Before discarding a data storage device or transferring ownership to another
person, erase all data using commercial deletion software, or format the device and
then completely refill it with images containing no private information (for
example, pictures of empty sky). Be sure to also replace any pictures selected for
preset manual. Care should be taken to avoid injury when physically destroying
data storage devices.
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories
Nikon cameras are designed to the highest standards and include complex
electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery
chargers, batteries, AC adapters, and flash accessories) certified by Nikon
specifically for use with this Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to
operate within the operational and safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.
The use of non-Nikon electronic accessories could damage the
camera and may void your Nikon warranty. The use of third-party
rechargeable Li-ion batteries not bearing the Nikon holographic seal
shown at right could interfere with normal operation of the camera
or result in the batteries overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact a local authorized
Nikon dealer.
xxiii
A
Before Taking Important Pictures
Before taking pictures on important occasions (such as at weddings or
before taking the camera on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the
camera is functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages
or lost profits that may result from product malfunction.
A
Life-Long Learning
As part of Nikon’s “Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product
support and education, continually-updated information is available online at the following sites:
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/
• For users in Europe and Africa: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support
• For users in Asia, Oceania, and the Middle East: http://www.nikon-asia.com/
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information,
tips, answers to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on
digital imaging and photography. Additional information may be
available from the Nikon representative in your area. See the following
URL for contact information: http://imaging.nikon.com/
xxiv
XIntroduction
X
This chapter covers information you will need to know before
using the camera, including the names of camera parts.
Overview.............................................................................. pg. 2
Getting to Know the Camera ........................................... pg. 3
Camera Body ....................................................................................... pg. 3
The Control Panel .............................................................................. pg. 8
The Viewfinder Display.................................................................. pg. 10
The Shooting Information Display ............................................ pg. 12
The Command Dials ....................................................................... pg. 16
Quick Start Guide ............................................................. pg. 22
1
Overview
X
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon single-lens reflex (SLR)
digital camera. Please be sure to read all instructions thoroughly
to get the most from the camera, and keep them where they will
be read by all those who use the product.
D
Use Only Nikon Brand Accessories
Only Nikon brand accessories certified by Nikon specifically for use with
your Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within its
operational and safety requirements. THE USE OF NON-NIKON ACCESSORIES
COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR NIKON WARRANTY.
D
Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or a
Nikon-authorized service representative once every one to two years, and
that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to
these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly
recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories
regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional flash units,
should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.
2
Getting to Know the Camera
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls
and displays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and
refer to it as you read through the rest of the manual.
X
Camera Body
1
9
10
2
11
3
12
4
13
5
6
14
7
15
8
1 Release mode dial.......................85
2 Release mode dial
lock release....................................85
3 QUAL (image quality/size)
button ......................................65, 70
Two-button reset button ...... 196
4 Eyelet for camera strap .............21
5 WB (white balance)
button ....................... 141, 146, 147
6 ISO (ISO sensitivity) button.... 106
7 Accessory shoe
(for optional flash unit) .......... 384
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
BS-1 accessory shoe cover ....377
Power switch ................................ 46
Shutter-release button ...... 53, 54
E (exposure compensation)
button...........................................128
Two-button reset button .......196
I (exposure mode)
button...........................................115
Q (format) button..................... 43
Eyelet for camera strap............. 21
Focal plane mark (E) ............... 82
Control panel ..................................8
3
Camera Body (Continued)
X
1 Built-in flash ............................... 185
2 Flash pop-up button............... 185
3 M (flash mode) button ............ 185
Y (flash compensation)
button .......................................... 190
4 Flash sync terminal
cover ............................................. 384
5 Ten-pin remote terminal
cover ....................................213, 389
6 Flash sync terminal.................. 384
7 Ten-pin remote
terminal ..............................213, 389
4
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
Connector cover ............. 240, 255
HDMI mini-pin connector......257
Video connector........................255
USB connector................. 240, 245
DC-IN connector for
optional AC adapter EH-5a
or EH-5..........................................385
Lens release button ................... 37
Focus-mode selector.......... 72, 81
Meter coupling lever ...............430
Mirror ........................... 89, 104, 395
8
9
1
10
X
2
3
4
5
11
6
7
12
1 AF-assist illuminator ............... 290 6 Battery-chamber cover
Self-timer lamp ......................... 103
latch................................................. 34
Red-eye reduction lamp........ 188 7 Contact cover for optional
2 Sub-command dial.....................16
MB-D10 battery pack ..............385
3 Depth-of-field preview
8 CPU contacts
button .................................115, 324 9 Mounting index .......................... 36
4 Fn button .........131, 135, 193, 320 10 Lens mount................................... 82
5 Battery-chamber cover .............34 11 Tripod socket
12 Body cap ......................................388
5
Camera Body (Continued)
X
1
2
3
4
Viewfinder .....................................45 8 L (protect) button ................235
? (help) button ............................. 31
Viewfinder eyepiece...................45
Eyepiece shutter lever...............45 9 W (thumbnail/playback
zoom out) button .....................232
O (delete) button............... 56, 236
Q (format) button.....................43 10 X (playback zoom in)
button...........................................234
5 K (playback) button ....... 55, 218
11
J (OK) button.............................. 30
6 Monitor.......................... 55, 89, 218
7 G (menu) button.......... 26, 259
6
X
1 Diopter adjustment control ....45 8 Focus selector lock..................... 76
2 Metering selector..................... 113 9 Memory card slot cover............ 41
3 A (AE/AF lock)
10 AF-area mode selector ............. 74
button ............................ 78, 79, 325 11 Memory card access
4 B (AF-ON) button ..........73, 96
lamp ......................................... 42, 54
5 Main command dial ...................16 12 R (information display/quick
settings display) button ........... 12
6 Multi selector................................28
7 Center of multi selector ............28
7
The Control Panel
X
1
2
14
3
13
4
5
6
7
1 Shutter speed ......................118, 121
12
11
10
9
8
4 Exposure mode ............................ 114
Exposure compensation
5 Image size..........................................70
value................................................. 128 6 Image quality ...................................65
Flash compensation value ....... 190 7 White balance fine-tuning
ISO sensitivity................................ 106
indicator.......................................... 146
White balance fine-tuning ....... 146 8 White balance ............................... 140
Color temperature....................... 147 9 Number of exposures
White balance preset
remaining ..........................................47
number............................................ 157
Number of shots remaining
Number of shots in exposure
before memory buffer fills...........87
and flash bracketing
Capture mode indicator............ 239
sequence ........................................ 131
Preset white balance
Number of shots in WB
recording indicator ..................... 151
bracketing sequence.................. 135
Manual lens number................... 212
Number of intervals for
10 “K” (appears when memory
interval timer
remains for over 1000
photography ................................. 206
exposures) .........................................47
Focal length
11 Flash mode..................................185
(non-CPU lenses) ......................... 212
12 Multiple exposure
2 Shutter speed lock icon............. 326
indicator.......................................... 200
3 Flexible program indicator....... 117
8
15
28
16
27
17
18
19
26
25
24
23
22
20
21
13 Aperture (f-number)..........119, 121
Aperture
(number of stops)...............120, 373
Exposure and flash
bracketing increment ................ 132
WB bracketing increment......... 136
Number of shots per
interval ............................................ 206
Maximum aperture
(non-CPU lenses) ......................... 212
14 Aperture stop indicator....120, 373
15 Flash compensation
indicator.......................................... 190
16 Exposure compensation
indicator.......................................... 128
17 Flash sync indicator .................... 305
18 ISO sensitivity indicator............. 106
Auto ISO sensitivity
indicator.......................................... 108
19 “Clock not set” indicator .... 40, 410
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
X
MB-D10 battery indicator ......... 304
Battery indicator .............................46
Interval timer indicator.............. 206
Electronic analog exposure
display.............................................. 123
Exposure compensation ........... 128
Exposure and flash
bracketing progress
indicator.......................................... 131
WB bracketing progress
indicator.......................................... 135
Tilt indicator................................... 322
“Beep” indicator ........................... 298
GPS connection indicator......... 214
Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator ................... 131
WB bracketing indicator............ 135
Aperture lock icon ....................... 326
Color temperature indicator....... 147
9
The Viewfinder Display
1
2
3
X
4
5
6
7 8
18 19
10
9
10 11
12
13 14
20
21
22
15
23
16
17
24
1 Framing grid (displayed when
On is selected for Custom
Setting d2; not displayed when
DX format (24 × 16) is selected
for Image area; pg. 58).......... 298
2 AF area brackets ...................45, 94
3 12-mm reference circle for
center-weighted metering ... 112
4 Focus points........................ 76, 289
5 Focus indicator......................53, 82
6 Metering...................................... 112
7 Autoexposure (AE) lock ......... 126
8 Shutter speed lock icon ......... 326
9 Shutter speed...................118, 121
10 Aperture lock icon ................... 326
11 Aperture (f-number) ......119, 121
Aperture
(number of stops) .............120, 373
12 Exposure mode......................... 114
13 Flash compensation
indicator ...................................... 190
14 Exposure compensation
indicator ...................................... 128
15 ISO sensitivity ............................ 106
16 Number of exposures
remaining ...................................... 47
Number of shots remaining
before memory buffer fills... 53, 87
White balance recording
indicator.......................................151
Exposure compensation
value..............................................128
Flash compensation value.....190
17 Flash-ready indicator...............185
18 FV lock indicator .......................193
19 Flash sync indicator .................305
20 Aperture stop indicator .......... 120
21 Electronic analog exposure
display ..........................................123
Exposure compensation
display ..........................................128
X
Tilt indicator................................... 322
22 Battery indicator ......................... 46
23 Auto ISO sensitivity
indicator.......................................108
24 “K” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)..................................... 47
D No Battery
When the battery is totally exhausted or no battery is inserted, the display
in the viewfinder will dim. This is normal and does not indicate a
malfunction. The viewfinder display will return to normal when a fullycharged battery is inserted.
D The Control Panel and Viewfinder Displays
The brightness of the control panel and viewfinder displays varies with
temperature, and the response times of the displays may drop at low
temperatures. This is normal and does not indicate a malfunction.
11
The Shooting Information Display
X
Shooting information, including shutter
speed, aperture, the number of exposures
remaining, buffer capacity, and AF-area
mode, is displayed in the monitor when the
R button is pressed. Press the R button
again to change selected settings (pg. 15).
R button
To clear shooting information from the
monitor, press the R button a third time or
press the shutter-release button halfway. At default settings, the
monitor will turn off automatically if no operations are performed
for about 10 seconds.
A
See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor stays on, see Custom
Setting c4 (Monitor off delay, pg. 297). For information on changing the
color of the lettering in the shooting information display, see Custom
Setting d7 (Shooting info display, pg. 301).
12
4
1 23
567
20
19
18
17
9
10
11
12
16
15
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
8
14
Exposure mode......................... 114
Flexible program indicator ... 117
Shutter speed lock icon ......... 326
Shutter speed...................118, 121
Exposure compensation
value ............................................. 128
Flash compensation value.... 190
Number of shots in bracketing
sequence............................131, 135
Focal length
(non-CPU lenses)...................... 212
Color temperature ................... 147
Color temperature
indicator ...................................... 147
Aperture stop indicator....120, 373
Aperture lock icon ................... 326
Aperture (f-number) ......119, 121
Aperture
(number of stops) .............120, 373
Bracketing increment ....132, 136
Maximum aperture
(non-CPU lenses)...................... 212
Electronic analog exposure
display.......................................... 123
Exposure compensation ........... 128
Bracketing progress
indicator.................................131, 135
X
13
10 Camera battery indicator......... 46
11 MB-D10 battery type
display ..........................................304
MB-D10 battery indicator......303
12 “K” (appears when memory
remains for over 1000
exposures)..................................... 47
13 Number of exposures
remaining ..................................... 87
Manual lens number ...............212
14 Auto-area AF indicator ............. 75
Focus points indicator .............. 76
AF-area mode indicator ........... 75
3D-tracking indicator.......75, 286
15 White balance ............................140
White balance fine-tuning
indicator.......................................146
16 Image quality ............................... 64
17 Image size ..................................... 69
18 Vignette control ........................276
19 Release mode (single frame/
continuous) indicator................ 84
Continuous shooting speed ... 87
20 Flash sync indicator .................305
13
The Shooting Information Display (Continued)
21
22 23
24
25 2627
X
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
21 ISO sensitivity indicator ......... 106
Auto ISO sensitivity indicator
........................................................ 108
22 Exposure compensation
indicator ...................................... 128
23 Flash compensation
indicator ...................................... 190
24 Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator................ 131
WB bracketing indicator........ 135
25 GPS connection indicator ..... 214
26 Metering...................................... 112
27 “Beep” indicator........................ 298
28 Multiple exposure indicator... 200
29 Interval timer indicator .......... 206
30 Copyright Information
indicator ...................................... 343
31 Image comment indicator.... 335
14
37
36
32 Active D-Lighting indicator ....180
33 Color space indicator ..............181
34 Depth-of-field preview button
assignment .................................324
35 Fn button assignment .............320
36 AE-L/AF-L button
assignment .................................325
37 Picture Control indicator........163
38 Long exposure noise reduction
indicator.......................................277
39 Custom settings bank .............282
40 Shooting menu bank ..............269
41 High ISO noise reduction
indicator.......................................278
42 FV lock indicator .......................193
43 Flash mode........................ 185, 189
44 “Clock not set” indicator...40, 410
❚❚ The Quick Settings Display
To change settings for the items listed
below, press the R button in the shooting
information display. Highlight items using
the multi selector and press J to jump to
the menu for the highlighted item.
X
R button
1
10
2
9
3
8
7
6
1 Active D-Lighting..................... 180 6
2 Color space................................. 181 7
3 Depth-of-field preview button
assignment................................. 324 8
4 Fn button assignment............. 320 9
5 AE-L/AF-L button
10
assignment................................. 325
5
4
Picture Control...........................162
Long exposure noise
reduction .....................................277
Custom settings bank .............282
Shooting menu bank ..............269
High ISO noise reduction.......278
A Viewing Button Assignments
0, 2, and 4 icons indicate the “button press” function (pg. 320)
performed respectively by the depth-of-field preview button, Fn button,
and AE-L/AF-L button. The “button+dials” functions (pg. 323) are indicated
by 1, 3, and 5 icons. If separate functions have been assigned to
“button press” and “button + dials,” the latter assignment can be viewed
by pressing the W button.
15
The Command Dials
The main- and sub-command dials are used alone or in
combination with other controls to adjust a variety of settings.
X
M button
Fn button
Flash mode/
Flash
compensation
Bracketing
Sub-command dial
QUAL button
Image quality/
size
WB button
White balance
ISO button
ISO sensitivity
16
E button
Exposure
compensation
I button
Exposure
mode
Main command dial
❚❚ Image Quality and Size
Press the QUAL button and rotate the command dials.
Set image
quality
(pg. 65)
X
+
QUAL button
Choose an image
size (pg. 70)
Main command dial
Control panel
+
QUAL button
Sub-command dial
Control panel
❚❚ ISO Sensitivity
Press the ISO button and rotate the main command dial.
Set ISO
sensitivity
(pg. 106)
+
ISO button
Main command dial
Control panel
17
❚❚ Exposure
Press the I button and rotate the main command dial to choose
the exposure mode.
X
Choose the
exposure mode
(pg. 114)
+
I button
Main command dial
Control panel
Use the command dials to adjust exposure.
Choose a
combination of
aperture and
shutter speed
(exposure mode
P; pg. 117)
+
Exposure
mode e
Choose a shutter
speed (exposure
mode S or M;
pp. 118, 121)
Control panel
Main
command dial
Control panel
Sub-command
dial
Control panel
+
Exposure
mode f or h
Choose an
aperture
(exposure
mode A or M;
pp. 119, 121)
+
Exposure
mode g or h
18
Main
command dial
Set exposure
compensation
(pg. 128)
+
E button
Activate or
cancel
bracketing/
select number
of shots in
bracketing
sequence
(pp. 131, 134)
Main command dial
X
Control panel
+
Fn button
Select
bracketing
exposure
increment
(pg. 132)
Main command dial
Control panel
+
Fn button
Sub-command dial
Control panel
A
The Fn Button
Depending on the option selected for Custom Setting f5 (Assign FUNC.
button, pg. 320), the Fn button and command dials can be used to adjust
bracketing settings (the default option), choose the image area, lock
shutter speed and aperture, select shutter speed and aperture in steps of
1 EV, choose pre-specified lens data for non-CPU lenses, or select
dynamic-area AF.
A The Depth-of-Field Preview and AE-L/AF-L Buttons
Depending on the options selected for Custom Settings f6 (Assign
preview button, pg. 324) and f7 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, pg. 325), the
depth-of-field preview and AE-L/AF-L buttons can be used with the
command dials to perform the same functions as the Fn button.
19
❚❚ White Balance
Press the WB button and rotate the command dials.
X
Choose a white
balance setting
(pg. 141)
+
WB button
Fine-tune
white balance
(pg. 146), set
color
temperature
(pg. 147), or
WB button
choose a white
balance preset (pg. 157)
Main command dial
Control panel
+
Sub-command dial
Control panel
❚❚ Flash Settings
Press the M button and rotate the command dials.
Choose flash
mode (pg. 185)
+
M button
Adjust flash
compensation
(pg. 190)
Control panel
+
M button
20
Main command dial
Sub-command dial
Control panel
Attaching the AN-D700 Camera Strap
Attach the camera strap securely to the two eyelets on the camera
body as shown below.
X
The BM-9 Monitor Cover
A clear plastic cover is provided with the camera
to keep the monitor clean and protect it when
the camera is not in use. To attach the cover,
insert the projection on the top of the cover into
the matching indentation above the camera
monitor (q) and press the bottom of the cover
until it clicks into place (w).
To remove the cover, hold the camera firmly and
pull the bottom of the cover gently outwards as
shown at right.
21
Quick Start Guide
Follow these steps for a quick start with your camera.
X
1 Charge the battery (pg. 32).
2 Insert the battery (pg. 34).
3 Attach a lens
(pg. 36).
Mounting
index
4 Insert a memory card (pg. 41).
Front
5 Turn the camera on (pg. 46).
For information on choosing a language
and setting the time and date, see page
38. See page 45 for information on
adjusting viewfinder focus.
22
6 Check camera settings (pp. 46, 49).
Exposure mode
Battery level
Image size
Number of exposures remaining
Image quality
X
White balance
ISO sensitivity
Control panel
Viewfinder display
7 Select single-servo autofocus (pp. 51, 72).
Rotate the focus-mode selector to S (single-servo autofocus).
8 Focus and shoot
(pp. 53, 54).
Press the shutter-release
button halfway to focus, then
press the shutter-release
button the rest of the way
down to take the photograph.
Focus indicator
9 View the
photograph (pg. 55).
K button
10 Delete unwanted
photos (pg. 56).
Press O twice to delete
the current photograph.
O button
23
X
24
sTutorial
s
This section describes how to use the camera menus, how to ready
the camera for use, and how to take your first pictures and play
them back.
Camera Menus .................................................................. pg. 26
Using Camera Menus ..................................................................... pg. 28
Help ...................................................................................................... pg. 31
First Steps .......................................................................... pg. 32
Charge the Battery .......................................................................... pg. 32
Insert the Battery ............................................................................. pg. 34
Attach a Lens..................................................................................... pg. 36
Basic Setup......................................................................................... pg. 38
Insert a Memory Card..................................................................... pg. 41
Adjust Viewfinder Focus................................................................ pg. 45
Basic Photography and Playback...................................pg. 46
25
Camera Menus
Most shooting, playback, and setup options
can be accessed from the camera menus.
To view the menus, press the G button.
G button
s
Tabs
Choose from playback, shooting,
Custom Settings, setup, retouch,
and My menus (see following
page).
Slider shows position in current
menu.
Current settings
are shown by
icons.
Q
If “Q” icon is displayed, help for
current item can be viewed by
pressing L (Q) button (pg. 31).
26
Menu options
Options in current menu.
❚❚ Menus
The following menus are available:
Menu
Description
Adjust playback settings and manage photos
D Playback
(pg. 260).
C Shooting
Adjust shooting settings (pg. 268).
A Custom Settings Personalize camera settings (pg. 280).
Format memory cards and perform basic camera
B Setup
setup (pg. 331).
Create retouched copies of existing photographs
N Retouch
(pg. 349).
Create a menu of custom options (pg. 364). If
O My Menu
desired, a menu of recently-used settings can be
displayed in place of My Menu (pg. 368).
s
27
Using Camera Menus
❚❚ Menu Controls
The multi selector and J button are used to navigate the menus.
Multi selector
s
Move cursor up
Cancel and return
to previous menu
Select
highlighted
item
Select
highlighted item
or display submenu
Move cursor down
J button
Select highlighted
item
❚❚ Navigating the Menus
Follow the steps below to navigate the menus.
1
Display the menus.
Press the G button to display the
menus.
2
Highlight the icon for the
current menu.
Press 4 to highlight the icon
for the current menu.
28
G button
3
Select a menu.
Press 1 or 3 to select the desired menu.
s
4
Position the cursor in the
selected menu.
Press 2 to position the cursor
in the selected menu.
5
Highlight a menu item.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a
menu item.
6
Display options.
Press 2 to display options for
the selected menu item.
7
Highlight an option.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an
option.
29
8
Select the highlighted item.
Press J to select the highlighted item.
To exit without making a selection,
press the G button.
s
J button
Note the following points:
• Menu items that are displayed in gray are not currently available.
• While pressing 2 or the center of the multi selector generally has
the same effect as pressing J, there are some cases in which
selection can only be made by pressing J.
• To exit the menus and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway (pg. 54).
30
Help
If a Q icon is displayed at the bottom left
corner of the monitor, help can be
displayed by pressing the L (Q) button. A
description of the currently selected option
or menu will be displayed while the button
is pressed. Press 1 or 3 to scroll through
the display.
s
L button
31
First Steps
Charge the Battery
s
The camera is powered by an EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery
(supplied).
The EN-EL3e is not fully charged at shipment. To maximize
shooting time, charge the battery in the supplied MH-18a quick
charger before use. About two and a quarter hours are required to
fully recharge the battery when no charge remains.
1
Plug the charger in.
Insert the AC adapter plug into the
battery charger and plug the power
cable into an electrical outlet.
Remove the terminal cover.
32
n
Liio
Remove the terminal cover from the
battery.
BA
TT
ER
Y
PA
CK
2
3
Insert the battery.
Insert the battery into the charger. The
CHARGE lamp will blink while the battery
charges.
s
4
Remove the battery when charging
is complete.
Charging is complete when the CHARGE
lamp stops blinking. Remove the battery
and unplug the charger.
33
Insert the Battery
1
Turn the camera off.
Power switch
Always turn the camera off
before inserting or removing
batteries.
s
2
Open the battery-chamber cover.
Open the battery-chamber cover on the
bottom of the camera.
3
Insert the battery.
Insert the battery as shown at right.
4
Close the battery-chamber cover.
❚❚ Removing the Battery
Before removing the battery, turn the camera off. To prevent
short-circuits, replace the terminal cover when the battery is not in
use.
34
D The Battery and Charger
Read and follow the warnings and cautions on pages xviii–xx and 398–401 of
this manual. To prevent short-circuits, replace the terminal cover when
the battery is not in use.
Do not use the battery at ambient temperatures below 0°C (32°F) or
above 40°C (104°F). Charge indoors at ambient temperatures in the
vicinity of 5–35°C (41–95°F); for best results, charge the battery at
temperatures above 20°C (68°F). Battery capacity may temporarily drop if
the battery is charged at low temperatures or used at a temperature
below the temperature at which it was charged. If the battery is charged
at a temperature below 5°C (41°F), the battery life indicator in the Battery
info (pg. 340) display may show a temporary decrease.
s
The battery may be hot immediately after use. Wait for the battery to cool
before recharging.
Use the charger with compatible batteries only. Unplug when not in use.
D Incompatible Batteries
This camera can not be used with EN-EL3 or EN-EL3a rechargeable Li-ion
batteries for the D100, D70 series, or D50 or with the MS-D70 CR2 battery
holder.
A EN-EL3e Rechargeable Li-ion Batteries
The supplied EN-EL3e shares information with compatible devices,
enabling the camera to show battery charge state in six levels (pg. 46).
The Battery info option in the setup menu details battery charge, battery
life, and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last charged
(pg. 340).
35
Attach a Lens
Care should be taken to prevent dust from entering the camera
when the lens is removed.
s
1
Remove the rear lens cap and the camera body cap.
After confirming that the camera is off, remove the rear lens
cap from the lens and remove the camera body cap.
q
2
w
Attach the lens.
Keeping the mounting
mark on the lens
aligned with the
mounting mark on the
Mounting
camera body, position
index
the lens in the camera’s
bayonet mount. Being
careful not to press the
lens-release button,
rotate the lens counter-clockwise until it clicks into place.
If the lens is equipped with an A-M or
M/A-M switch, select A (autofocus) or M/
A (autofocus with manual priority).
36
3
Remove the lens cap.
q
w
q
❚❚ Detaching the Lens
s
Be sure the camera is off when removing or
exchanging lenses. To remove the lens, press
and hold the lens release button while turning
the lens clockwise. After removing the lens,
replace the lens caps and camera body cap.
D CPU Lenses with Aperture Rings
In the case of CPU lenses equipped with an aperture ring (pg. 370), lock
aperture at the minimum setting (highest f-number). See the lens manual
for details.
A Lens
An AF-S VR Zoom-Nikkor 24-120mm f/3.5-5.6G IF-ED lens is used in this
manual for illustrative purposes.
Mounting index
Focal length
scale
Focal length index
CPU contacts (pg. 370)
Lens cap
Rear cover
Focus mode switch (pg. 36)
Zoom ring
VR (vibration reduction) ON/OFF
switch
Focus ring (pg. 81)
37
Basic Setup
s
The language option in the setup menu is automatically
highlighted the first time menus are displayed. Choose a language
and set the time and date. Note that if the time and date are not
set, B will blink in the monitor and the time and date recorded
with photographs will be incorrect.
1
Turn the camera on.
2
Select Language.
Power switch
Press G to display the camera menus,
then select Language in the setup
menu. For information on using menus,
see “Using Camera Menus” (pg. 28).
3
Select a language.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the
desired language and press J.
38
G button
4
Select World time.
Select World time and press 2.
5
Set time zone.
s
A time-zone selection dialog
will be displayed. Press 4 or 2
to highlight the local time zone
(the UTC field shows the
difference between the
selected time zone and
Coordinated Universal Time, or
UTC, in hours) and press J.
6
Turn daylight saving time
on or off.
Daylight saving time options
will be displayed. Daylight
saving time is off by default; if
daylight saving time is in effect in the local time zone, press 1
to highlight On and press J.
7
Set the date and time.
The dialog shown at right will
be displayed. Press 4 or 2 to
select an item, 1 or 3 to
change. Press J when the
clock is set to the current date
and time.
39
8
s
Set date format.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the
order in which the year, month,
and day will be displayed and
press J.
9
Exit to shooting mode.
Press the shutter-release button halfway
to exit to shooting mode.
A
The Clock Battery
The camera clock is powered by an independent, rechargeable power
source, which is charged as necessary when the main battery is installed
or the camera is powered by an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter
(pg. 385). Two days of charging will power the clock for about three
months. If the B icon flashes in the control panel, the clock battery is
exhausted and the clock has been reset. Set the clock to the correct time
and date.
A
The Camera Clock
The camera clock is less accurate than most watches and household
clocks. Check the clock regularly against more accurate time pieces and
reset as necessary.
40
Insert a Memory Card
The camera stores photographs on Type I CompactFlash memory
cards (available separately; pg. 390). Type II CompactFlash cards
and microdrives can not be used. The following section describes
how to insert and format a memory card.
1
Turn the camera off.
s
Power switch
Always turn the camera off
before inserting or removing
memory cards.
2
Open the card slot cover.
Slide the card slot cover out (q) and
open the card slot (w).
3
Insert the memory card.
Insert the memory card with the front
label toward the monitor (q). When the
memory card is fully inserted, the eject
button will pop up (w) and the green
access lamp will light briefly.
D
Inserting Memory Cards
Insert the memory card terminals
first. Inserting the card upside down
or backwards could damage the
camera or the card. Check to be sure
that the card is in the correct
orientation.
Front
Access lamp
Direction of insertion
Terminals
Front
41
4
Close the card slot cover.
Close (q) and latch (w) the card slot
cover.
s
❚❚ Removing Memory Cards
1
Turn the camera off.
Confirm that the access lamp is off and
turn the camera off.
Access lamp
2
Remove the memory card.
Open the memory card slot cover and
press the eject button (q) to partially
eject the card (w). The memory card can
then be removed by hand. Do not push
on the memory card while pressing the
eject button. Failure to observe this precaution could damage
the camera or memory card.
42
Formatting Memory Cards
Memory cards must be formatted before first use. Format the card
as described below.
D Formatting Memory Cards
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they may contain.
Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you wish to keep to a
computer before proceeding (pg. 238).
1
Turn the camera on.
2
Press the Q buttons.
s
Power switch
O button
I button
Hold the Q (I and O)
buttons down simultaneously
for approximately two
seconds.
A blinking C will appear in the shutter-speed displays in
the control panel and viewfinder. To exit without formatting
the memory card, wait six seconds (the default setting) until
C stops blinking or press any button other than the Q
(I and O) buttons.
3
Press the Q buttons again.
Press the Q (I and O) buttons together a second time
while C is blinking to format the memory card. Do not
remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the power
source during formatting.
When formatting is complete, the control panel and
viewfinder will show the number of photographs that can be
recorded at current settings.
43
D
s
Memory Cards
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when
removing memory cards from the camera.
• Memory cards that have been formatted in a computer or other device
must be reformatted in the camera before they can be used for
recording or playback.
• Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not
remove memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove
or disconnect the power source during formatting or while data are
being recorded, deleted, or copied to a computer. Failure to observe
these precautions could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera
or card.
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution
could damage the card.
• Do not expose to water, heat, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.
A
No Memory Card
If no memory card is inserted, the control panel
and viewfinder will show S. If the camera is
turned off with a charged EN-EL3e battery and
no memory card inserted, S will be
displayed in the control panel.
A
See Also
See page 332 for information on formatting memory cards using the
Format memory card option in the setup menu.
44
Adjust Viewfinder Focus
The camera is equipped with diopter adjustment to accommodate
individual differences in vision. Check that the display in the
viewfinder is in focus before shooting.
1
Lift the diopter adjustment control.
s
Remove the lens cap, turn the camera
on, and pull the diopter adjustment
control out (q).
2
Focus the viewfinder.
Rotate the diopter control until the
viewfinder display, focus points, and AF
area brackets are in sharp focus.
AF area bracket
Focus point
3
Replace the diopter adjustment
control.
Push the diopter adjustment control
back in (e).
A Diopter Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses
Corrective lenses (available separately; pg. 386)
can be used to further adjust viewfinder diopter.
Before attaching a diopter-adjustment viewfinder
lens, remove the DK-17 viewfinder eyepiece by
closing the viewfinder shutter to release the
eyepiece lock (q) and then unscrewing the
eyepiece as shown at right (w).
45
Basic Photography and Playback
Turn the Camera On
s
Before taking photographs, turn the camera on and check the
battery level and number of exposures remaining as described
below.
1
Turn the camera on.
Power switch
Turn the camera on. The
control panel will turn on and
the display in the viewfinder
will light.
2
Check the battery level.
Check the battery level in the control
panel or viewfinder.
Icon *
Control panel Viewfinder
Description
L
—
Battery fully charged.
K
—
J
—
Battery partially discharged.
I
—
Low battery. Prepare to charge battery
H
d
or ready spare battery.
H
d
Shutter release disabled. Charge or
(blinks)
(blinks) exchange battery.
* No icon displayed when camera is powered by optional AC adapter.
46
3
Check the number of exposures
remaining.
The exposure-count displays in the
control panel and viewfinder show
the number of photographs that
can be taken at current settings.
When this number reaches zero, A
will flash in the exposure-count
displays while the shutter-speed
displays will show a blinking n
or j.
s
A Large-Capacity Memory Cards
When enough memory remains on the memory
card to record a thousand or more pictures at
current settings, the number of exposures
remaining will be shown in thousands, rounded
down to the nearest hundred (e.g., if there is
room for approximately 1,260 exposures, the
exposure count display will show 1.2 K).
47
A
s
LCD Illuminators
Holding the power switch in the D
Power switch
position activates the exposure meters
and control panel backlights (LCD
illuminators), allowing the display to be
read in the dark. After the power
switch is released, the illuminator will
remain lit for six seconds (at default
settings) while the camera exposure
meters are active or until the shutter is released or the power switch is
rotated to D again.
A
Auto Meter Off
At default settings, the shutter speed and aperture displays in the control
panel and viewfinder will turn off if no operations are performed for about
six seconds (auto meter off ), reducing the drain on the battery. Press the
shutter-release button halfway to reactivate the display in the viewfinder
(pg. 54).
6s
Exposure meters on
Exposure meters off
Exposure meters on
The length of time before the exposure meters turn off automatically can
be adjusted using Custom Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay, pg. 296).
A
Camera Off Display
If the camera is turned off with a battery and
memory card inserted, the frame count and
number of exposures remaining will be displayed
(some memory cards may only display this
information when the camera is on).
48
Control panel
Adjust Camera Settings
This tutorial describes how to take photos at default settings.
1
Check camera settings.
Exposure mode
s
Image size
Image quality
White balance
Control panel
ISO sensitivity
Viewfinder display
Default settings are listed below.
Option
Image
quality
Image size
ISO
sensitivity
White
balance
Exposure
mode
Focus
point
Default
NORM
(JPEG
normal)
L
(Large)
Description
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio
of roughly 1 : 8 (Size priority selected for
JPEG compression). Ideal for snapshots.
FX format images are 4,256 × 2,832 pixels in
size.
ISO sensitivity (digital equivalent of film
200
speed) set to ISO 200.
v
White balance is adjusted automatically for
(Auto)
natural colors under most types of lighting.
e
Camera automatically adjusts shutter speed
(Programmed and aperture for optimal exposure in most
auto)
situations.
Center
focus point
(singlepoint AF)
Page
64
69
106
140
114
76
Focus point
Viewfinder focus point display is shown
above. Camera focuses on subject in center
focus point when shutter-release button is
pressed halfway.
49
2
Choose exposure mode e.
I button
Press the I button and rotate the
main command dial to select exposure
mode e. The camera will automatically
adjust shutter speed and aperture for
optimal exposure in most situations.
s
Main command
dial
3
Choose single frame
release mode.
Release mode dial
lock release
Hold the release mode dial lock
release down and turn the
release mode dial to S (single
frame). At this setting, the
camera will take one
Release mode dial
photograph each time the
shutter-release button is
pressed.
4
Choose single-point AF.
Rotate the AF-area mode
selector until it clicks into place
pointing to K (single-point
AF). At this setting, the user
can choose the focus point.
50
AF-area mode
selector
5
Choose single-servo
autofocus.
Focus-mode
selector
Rotate the focus-mode selector
until it clicks into place
pointing to S (single-servo
autofocus). At this setting, the
camera will automatically focus
on the subject in the selected
focus point when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. Pictures can only be taken when the camera is in
focus.
6
Choose matrix metering.
s
Metering selector
Rotate the metering selector to
a (matrix metering). Matrix
metering uses information
from the 1,005-segment RGB
sensor to ensure optimal
results for the entire frame.
51
Ready the Camera
s
When framing photographs in the
viewfinder, hold the handgrip in your right
hand and cradle the camera body or lens
with your left. Keep your elbows propped
lightly against your torso for support and
place one foot half a pace ahead of the other
to keep you upper body stable.
Hold the camera as shown at right when
framing photographs in portrait (tall)
orientation.
For information on framing photographs in
the monitor, see page 89.
52
Focus and Shoot
1
Press the shutterrelease button
halfway to focus
(pg. 54).
s
At default settings, the
camera will focus on the
subject in the center
Focus
Buffer
focus point. Frame a
indicator
capacity
photo in the viewfinder
with the main subject positioned in the center focus point and
press the shutter-release button halfway. If the camera is able
to focus, a beep will sound and the in-focus indicator (I) will
appear in the viewfinder. If the subject is dark, the AF-assist
illuminator may light automatically to assist the focus
operation.
Viewfinder display
I
2
4
2 4
(blinks)
Description
Subject in focus.
Focus point is between camera and subject.
Focus point is behind subject.
Camera unable to focus on subject in focus
point using autofocus.
While the shutter-release button is pressed halfway,
focus will lock and the number of exposures that
can be stored in the memory buffer (“t”; pg. 87) will
be shown in the viewfinder display.
For information on what to do if the camera is unable to focus
using autofocus, see “Getting Good Results with Autofocus”
(pg. 80).
53
2
Press the shutter-release
button the rest of the way
down to shoot.
Smoothly press the shutterrelease-button the rest of the
Access lamp
way down to take the picture.
While the photograph is being
recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to the card
slot cover will light.
s
D
The Memory Card Access Lamp
Do not eject the memory card, turn the camera off, or remove or
disconnect the power source until the memory card access lamp has gone
out.
A
The Shutter-Release Button
The camera has a two-stage shutter-release button. The camera focuses
when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. To take the
photograph, press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down.
Focus
54
Take photograph
Viewing Photographs
1
Press the K button.
A photograph will be displayed in the monitor.
s
2
View additional pictures.
Additional pictures can be
displayed by pressing 4 or 2.
To view additional information
on the current photograph,
press 1 and 3 (pg. 220).
N I KON D700
1 / 10
1/ 250
AUTO
F11
200
35mm
0, 0
100ND700 DSC_0001. JPG
15/07/2008 10: 02: 27
NOR
ORMAL
AL
4256x2832
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the
shutter-release button halfway.
A Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (pg. 265),
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s (the
default setting) after shooting.
55
Deleting Unwanted
Photographs
s
To delete the photograph currently displayed in the monitor, press
the O button. Note that photographs can not be recovered once
deleted.
1
Display the photograph.
Display the photograph you wish to delete as described in
“Viewing Photographs” on the previous page.
K button
2
Delete the photograph.
Press the O button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed.
O button
Press the O button again to delete the image and return to
playback. To exit without deleting the picture, press K.
A
Delete
To delete multiple images, use the Delete option in the playback menu
(pg. 262).
56
dImage Recording
Options
d
This section describes how to choose image area, quality, and size.
Image Area .........................................................................pg. 58
Image Quality.....................................................................pg. 64
Image Size...........................................................................pg. 69
57
Image Area
d
The camera’s FX format (36.0 × 23.9 mm)
image sensor can be used to record pictures
with an image area (picture angle)
equivalent to a 35 mm (135) format film
camera. Image area is selected using the
Image area option in the shooting menu. At
the default setting of Auto DX crop, the camera will automatically
crop pictures to the DX picture angle when a DX format lens is
attached. The Choose image area option can be used to select a
35 mm picture angle.
❚❚ Auto DX Crop
Choose whether to automatically select a DX crop when a DX lens
is attached.
Option
Description
On
Camera automatically selects DX crop when DX lens is
(default) attached.
Off
Crop selected for Choose image area is used.
58
❚❚ Choose Image Area
Choose the image area used when Off is selected for Auto DX
crop (pg. 61).
Option
c
a
Description
Images are recorded in FX
format using the full area of the
image sensor (36.0 × 23.9 mm),
producing a picture angle
FX format
equivalent to a Nikkor lens on a
(36x24)
35 mm format camera. The
edges of pictures taken with DX
format lenses will be blacked
out.
An area at the center of the
image sensor 23.5 × 15.6 mm
(shown by the DX format crop
DX format in the viewfinder) is used to
record pictures in DX format.
(24x16)
To calculate the approximate
focal length of the lens in
35 mm format, multiply by 1.5.
d
DX format
crop
A The DX Format Crop
If Auto (the default setting) or On is selected for Custom Setting a6 (AF
point illumination), the DX format crop is shown by a frame in the
viewfinder when DX format is active. If Off is selected, the area outside
the DX format crop is indicated by a transparent mask.
DX format crop
59
A
DX Lenses
DX lenses are designed for use with DX format cameras and have a smaller
picture angle than lenses for 35 mm format cameras. If Auto DX crop is
off and FX format (36 × 24) is selected for Image area when a DX lens is
attached, the edges of the image may be eclipsed. This may not be
apparent in the viewfinder, but when the images are played back you may
notice a drop in resolution or that the edges of the picture are blacked
out.
d
DX format (24 × 16)
image circle
DX format
FX format
FX format (36 × 24)
image circle
60
Image area can be set using the Image area option in the
shooting menu or (if image area is assigned to the Fn button) by
pressing the Fn button and rotating the main command dial.
❚❚ The Image Area Menu
1
Select Image area.
Highlight Image area in the
shooting menu (pg. 268) and
press 2.
2
d
Choose an option.
Highlight Auto DX crop or
Choose image area and
press 2.
3
Adjust settings.
Choose an option and press J.
The selected crop is displayed
in the viewfinder (pg. 59).
61
❚❚ The Fn Button
1
Assign image area to the Fn button.
Select Choose image area for Custom
Setting f5, Assign FUNC. button >
FUNC. button + dials (pg. 323).
d
2
Choose the image area.
Press the Fn button and rotate
the main command dial until
the desired crop is displayed
in the viewfinder (pg. 59).
This operation can not be
performed while a multiple
exposure is being recorded
(pg. 201).
Fn button
The option currently selected for
image area can be viewed by pressing
the Fn button to display the image
area in the viewfinder, control panel,
or shooting information display. FX
format is displayed as “36 – 24”, DX
format as “24 – 16”.
62
Main command
dial
D Auto DX Crop
The Fn button can not be used to select image area when a DX lens is
attached and Auto DX crop is on.
A
The Fn, Depth-of-Field Preview, and AE-L/AF-L Buttons
Changes to image area settings can be made using the Fn button (the
default setting, see Custom Setting f5, Assign FUNC. button, pg. 320), the
depth-of-field preview button (Custom setting f6, Assign preview
button, pg. 324), or the AE-L/AF-L button (Custom Setting f7, Assign AE-L/
AF-L button, pg. 325). Note that some “button press” options can not be
combined with options using “+dials.”
d
A Image Size
Image size varies with the option selected for image area.
63
Image Quality
The following image quality options are available:
d
Option
File type
NEF (RAW)
NEF
TIFF (RGB)
TIFF
(RGB)
JPEG fine
JPEG normal
JPEG
JPEG basic
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG fine
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG normal
NEF (RAW)+
JPEG basic
NEF/
JPEG
Description
Raw data from the image sensor are saved
directly to the memory card in Nikon Electronic
Format (NEF). Use with images that will be
transferred to a computer for printing or
processing. Note that once transferred to a
computer, NEF (RAW) images can only be
viewed using compatible software such as
ViewNX (supplied; pg. 238) or Capture NX 2
(available separately; pg. 388).
Record uncompressed TIFF-RGB images at a bit
depth of 8 bits per channel (24-bit color). TIFF is
supported by a wide variety of imaging
applications.
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:4 (fine image quality). *
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:8 (normal image quality). *
Record JPEG images at a compression ratio of
roughly 1:16 (basic image quality). *
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one fine-quality JPEG image.
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one normal-quality JPEG image.
Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image
and one basic-quality JPEG image.
* Size priority selected for JPEG compression.
A
File Size
See page 423 for information on the number of pictures that can be
recorded at different image quality and size settings.
64
Image quality is set by pressing
the QUAL button and rotating the
main command dial until the
desired setting is displayed in the
control panel.
QUAL button
Main command
dial
d
Control panel
A The Image Quality Menu
Image quality can also be adjusted using the Image quality option in the
shooting menu (pg. 268).
65
A
NEF (RAW) Recording
The NEF (RAW) recording item in the shooting menu controls
compression (pg. 67) and bit depth (pg. 68) for NEF (RAW) images.
A
JPEG Compression
JPEG images can be compressed for relatively uniform file size or optimal
image quality. The JPEG compression option in the shooting menu can
be used to choose the type of compression (pg. 67).
NEF (RAW)+JPEG
d A
When photographs taken at NEF (RAW) + JPEG fine, NEF (RAW) + JPEG
normal, or NEF (RAW) + JPEG basic are viewed on the camera, only the
JPEG image will be displayed. When photographs taken at these settings
are deleted, both NEF and JPEG images will be deleted.
A
“+NEF (RAW)”
If +NEF (RAW) is selected for Custom Setting f5
(Assign FUNC. button, pg. 320) and image
quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or
JPEG basic, an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded
with the next picture taken after the Fn button is
pressed. “RAW” will be displayed in the control
panel until the picture is taken. To exit without
recording an NEF (RAW) copy, press the Fn
button again before taking the picture. This
function can also be assigned to the depth-offield preview button (pg. 324) or the AE-L/AF-L
button (pg. 325).
66
Fn button
❚❚ The JPEG Compression Menu
The JPEG compression item in the shooting menu offers the
following options for JPEG images:
Option
Description
Images are compressed to produce relatively
Size priority
uniform file size. Quality varies with scene
O (default)
recorded.
Optimal image quality. File size varies with
P Optimal quality
scene recorded.
d
❚❚ The NEF (RAW) Recording Menu: Type
The NEF (RAW) recording > Type item in the shooting menu
offers the following compression options for NEF (RAW) images:
Option
Lossless
N compressed
(default)
Description
NEF images are compressed using a reversible
algorithm, reducing file size by about 20–40%
with no effect on image quality.
NEF images are compressed using a nonO Compressed
reversible algorithm, reducing file size by about
40–55% with almost no effect on image quality.
NEF images are not compressed. Recording time
Uncompressed
increases slightly.
67
❚❚ The NEF (RAW) Recording Menu: NEF (RAW) Bit Depth
The NEF (RAW) recording > NEF (RAW) bit depth item in the
shooting menu offers the following bit-depth options for NEF
(RAW) images:
d
Option
Description
12-bit
q
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 12 bits.
(default)
NEF (RAW) images are recorded at a bit-depth of 14 bits,
r 14-bit producing files larger than 12-bit files but increasing the
color data recorded.
A
NEF (RAW) Images
Note that the option selected for image size does not affect the size of NEF
(RAW) images. When opened in software such as Capture NX 2 (available
separately) or ViewNX (supplied), NEF (RAW) images have the dimensions
given for large (L-size) images.
68
Image Size
Image size is measured in pixels. Choose from Large (the default
option), Medium, or Small (note that image size varies depending
on the option selected for Image area, pg. 58):
Image area
FX format
(36 × 24)
DX format
(24 × 16)
Option
L
M
S
L
M
S
Size (pixels)
4,256 × 2,832
3,184 × 2,120
2,128 × 1,416
2,784 × 1,848
2,080 × 1,384
1,392 × 920
Print size (cm/in.) *
54.1 × 36.0/21.3 × 14.2
40.4 × 26.9/15.9 × 20.6
27.0 × 18.0/10.6 × 7.1
35.4 × 23.5/13.9 × 9.2
26.4 × 17.6/10.4 × 6.9
17.7 × 11.7/7.0 × 4.6
d
* Approximate size when printed at 200 dpi. Print size in inches equals image
size in pixels divided by printer resolution in dots per inch (dpi;
1 inch = approximately 2.54 cm). Print size decreases as printer resolution
increases.
69
Image size can be set by pressing
the QUAL button and rotating the
sub-command dial until the
desired option is displayed in the
control panel.
QUAL button
Sub-command
dial
d
Control panel
A
The Image Size Menu
Image size can also be adjusted using the Image size option in the
shooting menu (pg. 268).
70
NFocus
– Controlling How the Camera Focuses
This section describes the options that control how your camera
focuses.
N
Focus Mode ........................................................................pg. 72
AF-Area Mode ....................................................................pg. 74
Focus Point Selection .......................................................pg. 76
Focus Lock ..........................................................................pg. 78
Manual Focus .....................................................................pg. 81
71
Focus Mode
N
Focus mode is controlled by the
Focus-mode selector
focus-mode selector on the front of
the camera. There are two
autofocus (AF) modes, in which the
camera focuses automatically
when the shutter-release button is
pressed halfway, and one manual
focus mode, in which focus must be adjusted manually using the
focusing ring on the lens:
Option
Description
Camera focuses when shutterrelease button is pressed halfway.
Focus locks when in-focus
indicator (I) appears in
S
viewfinder, and remains locked
Single-servo while shutter-release button is
AF
pressed halfway (focus lock). At
Focus
default settings, shutter can only
indicator
be released when in-focus
indicator is displayed (focus
priority).
Camera focuses continuously while shutter-release button
is pressed halfway. If subject moves, camera will engage
C
predictive focus tracking (pg. 73) to predict final distance to
Continuoussubject and adjust focus as necessary. At default settings,
servo AF
shutter can be released whether or not subject is in focus
(release priority).
Camera does not focus automatically; focus must be
adjusted manually using the lens focusing ring. If
M
maximum aperture of lens is f/5.6 or faster, viewfinder
Manual
focus indicator can be used to confirm focus (electronic
(pg. 81)
range finding; pg. 82), but photographs can be taken at any
time, whether or not subject is in focus.
72
Choose single-servo AF for landscapes and other stationary subjects. Continuous-servo AF may be a better choice with erraticallymoving subjects. Manual focus is recommended when the camera
is unable to focus using autofocus.
A
The B Button
Autofocus can also be activated by pressing the
B button.
B button
N
A Predictive Focus Tracking
In continuous-servo AF, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if
the subject moves toward or away from the camera while the shutterrelease button is pressed halfway or the B button is pressed. This
allows the camera to track focus while attempting to predict where the
subject will be when the shutter is released.
A See Also
For information on using focus priority in continuous-servo AF, see
Custom Setting a1 (AF-C priority selection, pg. 283). For information on
using release priority in single-servo AF, see Custom Setting a2 (AF-S
priority selection, pg. 284). For information on preventing the camera
from focusing when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, see
Custom Setting a5 (AF activation, pg. 287).
73
AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode determines how the
focus point is selected in autofocus
mode. To select the AF-area mode,
rotate the AF-area mode selector.
The following options are available:
AF-area mode selector
N
74
Mode
Description
User selects focus point manually; camera focuses on
K
subject in selected focus point only. Use for relatively static
Singlecompositions with subjects that will stay in selected focus
point AF
point.
• In continuous-servo AF (pg 72), user selects focus point
manually; if subject briefly leaves selected focus point,
camera will focus based on information from surrounding
points. Number of focus points used can be selected from
I
9, 21, and 51 using Custom Setting a3 (Dynamic AF area,
Dynamicpg. 285). If 51 points (3D-tracking) is selected for
area AF
Custom Setting a3, focus point will be selected
automatically using 3D-tracking.
• In single-servo AF, user selects focus point manually; camera
focuses on subject in selected focus point only.
Camera automatically detects
subject and selects focus point. If
type G or D lens is used (pg. 370),
camera can distinguish human
H
subjects from background for
Auto-area
improved subject detection. In
AF
single-servo AF, active focus points
are highlighted for about one second after camera focuses.
Active focus points are not displayed in continuous-servo
AF.
A AF-Area Mode
AF-area mode is shown in the shooting
information display when the R button is
pressed.
AF-area mode
indicator
AF-area mode
Information
display
K Single-point AF
Custom Setting a3 (Dynamic AF area, pg. 285)
N
9 points
(default)
I
Dynamic
-area AF *
21 points
51 points
51 points (3D-tracking)
H Auto-area AF
* Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining focus
points provide information to assist focus operation.
A Manual Focus
Single-point AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used.
A
See Also
For information on the settings available in dynamic-area AF, see Custom
Setting a3 (Dynamic AF area, pg. 285). For information on adjusting how
long the camera waits before refocusing when an object moves in front of
the camera, see Custom Setting a4 (Focus tracking with lock-on, pg. 287).
75
Focus Point Selection
N
The camera offers a choice of 51
focus points that together cover a
wide area of the frame. The focus
point can be selected manually,
allowing photographs to be
composed the main subject
AF-area mode selector
positioned almost anywhere in the
frame (single-point and dynamic-area AF), or automatically (autoarea AF; note that manual focus point detection is not available
when auto-area AF is selected). To select the focus point manually:
1
Rotate the focus selector
lock to ●.
This allows the multi selector to
be used to select the focus
point.
2
Focus selector lock
Select the focus point.
Use the multi selector to select
the focus point. At default
settings, the center focus point
can be selected by pressing the
center of the multi selector.
The focus selector lock can be
rotated to the locked (L)
position following selection to
prevent the selected focus
point from changing when the multi selector is pressed.
76
A See Also
For information on choosing when the focus point is illuminated, see
Custom Setting a6 (AF point illumination, pg. 288). For information on
setting focus-point selection to “wrap around,” see Custom Setting a7
(Focus point wrap-around, pg. 288). For information on choosing the
number of focus points that can be selected using the multi selector, see
Custom Setting a8 (AF point selection, pg. 289). For information on
changing the role of the multi selector center button, see Custom Setting
f2 (Multi selector center button, pg. 318).
N
77
Focus Lock
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing,
making it possible to focus on a subject that will not be in a focus
point in the final composition. It can also be used when the
autofocus system is unable to focus (pg. 80).
1
Focus.
Position the subject in the selected focus
point and press the shutter-release
button halfway to initiate focus.
N
2
Check that the in-focus indicator
(I) appears in the viewfinder.
Single-servo AF
Focus will lock automatically
when the in-focus indicator
appears, and remain locked
until you remove your finger
from the shutter-release
button. Pressing the AE-L/AF-L button while the shutter-release
button is pressed halfway will lock both focus and exposure
(an AE-L icon appears in the viewfinder when exposure is
locked; see page 126).
A
See Also
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L,
pg. 296), exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway.
78
Continuous-servo AF
Press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock both
focus and exposure (an AE-L icon appears
in the viewfinder, see page 126). Focus
and exposure will remain locked while
the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, even if
you later remove your finger from the
shutter-release button.
Shutter-release
button
q
N
w
AE-L/AF-L button
3
Recompose the
photograph and shoot.
Focus will remain locked
between shots as long as the
shutter-release button is kept
pressed halfway, allowing several photographs in succession
to be taken at the same focus setting. Focus will also remain
locked between shots while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.
Do not change the distance between the camera and the
subject while focus lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus
again at the new distance.
A See Also
For information on choosing the role played by the AE-L/AF-L button, see
Custom Setting f7 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, pg. 325).
79
Getting Good Results with Autofocus
N
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed
below. The shutter release may be disabled if the camera is unable
to focus under these conditions, or the in-focus indicator (●) may
be displayed and the camera may sound a beep, allowing the
shutter to be released even when the subject is not in focus. In
these cases, use manual focus (pg. 81) or use focus lock (pg. 78) to
focus on another subject at the same distance and then
recompose the photograph.
There is little or no contrast between the subject
and the background
Example: subject is the same color as the background.
The focus point contains objects at different
distances from the camera
Example: subject is inside a cage.
The subject is dominated by regular geometric
patterns
Example: a row of windows in a skyscraper.
The focus point contains areas of sharply
contrasting brightness
Example: subject is half in the shade.
Background objects appear larger than the subject
Example: a building is in the frame behind the subject.
The subject contains many fine details
Example: a field of flowers or other subjects that are
small or lack variation in brightness.
80
Manual Focus
Manual focus is available for
lenses that do not support
autofocus (non-AF Nikkor lenses)
or when the autofocus does not
produce the desired results
(pg. 80). To focus manually, set
the focus-mode selector to M and
adjust the lens focusing ring until
the image displayed on the clear
matte field in the viewfinder is in
focus. Photographs can be taken
at any time, even when the image
is not in focus.
Focus-mode
selector
N
A A-M Selection/Autofocus with Manual Priority
If the lens supports A-M selection, set the lens A-M switch to M (manual).
If the lens supports M/A (autofocus with manual priority), focus can be
adjusted manually, regardless of the mode selected with the lens. See the
documentation provided with your lens for details.
81
The Electronic Rangefinder
N
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6
or faster, the viewfinder focus indicator can
be used to confirm whether the subject in
the selected focus point is in focus (the
focus point can be selected from any of the
51 focus points). After positioning the
subject in the selected focus point, press
the shutter-release button halfway and
rotate the lens focusing ring until the infocus indicator (I) is displayed. Note that
with the subjects listed on page 80, the infocus indicator may sometimes be
displayed when the subject is not in focus;
confirm focus in the viewfinder before
shooting.
A
Focal Plane Position
To determine the distance between your
subject and the camera, measure from the
focal plane mark (E) on the camera body.
The distance between the lens mounting
flange and the focal plane is 46.5 mm
(1.83 in.).
46.5 mm
Focal plane mark
82
kRelease Mode
– Single Frame, Continuous, Live View, Self-Timer, or
Mirror Up
Release mode determines how the camera takes photographs:
one at a time, in a continuous sequence, with the view through the
lens displayed in the monitor, with a timed shutter-release delay,
or with the mirror raised to enhance shutter response and
minimize vibration.
k
Choosing a Release Mode............................................... pg. 84
Continuous Mode............................................................. pg. 86
Framing Pictures in the Monitor (Live View)............... pg. 89
Self-Timer Mode ............................................................ pg. 102
Mirror up Mode.............................................................. pg. 104
83
Choosing a Release Mode
The camera supports the following release modes:
k
Mode
S
Single frame
CL
Continuous
low speed
CH
Continuous
high speed
a
Live view
E
Self-timer
MUP
Mirror up
Description
Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release
button is pressed.
While shutter-release button is held down, camera records
1–5 frames per second. 1 Frame rate can be chosen using
Custom Setting d4 (CL mode shooting speed, pg. 299).
While shutter-release button is held down, camera records
up to 5 frames per second. 2
Frame pictures in monitor (pg. 89). Recommended at high
or low angles or in other situations in which viewfinder is
hard to use or when enlarged view in monitor can assist in
obtaining very precise focus.
Use self-timer for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused
by camera shake (pg. 102).
Choose this mode to minimize camera shake in telephoto
or close-up photography or in other situations in which the
slightest camera movement can result in blurred
photographs (pg. 104).
1 Average frame rate with an EN-EL3e battery, continuous-servo AF, manual
or shutter-priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster,
remaining settings other than Custom Setting d4 at default values, and
memory remaining in memory buffer.
2 Average frame rate with an EN-EL3e battery, continuous-servo AF, manual
or shutter-priority auto exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, other
settings at default values, and memory remaining in memory buffer.
84
To choose a release mode, press
the release mode dial lock release
and turn the release mode dial to
the desired setting.
Release mode dial
lock release
Release mode dial
k
85
Continuous Mode
To take pictures in CH (continuous high speed) and CL (continuous
low speed) modes:
1
Select CH or CL mode.
Press the release mode dial
lock release and turn the
release mode dial to CH or CL.
Release mode
dial
k
2
Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
While the shutter-release button is
pressed all the way down, pictures will be taken at up to 5 fps
in continuous high speed mode, or at the frame rate selected
for Custom Setting d4 (CL mode shooting speed, pg. 299) in
continuous low speed mode.
86
A Power Source and Frame Rate
The maximum frame advance rate varies with the power source used.
Power source
Max. frame advance rate 1
EN-EL3e battery or MB-D10 battery pack
with EN-EL3e battery
MB-D10 battery pack with EN-EL4a battery
or AA-size batteries; AC adapter
5 fps 2
8 fps 3
1 Average frame rate with continuous-servo AF, manual or shutter-priority auto
exposure, a shutter speed of 1/250 s or faster, other settings at default values, and
memory remaining in memory buffer. If MB-D10 is used with AA batteries,
frame rate slows at low temperatures or when batteries are low.
2 Maximum frame advance rate is 5 fps, even when higher values are selected for
Custom Setting d4 (CL mode shooting speed, pg. 299).
3 Maximum frame rate in CL mode is 7 fps.
k
A
Buffer Size
The approximate number of images that can be
stored in the memory buffer at current settings is
shown in the exposure-count displays in the
viewfinder and control panel while the shutterrelease button is pressed. The illustration at right
shows the display when space remains in the
buffer for about 33 pictures.
87
A
The Memory Buffer
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage,
allowing shooting to continue while photographs are being saved to the
memory card. Up to 100 photographs can be taken in succession; note,
however, that frame rate will drop when the buffer is full.
k
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access
lamp next to the memory card slot will light. Depending on the number
of the images in the buffer, recording may take from a few seconds to a
few minutes. Do not remove the memory card or remove or disconnect the
power source until the access lamp has gone out. If the camera is switched
off while data remain in the buffer, the power will not turn off until all
images in the buffer have been recorded. If the battery is exhausted while
images remain in the buffer, the shutter release will be disabled and the
images transferred to the memory card.
A
See Also
For information on choosing the maximum number of photographs that
can be taken in a single burst, see Custom Setting d5 (Max. continuous
release, pg. 299). For information on the number of pictures that can be
taken in a single burst, see page 423.
88
Framing Pictures in the Monitor
(Live View)
Select live view (a) mode to frame pictures in the monitor.
Rotate the release mode dial to a.
Choose live view options in shooting menu (pg. 90).
g Hand-held (pg. 93)
Raise mirror and
display view
through lens in
monitor.
k
h Tripod (pg. 96)
Frame a picture in the
viewfinder and focus.
Exit
Frame picture in monitor.
Raise mirror and
display view
through lens in
monitor.
Exit
Focus.
Mirror clicks down and monitor
turns off.
Focus.
Monitor turns on when shutterrelease button is pressed.
Press X button to
zoom in and
check focus.
Take pictures.
Take pictures.
Check view in monitor.
Exit
89
Live View Options
Before taking pictures using live view, rotate
the mode dial to a (live view) and choose a
live view mode and the release mode that
will be used while the camera is in live view
mode. The following live view modes are
available:
Option
k
Description
Choose when taking hand-held shots of moving
g Hand-held subjects, or when framing photographs at angles that
(default)
make it difficult to use the viewfinder (pg. 93). Camera
focuses normally using phase-detection autofocus.
Choose when the camera is mounted on a tripod. View
can be enlarged in monitor for precise focus, making
this mode suitable for static subjects (pg. 96). Autofocus
h Tripod
can be used to compose photographs with subject
positioned at any point in the frame without
recomposing photograph. Camera focuses using
contrast-detect autofocus.
A
Phase-Detection Versus Contrast-Detect AF
The camera normally uses phase-detection autofocus, in which focus is
adjusted based on data from a special focusing sensor. When Tripod is
selected in live view, however, the camera uses contrast-detect autofocus,
in which the camera analyses the data from the image sensor and adjusts
focus to produce the greatest contrast. Contrast-detect autofocus takes
longer than phase-detection autofocus.
90
Release mode can be chosen from the following options:
Option
s Single frame
(default)
Continuous
t
low-speed
Continuous
u
high-speed
1
Description
Camera takes one photograph each time shutterrelease button is pressed.
While shutter-release button is held down, camera
records photographs in continuous low speed or
continuous high speed mode (pg. 87).
Select Live view.
In the shooting menu (pg.
268), highlight Live view and
press 2.
2
k
Select Live view mode.
Highlight Live view mode and
press 2.
3
Select a live view mode.
Highlight the desired mode
and press J to return to the
live view menu.
91
4
Select Release mode.
Highlight Release mode and
press 2.
5
Select a release mode.
Highlight the release mode
that will be during live view
and press J.
k
6
Exit to shooting mode.
Press the shutter-release button halfway
to exit the menus and return to shooting
mode.
92
Hand-Held Mode
1
Select live view mode.
Press the release mode dial
lock release and turn the
release mode dial to a.
Release mode
dial
2
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down.
k
The mirror will be raised and
the view through the lens will
Exit
be displayed in the camera
monitor instead of the viewfinder (for improved focus, pause
briefly with the shutter-release button pressed halfway before
pressing it the rest of the way down). To exit without taking a
picture, rotate the release mode dial to another setting or
press G.
A
Assigning Live View Mode to a Button
If Live view is selected for Custom Setting f5 (Assign FUNC. button, pg. 320)
and a mode dial is set to mode other than a or MUP, the Fn button can be
used to turn live view mode on and off. This allows the self-timer to be used
in live view mode. Note that the camera will use the release mode selected
with the release mode dial (pg. 84) rather than the mode selected in the
Release mode menu. If desired, this function can also be assigned to the
depth-of-field preview button (pg. 324) or the AE-L/AF-L button (pg. 325).
93
3
Frame a picture in the monitor.
To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 ×, press the X
button.
X button
Exit
k
While the view through the lens is zoomed in, a
navigation window will appear in the bottom right
corner of the display. Use the multi selector to scroll
within the AF area brackets.
4
Focus.
Autofocus (focus mode S or C):
Press the shutter-release
button halfway or press the
B button. The camera will
focus normally and set
exposure. Note that the mirror will click back into place while
either button is pressed, temporarily interrupting live view.
Live view is restored when the button is released. The focus
point can be selected using the multi selector.
Manual focus (focus mode M; pg. 81): Focus using the lens
focusing ring. The focus point for electronic range finding can
be selected using the multi selector.
94
5
Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release button the rest
of the way down to reset focus and
exposure and take the picture. If continuous high speed or
continuous low speed is selected for Release mode, the
monitor will turn off while the shutter-release button is
pressed. The frame advance rate for continuous mode is the
same as that selected for standard shooting.
k
D No Picture
After shooting, play the picture back in the monitor to ensure that the
photograph has been recorded. Note that the sound the mirror makes
when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway or the B button is
pressed can be mistaken for the sound of the shutter, and that pressing
the shutter-release button all the way down when the camera is unable to
focus in single-servo AF will end live view without a photograph being
recorded.
95
Tripod Mode
1
Ready the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level
surface.
2
Select live view mode.
Press the release mode dial
lock release and turn the
release mode dial to a.
k
Release mode dial
3
Frame a picture in
the viewfinder.
B button
Frame a picture in
the viewfinder and
select a focus point
using the multi
selector, then press the B button. The camera will focus
normally and set exposure. Note that the camera can not be
focused by pressing the shutter-release button halfway.
4
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down.
The mirror will be raised and
the view through the lens will
Exit
be displayed in the camera
monitor. The subject will no
longer be visible in the viewfinder. To exit without taking a
picture, rotate the release mode dial to another setting or
press G.
96
5
Check the view in the monitor.
To magnify the view in the monitor up to 13 × and check
focus, press the X button.
X button
Exit
While the view through the lens is zoomed in, a
navigation window will appear in the bottom right
corner of the display. Use the multi selector to scroll
to areas of the frame not visible in the monitor.
Press J to exit zoom.
k
Autofocus (focus mode S or C): In
tripod mode, the focus point
for contrast-detect autofocus
can be moved to any point in
Exit
the frame using the multi
selector. To focus using
Contrast-detect AF point
contrast-detect autofocus,
press the B button. The
focus point will blink green and
the monitor may brighten
while the camera focuses. If
the camera is able to focus using contrast-detect autofocus,
the focus point will be displayed in green; if the camera is
unable to focus, the focus point will blink red.
Manual focus (focus mode M; pg. 81): Use zoom for
precise focus.
97
6
Take the picture.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way
down to take the picture. If continuous high speed
or continuous low speed is selected for Release mode, the
monitor will turn off while the shutter-release button is
pressed. The frame advance rate for continuous mode is the
same as that selected for standard shooting.
k
D
Contrast-Detect Autofocus
The camera will not continue to adjust focus while the B button is
pressed in continuous-servo autofocus mode. In both single-servo and
continuous-servo autofocus modes, the shutter can be released even
when the camera is not in focus.
D
Focusing with Contrast-Detect Autofocus
Contrast-detect autofocus will take longer than normal (phase-detection)
autofocus. In the following situations, the camera may be unable to focus
using contrast-detect autofocus:
• The camera is not mounted on a tripod
• The subject contains lines parallel to the long edge of the frame
• The subject lacks contrast
• The subject in the focus point contains areas of sharply contrasting
brightness, or the subject is lit by spot lighting or by a neon sign or other
light source that changes in brightness
• A cross (star) filter or other special filter is used
• The subject appears smaller than the focus point
• The subject is dominated by regular geometric patterns (e.g., windows
in a skyscraper)
• The subject is moving
98
Note that the focus point may sometimes be displayed in green when the
camera is unable to focus.
Use an AF-S lens. The desired results may not be achieved with other
lenses or teleconverters.
A The Shooting Information Display
To hide or display indicators in the monitor in live view mode, press the R
button.
Shooting information on
Shooting information off
k
Exit
Exit
Exit
Virtual horizon
(not displayed during zoom)
Framing guides
(not displayed during zoom)
AF area brackets are displayed only in hand held mode.
Exit
Hand held
Exit
Tripod
99
D
Shooting in Live View Mode
Although they will not appear in the final picture, banding or distortion
may be visible in the monitor under fluorescent, mercury vapor, or sodium
lamps or if the camera is panned horizontally or an object moves at high
speed through frame. Bright light sources may leave after-images in the
monitor when the camera is panned. Bright spots may also appear. When
shooting in live view mode, avoid pointing the camera at the sun or other
strong light sources. Failure to observe this precaution could result in
damage to the camera’s internal circuitry.
Live view shooting ends automatically if the lens is removed.
k
Metering can not be changed in live view mode. Choose a metering
method before selecting live view mode.
Live view mode can be used for up to an hour.
27s
Note, however, that when used in live view mode
for extended periods, the camera may become
noticeably warm and the temperature of its
internal circuits may rise, resulting in image noise
Exit
and unusual colors. To prevent damage to the
camera’s internal circuits, live view shooting will
end automatically before the camera overheats. A count-down display
will appear in the monitor 30 s before shooting ends. At high ambient
temperatures, this display may appear immediately when live view mode
is selected.
Close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter after focusing. This prevents light
entering via the viewfinder from interfering with exposure.
To reduce blur in tripod mode, choose On for Custom Setting d9
(Exposure delay mode, pg. 302).
100
A Monitor Brightness
Monitor brightness can be adjusted by pressing
the K button while the view through the monitor
is displayed. Press 1 or 3 to adjust brightness
(note that monitor brightness has no effect on
pictures taken in live view mode). To return to live
view, release the K button.
Exit
A HDMI
When the camera is attached to an HDMI
video device, the camera monitor will turn
off and the video device will display the
view through the lens as shown at right.
k
Exit
A Remote Cords
If the shutter-release button on a remote cord (available separately; see
pg. 389) is pressed halfway for over a second in tripod mode, it will
activate contrast-detect autofocus. If the remote cord shutter-release
button is pressed all the way down without focusing, focus will not be
adjusted before the picture is taken.
101
Self-Timer Mode
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for selfportraits. To use the self-timer, mount the camera on a tripod
(recommended) or place the camera on a stable, level surface and
follow the steps below:
1
Select self-timer mode.
Press the release mode dial
lock release and turn the
release mode dial to E.
k
Release mode
dial
2
Frame the photograph and focus.
In single-servo autofocus (pg.
72), photographs can only be
taken if the in-focus (I)
indicator appears in the
viewfinder.
Focus-mode selector
A Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter
Close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter after
focusing. This prevents light entering via
the viewfinder from interfering with
exposure.
102
3
Start the timer.
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down to
start the timer. The self-timer
lamp (AF-assist illuminator) will start to blink and a beep will
begin to sound. Two seconds before the photograph is taken,
the self-timer lamp will stop blinking and the beeping will
become more rapid.
Raising the flash interrupts the timer. To restart, wait until the
flash-ready indicator is displayed in the viewfinder and press
the shutter-release button halfway.
k
To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the
release mode dial to another setting.
AA
In self-timer mode, a shutter speed of A is equivalent to
approximately 1/5 s.
A See Also
For information on changing the timer duration, see Custom Setting c3
(Self-timer delay, pg. 297). For information on setting a beep to sound
during the timer count-down, see Custom Setting d1 (Beep, pg. 298).
103
Mirror up Mode
Choose this mode to minimize blurring caused by camera
movement when the mirror is raised. Use of a tripod is
recommended.
1
Select mirror up mode.
Press the release mode dial
lock release and turn the
release mode dial to MUP.
k
Release mode
dial
2
Raise the mirror.
Frame the picture, focus, and then press
the shutter-release button the rest of the
way down to raise the mirror.
D
Using the Viewfinder
Note that autofocus, metering, and framing can not be confirmed in
the viewfinder while mirror is raised.
3
Take a picture.
Press the shutter-release button all the
way down again to take a picture. To
prevent blurring caused by camera
movement, press the shutter-release button smoothly, or use
an optional remote cord (pg. 389). The mirror lowers when
shooting ends.
A
Mirror up Mode
A picture will be taken automatically if no operations are performed for
about 30 s after the mirror is raised.
104
SISO Sensitivity
– Reacting Faster to Light
“ISO sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of film speed. The higher
the ISO sensitivity, the less light needed to make an exposure,
allowing higher shutter speeds or smaller apertures. This chapter
describes how to set ISO sensitivity manually and automatically.
Choosing ISO Sensitivity Manually............................ pg. 106
S
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control........................................ pg. 108
105
Choosing ISO Sensitivity
Manually
ISO sensitivity can be set to values between ISO 200 and ISO 6400
in steps equivalent to 1/3 EV. Settings of from about 0.3–1 EV below
ISO 200 and 0.3–2 EV above ISO 6400 are also available for special
situations.
S
ISO sensitivity can be adjusted by
pressing the ISO button and
rotating the main command dial
until the desired setting is
displayed in the control panel or
viewfinder.
Control panel
ISO button Main command
dial
Viewfinder
ISO sensitivity: 6400
A
The ISO Sensitivity Menu
ISO sensitivity can also be adjusted using the ISO sensitivity option in the
shooting menu (pg. 268).
106
A ISO Sensitivity Settings
The settings available depend on the option selected for Custom Setting
b1 (ISO sensitivity step value, pg. 292).
Custom Setting b1
(ISO sensitivity step value)
ISO sensitivity settings available
Lo 1, Lo 0.7, Lo 0.3, 200, 250, 320, 400, 500,
640, 800, 1000, 1250, 1600, 2000, 2500,
3200, 4000, 5000, 6400, Hi 0.3, Hi 0.7, Hi 1,
Hi 2
Lo 1, Lo 0.5, 200, 280, 400, 560, 800, 1100,
1/2 step
1600, 2200, 3200, 4500, 6400, Hi 0.5, Hi 1,
Hi 2
Lo 1, 200, 400, 800, 1600, 3200, 6400, Hi 1,
1 step
Hi 2
* If possible, the current ISO sensitivity setting is maintained when the
step value is changed. If the current ISO sensitivity setting is not
available at the new step value, ISO sensitivity will be rounded up to the
nearest available setting.
1/3 step
(default)
S
A Hi 0.3–Hi 2
The settings Hi 0.3 through Hi 2 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–2 EV
over ISO 6400 (ISO 8000–25600 equivalent). Pictures taken at these
settings are more likely to be subject to noise and color distortion.
A Lo 0.3–Lo 1
The settings Lo 0.3 through Lo 1 correspond to ISO sensitivities 0.3–1 EV
below ISO 200 (ISO 160–100 equivalent). Use for larger apertures when
lighting is bright. Contrast is slightly lower than normal; in most cases, ISO
sensitivities of ISO 200 or above are recommended.
A
See Also
For information on Custom Setting b1 (ISO sensitivity step value, pg. 292).
For information using the High ISO NR option in the shooting menu to
reduce noise at high ISO sensitivities, see page 278.
107
Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
S
If Off (the default setting) is chosen for the ISO sensitivity auto
control option in the shooting menu, ISO sensitivity will remain
fixed at the value selected by the user (see page 106). If On is
chosen, ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted if optimal
exposure can not be achieved at the value selected by the user
(flash level is adjusted appropriately). The maximum value for
auto ISO sensitivity can be selected using the Maximum
sensitivity option in the ISO sensitivity auto control menu (the
minimum value for auto ISO sensitivity is automatically set to ISO
200). In exposure modes P and A, sensitivity will only be adjusted if
underexposure would result at the shutter speed selected for
Minimum shutter speed. Slower shutter speeds may be used if
optimum exposure can not be achieved at the ISO sensitivity value
selected for Maximum sensitivity.
When On is selected, the control panel and
viewfinder show ISO-AUTO. When sensitivity
is altered from the value selected by the
user, these indicators blink and the altered
value is shown in the viewfinder.
108
A Auto ISO Sensitivity Control
Noise is more likely at higher sensitivities. Use the High ISO NR option in
the shooting menu to reduce noise (see page 278). Foreground subjects
may be underexposed in photos taken with the flash at slow shutter
speeds, in daylight, or against a bright background. Choose a flash mode
other than slow sync or select exposure mode A or M and choose a larger
aperture. Note that when the flash is used, the camera uses the shutter
speed selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync Speed, pg. 305) in place
of the value selected for Minimum shutter speed.
S
109
S
110
VExposure
– Controlling How the Camera Sets Exposure
This section describes the options available to control exposure,
including metering, exposure mode, exposure lock, exposure
compensation, and bracketing.
Metering ......................................................................... pg. 112
Exposure Mode.............................................................. pg. 114
e: Programmed Auto...................................................................
f: Shutter-Priority Auto ..............................................................
g: Aperture-Priority Auto ...........................................................
h: Manual.........................................................................................
pg. 116
pg. 118
pg. 119
pg. 121
Z
Autoexposure (AE) Lock............................................... pg. 126
Exposure Compensation.............................................. pg. 128
Bracketing....................................................................... pg. 130
111
Metering
Metering determines how the camera sets exposure. The
following options are available:
Method
a
3D color
matrix II
Z
Centerweighted
Z
b
Spot
Description
Recommended in most situations. Camera meters a wide area
of the frame and sets exposure according to distribution of
brightness, color, distance, and composition for natural
results.
Camera meters entire frame but assigns
greatest weight to area in center of
frame (defaults to 12-mm circle in
center of viewfinder; if CPU lens is
attached, area can be selected using
Custom Setting b5, Center-weighted
Center weight area 3
area, pg. 294 1). Classic meter for
portraits. 2
Camera meters circle 4 mm in diameter
(approximately 1.5% of frame). Circle is
centered on current focus point,
making it possible to meter off-center
subjects (if non-CPU lens is used or if
Auto-area AF is in effect (pg. 74),
Spot metering
camera will meter center focus point).
area 3
Ensures that subject will be correctly
exposed, even when background is
much brighter or darker. 2
1 When non-CPU lens (pg. 372) is attached, average for entire frame will be
used if Average is selected for Custom Setting b5; otherwise, centerweighted metering for non-CPU lenses will use 12-mm circle in center of
viewfinder, regardless of setting selected for Non-CPU lens data.
2 For improved precision with non-CPU lenses, specify lens focal length and
maximum aperture in Non-CPU lens data menu (pg. 211).
3 Metered area is not actually displayed in viewfinder.
112
To choose a metering method,
rotate the metering selector until
the desired mode is displayed.
Metering selector
Z
A 3D Color Matrix II Metering
In matrix metering, exposure is set using a 1005-segment RGB sensor. Use
a type G or D lens for results that include range information (3D color
matrix metering II; see page 370 for information on lens types). With other
CPU lenses, 3D range information is not included (color matrix metering
II). Color matrix metering is available when focal length and maximum
aperture of non-CPU lens are specified using Non-CPU lens data item in
setup menu (see page 211; center-weighted metering is used if focal
length or aperture is not specified).
A See Also
For information on choosing the size of the area assigned the greatest
weight in center-weighted metering, see Custom Setting b5 (Centerweighted area, pg. 294). For information on making separate
adjustments to optimal exposure for each metering method, see Custom
Setting b6 (Fine tune optimal exposure, pg. 294).
113
Exposure Mode
Exposure mode determines how the camera sets shutter speed
and aperture when adjusting exposure. Four modes are available:
programmed auto (e), shutter-priority auto (f ), aperture-priority
auto (g), and manual (h).
Mode
Z
Description
Camera sets shutter speed and aperture for
Programmed
optimal exposure. Recommended for snapshots
e auto
and in other situations in which there is little time
(pg. 116)
to adjust camera settings.
Shutter-priority User chooses shutter speed; camera selects
f auto
aperture for best results. Use to freeze or blur
(pg. 118)
motion.
User chooses aperture; camera selects shutter
Aperturespeed for best results. Use to blur background for
g priority auto
portraits or bring both foreground and
(pg. 119)
background into focus for landscape shots.
User controls both shutter speed and aperture.
Manual
h
Set shutter speed to “A” for long time(pg. 121)
exposures.
A
Lens Types
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring (pg. 370), lock the
aperture ring at the minimum aperture (highest f-number). Type G lenses
are not equipped with an aperture ring.
Non-CPU lenses (pg. 372) can only be used in exposure mode g (aperturepriority auto) and h (manual). In other modes, exposure mode g is
automatically selected when a non-CPU lens is attached. The exposure
mode indicator (e or f ) in the control panel will blink and F will be
displayed in the viewfinder.
A
See Also
See page 326 for information on locking shutter speed (modes f and h)
and aperture (modes g and h).
114
To choose the exposure mode, press the I
button and rotate the main command dial
until the desired mode is displayed in the
control panel or viewfinder.
I button
Main command
dial
A Depth-of-Field Preview
To preview the effects of aperture, press and hold
the depth-of-field preview button. The lens will
be stopped down to the aperture value selected
by the camera (modes e and f ) or the value
chosen by the user (modes g and h), allowing
depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder.
Preview button
Z
A Custom Setting e4—Modeling Flash
This setting controls whether the built-in flash and the SB-900, SB-800,
SB-600, SB-R200, and other optional flash units that support the Creative
Lighting System (CLS; see page 377) will emit a modeling flash when the
depth-of-field preview button is pressed. See page 315 for more
information.
A See Also
See page 108 for information on auto ISO sensitivity control. For
information on using the Long exp. NR option in the shooting menu for
reducing noise at slow shutter speeds, see page 277. For information on
choosing the size of the increments available for shutter speed and
aperture, see Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., pg. 292).
For information on changing the roles of the main and sub-command
dials, see Custom Setting f9 (Customize command dials > Change main/
sub, pg. 326).
115
e: Programmed Auto
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and
aperture according to a built-in program to ensure optimal
exposure in most situations. This mode is recommended for
snapshots and other situations in which you want to leave the
camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture. To take
photographs in programmed auto:
1
Select exposure mode e.
I button
Press the I button and rotate the
main command dial until e is displayed
in the viewfinder and control panel.
Z
Main command dial
2
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Shutter speed: 1/400 s
Aperture: f/10
116
A Flexible Program
In exposure mode e, different combinations of
shutter speed and aperture can be selected by
rotating the main command dial while the
exposure meters are active (“flexible program”).
Rotate the command dial to the right for large
apertures (small f-numbers) that blur background
details or fast shutter speeds that “freeze” motion. Main command dial
Rotate the command dial to the left for small
apertures (large f-numbers) that increase depth
of field or slow shutter speeds that blur motion.
All combinations produce the same exposure.
While flexible program is in effect, an asterisk (“*”)
appears in the control panel. To restore default
shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the
command dial until the asterisk is no longer
displayed, choose another mode, or turn the camera off.
Shutter speed: 1/4,000 s
Aperture: f/2.8
Z
Shutter speed: 1/80 s
Aperture: f/22
A See Also
See page 426 for information on the built-in exposure program.
117
f: Shutter-Priority Auto
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the
camera automatically selects the aperture that will produce the
optimal exposure. To take photographs in shutter-priority auto:
1
Select exposure
mode f.
I button
Press the I button and
rotate the main command
dial until f is displayed in
the viewfinder and
control panel.
Main command dial
Z
2
Choose a shutter speed.
While the exposure meters are active,
rotate the main command dial to choose
the desired shutter speed. Shutter speed
can be set to “p” or to values
between 30 s (q) and 1/8,000 s (o). Use slow shutter
speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects, high
shutter speeds to “freeze” motion.
Fast shutter speed (1/1,600 s)
3
A
Slow shutter speed (1/6 s)
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
See Also
See page 411 for information on what to do if flashing “A” indicator
appears in the shutter-speed displays.
118
g: Aperture-Priority Auto
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera
automatically selects the shutter speed that will produce the
optimal exposure. To take photographs in aperture-priority auto:
1
Select exposure
mode g.
I button
Press the I button
and rotate the main
command dial until g
is displayed in the
viewfinder and control Main command dial
panel.
2
Z
Choose an aperture.
While the exposure
meters are active,
rotate the subcommand dial to
Sub-command dial
choose aperture from
values between the
minimum and maximum for the lens. Small apertures (high fnumbers) increase depth of field (pg. 115), bringing both
foreground and background into focus. Large apertures (low
f-numbers) soften background details in portraits or other
compositions that emphasize the main subject.
Small aperture (f/32)
Large aperture (f/2.8)
119
3
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
Z
A
Non-CPU Lenses (pg. 372)
If the maximum aperture of the lens has been
specified using the Non-CPU lens data item in
setup menu (pg. 211) when a non-CPU lens is
attached, the current f-number will be displayed
in the viewfinder and control panel, rounded to
the nearest full stop. Otherwise the aperture
displays will show only the number of stops (F,
with maximum aperture displayed as FA) and
the f-number must be read from the lens aperture ring.
120
h: Manual
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and
aperture. To take photographs in manual exposure mode:
1
Select exposure
mode h.
I button
Press the I button
and rotate the main
command dial until h
is displayed in the
viewfinder and control Main command dial
panel.
Z
121
2
Choose aperture and shutter speed.
Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed, and
the sub-command dial to set aperture. Shutter speed can be
set “p” or to values between 30 s and 1/8,000 s, or the
shutter can be held open indefinitely for a long time-exposure
(A, pg. 124). Aperture can be set to values between the
minimum and maximum values for the lens. Check exposure
in the electronic analog exposure displays (see page 123), and
continue to adjust shutter speed and aperture until the
desired exposure is achieved.
Sub-command dial
Setting
aperture
Z
Setting
shutter
speed
Main command dial
3
A
Frame a
photograph,
focus, and
shoot.
Shutter speed: 1/125 s
Aperture: f/5.6
AF Micro Nikkor Lenses
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need
only be taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set
aperture.
122
A Electronic Analog Exposure Displays
The electronic analog exposure displays in the control panel and
viewfinder show whether the photograph would be under- or overexposed at current settings. Depending on the option chosen for Custom
Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., pg. 292), the amount of underor over-exposure is shown in increments of 1/3 EV, 1/2 EV, or 1 EV. If the
limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded, the displays will
flash.
Optimal exposure
Custom Setting b2 set to 1/3 step
Underexposed by 1/3 EV Overexposed by over 2 EV
Control panel
Viewfinder
If the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure at the shutter speed
or aperture selected in mode f or g, q or r will be displayed in the
control panel and viewfinder, and the electronic analog exposure display
will show the amount by which the image will be under- or over-exposed.
A
See Also
Z
If
(V) (the default setting) is selected for Custom
Setting f12 (Reverse indicators, pg. 330), the exposure indicators in the
control panel, viewfinder and shooting information display are displayed
with positive values on the left and negative values on the right. Select
(W) to display negative values on the left and positive
values on the right.
123
Long Time-Exposures
At a shutter speed of A, the shutter will remain open while the
shutter-release button is held down. Use for long time-exposure
photographs of moving lights, the stars, night scenery, or
fireworks. A tripod and optional remote cord are recommended to
prevent blur.
1
Ready the camera.
Mount the camera on a tripod or place it on a stable, level
surface. If you are using an optional remote cord, attach it to
the camera. If you are not using a remote cord, choose On for
Custom Setting d9 (Exposure delay mode, pg. 302) to
prevent blur when the camera shutter-release button is
pressed.
Z
2
Select exposure mode h.
Press the I button
and rotate the main
command dial until h
is displayed in the
viewfinder and control
panel.
I button
Main command dial
3
Choose a shutter speed.
While the exposure meters are active,
rotate the main command dial until
“A” appears in the shutter-speed
displays. The electronic analog exposure
displays do not appear when “A“ is
selected.
124
4
Press the shutter-release button all the way down.
Press the shutter-release button on the camera or remote cord
all the way down. The shutter will remain open while the
shutter-release button is pressed.
5
Release the shutter-release button.
Remove your finger from the shutter-release button to record
the photograph.
Length of exposure: 35 s
Aperture: f/25
Z
A Long Time-Exposures
Nikon recommends using a fully-charged EN-EL3e battery or an optional
EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter to prevent loss of power while the shutter is
open. Note that noise and distortion may be present in long exposures;
before shooting, choose On for the Long exp. NR option in the shooting
menu (pg. 277).
125
Autoexposure (AE) Lock
Use autoexposure lock to recompose photographs after metering
exposure.
1
Z
Select center-weighted or
spot metering (pg. 112).
Metering selector
Matrix metering will not
produce the desired results
with autoexposure lock. If
using center-weighted
metering, select the center
focus point with the multi
selector (pg. 76).
2
Lock exposure.
Shutter-release
button
Position the subject in the selected
focus point and press the shutterrelease button halfway. With the
shutter-release button pressed halfway
and the subject positioned in the focus
point, press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock
exposure (and focus, except in manual
focus mode). Confirm that the in-focus
indicator (I) appears in the viewfinder. AE-L/AF-L button
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L
indicator will appear in the viewfinder.
126
3
Recompose the
photograph.
Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button
pressed, recompose the
photograph and shoot.
A Metered Area
In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 4-mm
(0.16 in.) circle centered on the selected focus point. In center-weighted
metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in the center of
the viewfinder (the default area for center-weighted metering is an
12-mm circle in the center of the viewfinder).
Z
A Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be changed
without altering the metered value for exposure:
Exposure mode
e
f
g
Settings
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program; pg. 117)
Shutter speed
Aperture
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel.
Note that the metering method can not be changed while exposure lock
is in effect (changes to metering take effect when the lock is released).
A See Also
If On is selected for Custom Setting c1 (Shutter-release button AE-L,
pg. 296), exposure will lock when the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway. For information on changing the role of the AE-L/AF-L button, see
Custom Setting f7 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, pg. 325).
127
Exposure Compensation
Exposure compensation is used to alter exposure from the value
suggested by the camera, making pictures brighter or darker. It is
most effective when used with center-weighted or spot metering
(see page 112).
In exposure mode h, only the exposure information shown in the
electronic analog exposure display is affected; shutter speed and
aperture do not change.
To choose a value for exposure compensation, press the E button
and rotate the main command dial until the desired value is
displayed in the control panel or viewfinder.
E button
Z
Main command dial
±0 EV
(E button pressed)
128
–0.3 EV
+2.0 EV
Exposure compensation can be set to values between –5 EV
(underexposure) and +5 EV (overexposure) in increments of 1/3 EV.
In general, choose positive values to make the subject brighter,
negative values to make it darker.
–1 EV
No exposure
compensation
+1 EV
At values other than ±0, the 0 at the center
of the electronic analog exposure displays
will flash and a E icon will be displayed in
the control panel and viewfinder.
Z
Normal exposure can be restored by setting
exposure compensation to ±0. Exposure
compensation is not reset when the camera is turned off.
A See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available for
exposure compensation, see Custom Setting b3 (Exp comp/fine tune, pg.
292). For information on making adjustments to exposure compensation
without pressing the E button, see Custom Setting b4 (Easy exposure
compensation, pg. 293).
129
Bracketing
The camera offers three types of bracketing: exposure bracketing,
flash bracketing, and white balance bracketing. In exposure
bracketing (pg. 131), the camera varies exposure compensation
with each shot, while in the case of flash bracketing (pg. 131), flash
level is varied with each shot (i-TTL and, in the case of optional SB900 and SB-800 flash units, auto aperture flash control modes only;
see pages 377–380). Only one photograph is produced each time
the shutter is released, meaning that several shots are required to
complete the bracketing sequence. Exposure and flash bracketing
are recommended in situations in which it is difficult to set
exposure and there is not enough time to check results and adjust
settings with each shot.
Z
In white balance bracketing (pg. 135), the camera creates multiple
images each time the shutter is released, each with a different
white balance adjustment. Only one shot is required to complete
the bracketing sequence. White balance bracketing is
recommended when shooting under mixed lighting or
experimenting with different white balance settings.
A
See Also
At default settings, the camera varies both exposure and flash level.
Custom Setting e5 (Auto bracketing set, pg. 315) is used to choose the
type of bracketing performed.
Changes to bracketing settings can be made using the Fn button (the
default setting, see Custom Setting f5, Assign FUNC. button, pg. 320), the
depth-of-field preview button (Custom setting f6, Assign preview
button), pg. 324), or the AE-L/AF-L button (Custom Setting f7, Assign AE-L/
AF-L button, pg. 325). Note that some “button press” options can not be
combined with options using “+dials.” The explanation that follows
assumes that bracketing is assigned to the Fn button.
130
❚❚ Exposure and Flash Bracketing
1
Select flash or exposure bracketing.
Choose the type of bracketing to be
performed using Custom Setting e5
(Auto bracketing set, pg. 315). Choose
AE & flash to vary both exposure and
flash level (the default setting), AE only
to vary only exposure, or Flash only to vary only flash level.
2
Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the Fn button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The
number of shots is shown in the control panel.
Number of shots
Fn button
Main command
dial
Z
Control panel
Exposure and flash
bracketing indicator
At settings other than zero, a M icon
and exposure and flash bracketing
indicator will be displayed in the
control panel, and a E icon will blink in
the viewfinder.
131
3
Select an exposure increment.
Pressing the Fn button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the exposure increment.
Exposure increment
Fn button
Sub-command
dial
Control panel
At default settings, the size of the increment can be chosen
from 1/3, 2/3, and 1 EV. The bracketing programs with an
increment of 1/3 EV are listed below.
Z
Control panel display
No. of shots
0
3
3
2
2
3
5
7
9
A
Bracketing order (EVs)
0
+0.3/0/+0.7
–0.3/–0.7/0
0/+0.3
0/–0.3
0/–0.3/+0.3
0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/+0.7
0/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/+0.3/
+0.7/+1.0
0/–1.3/–1.0/–0.7/–0.3/
+0.3/+0.7/+1.0/+1.3
See Also
For information on choosing the size of the exposure increment, see
Custom Setting b2 (EV steps for exposure cntrl., pg. 292). For
information on choosing the order in which bracketing is performed, see
Custom Setting e7 (Bracketing order, pg. 317).
132
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
The camera will vary exposure and/or flash level shot-by-shot
according to the bracketing program selected. Modifications
to exposure are added to those made with exposure
compensation (see page 128), making it possible to achieve
exposure compensation values of more than 5 EV.
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator
will be displayed in the control panel. A segment will
disappear from the indicator after each shot.
Z
No. shots: 3
Increment: 0.7
Exposure increment:
0 EV
Display after first
shot
Exposure increment:
–1 EV
Exposure increment:
+1 EV
133
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the Fn button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero ( ) and M is no longer displayed in the control
panel on top of the camera. The program last in effect will be
restored the next time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also
be cancelled by performing a two-button reset (pg. 196), although
in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next
time bracketing is activated.
A
Z
Exposure and Flash Bracketing
In single frame and self-timer modes, one shot will be taken each time the
shutter-release button is pressed. In continuous low speed and
continuous high speed modes, shooting will pause after the number of
shots specified in the bracketing program have been taken. Shooting will
resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken,
shooting can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the
memory card has been replaced or shots have been deleted to make
room on the memory card. If the camera is turned off before all shots in
the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume from the next shot
in the sequence when the camera is turned on.
A
Exposure Bracketing
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture
(programmed auto), aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed
(aperture-priority auto, manual exposure mode). When On is selected for
ISO sensitivity settings > ISO sensitivity auto control in shooting
menu, the camera will automatically vary ISO sensitivity for optimum
exposure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded.
Custom Setting e6 (Auto bracketing (mode M), pg. 316) can be used to
change how the camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in
manual exposure mode. Bracketing can be performed by varying flash
level together with shutter speed and/or aperture, or by varying flash
level alone.
134
❚❚ White Balance Bracketing
1
Select white balance bracketing.
Choose WB bracketing for Custom
Setting e5 Auto bracketing set (pg.
315).
2
Choose the number of shots.
Pressing the Fn button, rotate the main command dial to
choose the number of shots in the bracketing sequence. The
number of shots is shown in the control panel.
Number of shots
Z
Fn button
Main command
dial
Control panel
WB bracketing
indicator
At settings other than zero, a W icon and WB bracketing
indicator will appear in the control panel.
135
3
Select a white balance increment.
Pressing the Fn button, rotate the sub-command dial to
choose the white balance adjustment. Each increment is
roughly equivalent to 5 mired.
White balance
increment
Fn button
Sub-command
dial
Choose from increments of 1 (5 mired), 2 (10 mired), or 3
(15 mired). Higher B values correspond to increased amounts
of blue, higher A values to increased amounts of amber
(pg. 144). The bracketing programs with an increment of 1 are
listed below.
Z
Control panel display
A
No. of White balance
Bracketing order (EVs)
shots increment
0
1
0
3
1B
1B/0/2B
3
1A
1A/2A/0
2
1B
0/1B
2
1A
0/1A
3
1 A, 1 B
0/1A/1B
5
1 A, 1 B
0/2A/1A/1B/2B
0/3A/2A/1A/
7
1 A, 1 B
1B/2B/3B
0/4A/3A/2A/1A/
9
1 A, 1 B
1B/2B/3B/4B
See Also
See page 145 for a definition of “mired.”
136
Control panel
4
Frame a photograph, focus, and
shoot.
Each shot will be processed to create the number of copies
specified in the bracketing program, and each copy will have a
different white balance. Modifications to white balance are
added to the white balance adjustment made with white
balance fine-tuning.
If the number of shots in the
bracketing program is greater than
the number of exposures remaining,
the exposure count displays in the
control panel and viewfinder will
flash and the shutter release will be
disabled. Shooting can begin when a
new memory card is inserted.
Z
137
❚❚ Canceling Bracketing
To cancel bracketing, press the Fn button and rotate the main
command dial until the number of shots in the bracketing
sequence is zero (r) and W is no longer displayed in the control
panel. The program last in effect will be restored the next time
bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by
performing a two-button reset (pg. 196), although in this case the
bracketing program will not be restored the next time bracketing
is activated.
Z
A
White Balance Bracketing
White balance bracketing is not available at an image quality of NEF
(RAW). Selecting NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW)+JPEG fine, NEF (RAW)+JPEG
normal, or NEF (RAW)+JPEG basic cancels white balance bracketing.
White balance bracketing affects only color temperature (the amber-blue
axis in the white balance fine-tuning display, pg. 143). No adjustments are
made on the green-magenta axis.
In self-timer mode (pg. 102), the number of copies specified in the whitebalance program will be created each time the shutter is released.
If the camera is turned off while the memory card access lamp is lit, the
camera will power off only after all photographs in the sequence have
been recorded.
138
rWhite Balance
– Keeping Colors True
The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of
the light source. The human brain is able to adapt to changes in
the color of the light source, with the result that white objects
appear white whether seen in the shade, direct sunlight, or under
incandescent lighting. Unlike the film used in film cameras, digital
cameras can mimic this adjustment by processing images
according to the color of the light source. This is known as “white
balance.” This chapter covers white balance settings.
White Balance Options................................................. pg. 140
r
Fine-Tuning White Balance.......................................... pg. 143
Choosing a Color Temperature................................... pg. 147
Preset Manual ................................................................ pg. 148
139
White Balance Options
For natural coloration, choose a white balance setting that
matches the light source before shooting. The following options
are available:
Option
Auto
(default)
3,500–
8,000*
J Incandescent
3,000*
v
r
I Fluorescent
Sodium-vapor lamps
Warm-white
fluorescent
White fluorescent
2,700*
3,000*
3,700*
Cool-white fluorescent
4,200*
Day white fluorescent
5,000*
Daylight fluorescent
6,500*
High temp. mercuryvapor
7,200*
H Direct sunlight
140
Color temp.
(K)
5,200*
Description
White balance is adjusted
automatically using color
temperature measured by image
sensor and 1,005-segment RGB
sensor. For best results, use type G
or D lens. If built-in or optional flash
is used, white balance reflects
conditions in effect when the flash
goes off.
Use under incandescent lighting.
Use under following seven light
sources:
Use under sodium-vapor lighting
(found in sports venues).
Use under warm-white fluorescent
lights.
Use under white fluorescent lights.
Use under cool-white fluorescent
lights.
Use under daylight white
fluorescent lights.
Use under daylight fluorescent
lights.
Use under high color temperature
light sources (e.g. mercury-vapor
lamps).
Use with subjects lit by direct
sunlight.
Option
N Flash
G Cloudy
M Shade
K Choose color temp.
L Preset manual
Color temp.
(K)
Description
5,400* Use with built-in or optional flash.
6,000* Use in daylight under overcast skies.
Use in daylight with subjects in the
8,000*
shade.
2,500– Choose color temperature from list
10,000 of values (pg. 147).
Use subject, light source, or existing
—
photograph as reference for white
balance (pg. 148).
* All values are approximate. Fine-tuning set to 0.
Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources. If
the desired results can not be achieved with auto white balance,
choose an option from the list above or use preset white balance.
White balance can be selected by pressing the WB button and
rotating the main command dial until the desired setting is
displayed in the control panel.
r
Control panel
WB button
Main command dial
A The White Balance Menu
White balance can also be adjusted using the White balance option in
the shooting menu (pg. 268).
A I (Fluorescent)
Selecting I (fluorescent) with the WB button and main command dial
selects the type of bulb chosen for the Fluorescent option in the white
balance menu (pg.268).
141
A
Studio Flash Lighting
Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with large studio
flash units. Choose a color temperature, use preset white balance, or set
white balance to Flash and use fine tuning to adjust white balance.
A
Color Temperature
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other
conditions. Color temperature is an objective measure of the color of a
light source, defined with reference to the temperature to which an object
would have to be heated to radiate light in the same wavelengths. While
light sources with a color temperature in the neighborhood of 5,000–
5,500K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature, such as
incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with
a higher color temperature appear tinged with blue.
A
r
142
See Also
When WB bracketing is selected for Custom Setting e5 (Auto bracketing
set, pg. 315), the camera will create several images each time the shutter
is released. White balance will be varied with each image, “bracketing”
the value currently selected for white balance. See page 130 for more
information.
Fine-Tuning White Balance
White balance can be “fine tuned” to compensate for variations in
the color of the light source or to introduce a deliberate color cast
into an image. White balance is fine tuned using the White
balance option in the shooting menu or by pressing the WB
button and rotating the sub-command dial.
❚❚ The White Balance Menu
1
Select a white balance
option.
Select White balance in the
shooting menu (pg. 268), then
highlight a white balance
option and press 2. If an option other than Fluorescent,
Choose color temp., or Preset manual is selected, proceed to
Step 2. If Fluorescent is selected, highlight a lighting type and
press 2. If Choose color temp. is selected, highlight a color
temperature and press 2. If Preset manual is selected,
choose a preset as described on page 156 before proceeding.
r
143
2
Fine tune white balance.
Use the multi selector to finetune white balance. White
balance can be fine tuned on
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis and
the green (G)–magenta (M)
Coordinates Adjustment
axis. The horizontal (amberblue) axis corresponds to color temperature, with each
increment equivalent to about 5 mired. The vertical (greenmagenta) axis has the similar effects to the corresponding
color compensation (CC) filters.
Green (G)
Increase green
Blue (B)
r
Increase magenta
Amber (A)
Magenta (M)
Increase blue
3
Press J.
Press J to save settings and return to
the shooting menu. If white balance
has been fine-tuned on the A-B axis, a
E icon will be displayed in the control
panel.
144
Increase amber
J button
A White Balance Fine Tuning
The colors on the fine-tuning axes are relative, not absolute. For example,
moving the cursor to B (blue) when a “warm” setting such as J
(incandescent) is selected for white balance will make photographs
slightly “colder” but will not actually make them blue.
A “Mired”
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in
color at low color temperatures than it would at higher color
temperatures. For example, a change of 1000 K produces a much greater
change in color at 3000 K than at 6000 K. Mired, calculated by multiplying
the inverse of the color temperature by 10 6, is a measure of color
temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit
used in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:
• 4000 K–3000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=83 mired
• 7000 K–6000 K (a difference of 1000 K)=24 mired
r
145
❚❚ The WB Button
At settings other than K (Choose color temp.) and L (Preset
manual), the WB button can be used to fine-tune white balance on
the amber (A)–blue (B) axis (pg. 144; to fine-tune white balance
when K or L is selected, use the shooting menu as described on
page 144). Six settings in both directions are available; each
increment is equivalent to about 5 mired (pg. 145). Press the WB
button and rotate the sub-command dial until the desired value is
displayed in the control panel. Rotating the sub-command dial to
the left increases the amount of amber (A). Rotating the subcommand dial to the right increases the amount of blue (B). At
settings other than 0, a E icon appears in the control panel.
r
WB button
146
Sub-command
dial
Control panel
Choosing a Color Temperature
When K (Choose color temp.) is selected for white balance, color
temperature can be selected by pressing the WB button and
rotating the sub-command dial. The color temperature is
displayed in the control panel:
WB button
Sub-command
dial
Control panel
r
D Choose Color Temperature
Note that the desired results will not be obtained with flash or fluorescent
lighting. Choose N (Flash) or I (Fluorescent) for these sources. With
other light sources, take a test shot to determine if the selected value is
appropriate.
A The White Balance Menu
Color temperature can also be selected in the white balance menu. Note
that the color temperature with the WB button and the sub-command dial
replaces the value selected in the white balance menu.
147
Preset Manual
Preset manual is used to record and recall custom white balance
settings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for
light sources with a strong color cast. Two methods are available
for setting preset white balance:
Method
Description
Neutral gray or white object is placed under
Direct
lighting that will be used in final photograph and
measurement
white balance is measured by camera (pg. 150).
Copy from existing White balance is copied from photo on memory
photograph
card (pg. 154).
r
148
The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in
presets d-0 through d-4. A descriptive comment can be added to
any white balance preset (pg. 158).
d-0
Stores last value measured for
white balance (pg. 150). This
preset is overwritten when a
new value is measured.
d-1–d-4
Store values copied from d-0 (pg. 153).
Store values copied
from images on
memory card (pg. 154).
r
A White Balance Presets
Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks
(pg. 269). A confirmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to
change a white balance preset created in another shooting menu bank
(no warning is displayed for preset d-0).
149
❚❚ Measuring a Value for White Balance
1
Light a reference object.
Place a neutral gray or white object under the lighting that will
be used in the final photograph. In studio settings, a standard
gray panel can be used as a reference object. Note that
exposure is automatically increased by 1 EV when measuring
white balance; in exposure mode h, adjust exposure so that
the electronic analog exposure displays shows ±0 (pg. 123).
2
Set white balance to L (Preset manual).
Press the WB button and rotate the main command dial until
L is displayed in the control panel.
r
Control panel
WB button
150
Main command
dial
3
Select direct measurement mode.
Release the WB button briefly and then
press the button until the L icon in
the control panel and viewfinder start
to flash. A flashing D will also appear
in the control panel and viewfinder. At
default settings, the displays will flash
for about six seconds.
4
Control panel
Viewfinder
Measure white balance.
Before the indicators stop flashing, frame the
reference object so that it fills the viewfinder and
press the shutter-release button all the way down. The camera
will measure a value for white balance and store it in preset
d-0. No photograph will be recorded; white balance can be
measured accurately even when the camera is not in focus.
5
r
Check the results.
If the camera was able to measure a
value for white balance, C will flash
in the control panel, while the
viewfinder will show a flashing a. At
default settings, the displays will flash
for about six seconds.
Control panel
Viewfinder
151
If lighting is too dark or too bright, the
camera may be unable to measure white
balance. A flashing b a will appear in
the control panel and viewfinder (at
default settings, the displays will flash for
about six seconds). Press the shutterrelease button halfway to return to
Step 4 and measure white balance again.
Control panel
Viewfinder
6
Select preset d-0.
If the new value for preset white balance will be used
immediately, select preset d-0 by pressing the WB button and
rotating the sub-command dial until d-0 is displayed in the
control panel.
r
D
Direct Measurement Mode
If no operations are performed while the displays are flashing, direct
measurement mode will end in the time selected for Custom Setting c2
(Auto meter-off delay, pg. 296). The default setting is six seconds.
A
Preset d-0
The new value for white balance will be stored in
preset d-0, automatically replacing the previous
value for this preset (no confirmation dialog will
be displayed). A thumbnail will be displayed in
the preset white balance list.
To use the new value for white balance, select preset d-0 (if no value has
been measured for white balance before d-0 is selected, white balance
will be set to a color temperature of 5,200 K, the same as Direct sunlight).
The new white balance value will remain in preset d-0 until white balance
is measured again. By copying preset d-0 to one of the other presets
before measuring a new value for white balance, up to five white balance
values can be stored (pg. 153).
152
❚❚ Copying White Balance from d-0 to Presets d-1–d-4
Follow the steps below to copy a measured value for white
balance from d-0 to any of the other presets (d-1–d-4).
1
Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the
white balance menu (pg. 140)
and press 2.
2
Select a destination.
Highlight the destination
preset (d-1 to d-4) and press
the center of the multi
selector.
3
Copy d-0 to the selected
preset.
r
Highlight Copy d-0 and press
J. If comment has been
created for d-0 (pg. 158), the
comment will be copied to
the comment for the selected preset.
153
❚❚ Copying White Balance from a Photograph (d-1–d-4 Only)
Follow the steps below to copy a value for white balance from a
photograph on the memory card to a selected preset (d-1–d-4
only). Existing white balance values can not be copied to preset
d-0.
1
Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the
white balance menu (pg. 140)
and press 2.
2
Select a destination.
Highlight the destination
preset (d-1 to d-4) and press
the center of the multi selector.
r
3
Choose Select image.
Highlight Select image and
press 2.
154
4
Highlight a source image.
Highlight the source image. To
view the highlighted image full
frame, press the X button.
5
Copy white balance.
Press the center of the multi selector to
copy the white balance value for the
highlighted photograph to the selected preset. If the
highlighted photograph has a comment (pg. 335), the
comment will be copied to the comment for the selected
preset.
r
A Choosing a White Balance Preset
Press 1 to highlight the current white balance
preset (d-0–d-4) and press 2 to select another
preset.
155
❚❚ Selecting a White Balance Preset
To set white balance to a preset value:
1
Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the
white balance menu (pg. 140)
and press 2.
2
Select a preset.
Highlight the desired preset
and press the center of the
multi selector. To select the
highlighted preset and display
fine tuning menu (pg. 144)
without completing the next
step, press J instead of
pressing the center of the multi selector.
r
3
Select Set.
Highlight Set and press 2.
Fine tuning menu for the
selected white balance preset
is displayed (pg. 144).
156
A Selecting a White Balance Preset: the WB Button
At a setting of L (Preset manual), presets can also be selected by
pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial. The current
preset is displayed in the control panel while the WB button is pressed.
WB button
Sub-command
dial
Control panel
r
157
❚❚ Entering a Comment
Follow the steps below to enter a descriptive comment of up to
thirty-six characters for a selected white balance preset.
1
Select L (Preset manual).
Highlight Preset manual in the
white balance menu (pg. 140)
and press 2.
2
Select a preset.
Highlight the desired preset
and press the center of the
multi selector.
r
3
Select Edit comment.
Highlight Edit comment and
press 2.
4
Edit the comment.
Edit the comment as described on page
270.
158
JImage Enhancement
This chapter describes how to optimize sharpening, contrast,
brightness, saturation and hue using Picture Controls, how to
preserve detail in highlights and shadows using active D-Lighting,
and how to choose a color space.
Picture Controls ............................................................. pg. 160
Creating Custom Picture Controls .......................................... pg. 168
Active D-Lighting .......................................................... pg. 179
Color Space..................................................................... pg. 181
J
159
Picture Controls
Nikon’s unique Picture Control system makes it possible to share
image processing settings among compatible devices and
software. Select from the Picture Controls provided with the
camera to instantly adjust image processing settings, or make
independent adjustments to sharpening, contrast, brightness,
saturation, and hue. These settings can be saved under new
names as custom Picture Controls to be recalled or edited at will.
Custom Picture Controls can also be saved to the memory card for
use in compatible software, and software-created Picture Controls
can be loaded into the camera. Any given set of Picture Controls
will produce nearly the same results on all cameras that support
the Nikon Picture Control system.
J
160
❚❚ Using Picture Controls
Picture Controls can be used as described below.
• Select Nikon Picture Controls (pg. 162): Select an existing Nikon
Picture Control.
• Modify existing Picture Controls (pg. 164): Modify an existing Picture
Control to create a combination of sharpening, contrast,
brightness, saturation, and hue for a particular scene or effect.
• Create custom Picture Controls (pg. 168): Store modified Picture
Controls under unique names and recall or edit them as desired.
• Share custom Picture Controls (pg. 172): Custom Picture Controls
created with the camera can be saved to the memory card for
use in ViewNX (supplied) and other compatible software, or
software-created custom Picture Controls can be loaded into the
camera.
• Manage custom Picture Controls (pg. 175): Rename or delete custom
Picture Controls.
J
A Nikon Picture Controls Versus Custom Picture Controls
The Picture Controls supplied by Nikon are referred to as Nikon Picture
Controls. In addition to the Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the
camera, optional Picture Controls are available for download from Nikon
websites. Custom Picture Controls are created through modifications to
existing Nikon Picture Controls. Both Nikon and custom Picture Controls
can be shared among compatible devices and software.
161
Selecting Nikon Picture Controls
The camera offers four preset Nikon Picture Controls. Choose a
Picture Control according to the subject or type of scene.
Option
Q
R
S
T
Description
Standard processing for balanced results.
Standard
Recommended for most situations.
Minimal processing for natural results. Choose for
Neutral
photographs that will later be extensively
processed or retouched.
Pictures are enhanced for a vivid, photoprint effect.
Vivid
Choose for photographs that emphasize primary
colors.
Monochrome Take monochrome photographs.
❚❚ Choosing a Picture Control
1
Select Set Picture Control.
In the shooting menu (pg. 268),
highlight Set Picture Control
and press 2.
J
2
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture
Control and press J.
162
A The Picture Control Grid
Pressing the W button in Step 2 displays a Picture
Control grid showing the contrast and saturation
for the selected Picture Control in relation to the
other Picture Controls (only contrast is displayed
when Monochrome is selected). To select a
different Picture Control, press 1 or 3, then press
2 to display Picture Control options and press J.
A The Picture Control Indicator
The current Picture Control is shown in the
shooting information display when the R button
is pressed. Picture Controls can also be selected in
the shooting information display (pg. 15).
Picture Control
indicator
J
163
Modifying Existing Picture Controls
Existing Nikon or custom Picture Controls
can be modified to suit the scene or the
user’s creative intent. Choose a balanced
combination of settings using Quick adjust,
or make manual adjustments to individual
settings.
1
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight the desired Picture
Control in the Set Picture
Control menu (pg. 162) and
press 2.
2
Adjust settings.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight the
desired setting and press 4 or
2 to choose a value (pg. 165).
Repeat this step until all
settings have been adjusted, or
select Quick adjust to choose a preset combination of
settings. Default settings can be restored by pressing the O
button.
J
3
A
Press J.
Modifications to Original Picture Controls
Picture Controls that have been modified from
default settings are indicated by an asterisk (“U”)
in the Set Picture Control menu.
164
❚❚ Picture Control Settings
Option
Manual adjustments
(all Picture Controls)
Description
Choose from options between –2 and +2 to reduce or
exaggerate the effect of the selected Picture Control
(note that this resets all manual adjustments). For
Quick adjust
example, choosing positive values for Vivid makes
pictures more vivid. Not available with Neutral,
Monochrome, or custom Picture Controls.
Control the sharpness of outlines. Select A to adjust
sharpening automatically according to the type of
Sharpening scene, or choose from values between 0 (no
sharpening) and 9 (the higher the value, the greater the
sharpening).
Select A to adjust contrast automatically according to
the type of scene, or choose from values between –3
and +3 (choose lower values to prevent highlights in
Contrast
portrait subjects from being “washed out” in direct
sunlight, higher values to preserve detail in misty
landscapes and other low-contrast subjects).
Choose –1 for reduced brightness, +1 for enhanced
Brightness
brightness. Does not affect exposure.
Control the vividness of colors. Select A to adjust
saturation automatically according to the type of scene,
Saturation
or choose from values between –3 and +3 (lower values
reduce saturation and higher values increase it).
Choose negative values (to a minimum of –3) to make
reds more purple, blues more green, and greens more
Hue
yellow, positive values (up to +3) to make reds more
orange, greens more blue, and blues more purple.
Simulate the effect of color filters on monochrome
Filter
photographs. Choose from Off (the default setting),
effects
yellow, orange, red, and green (pg. 167).
Choose the tint used in monochrome photographs from
B&W (black-and-white, the default setting), Sepia,
Toning
Cyanotype (blue-tinted monochrome), Red, Yellow,
Green, Blue Green, Blue, Purple Blue, Red Purple
(pg. 167).
Manual adjustments
(non-monochrome only)
J
Manual adjustments
(monochrome only)
165
D
Active D-Lighting
Contrast and Brightness can not be adjusted when Active D-Lighting
(pg. 179) is on. Any manual adjustments currently in effect will be lost
when Active D-Lighting is turned on.
D
“A” (Auto)
Results for auto contrast and saturation vary with
exposure and the position of the subject in the
frame. Use a type G or D lens for best results. The
icons for Picture Controls that use auto contrast
and saturation are displayed in green in the
Picture Control grid, and lines appear parallel to
the axes of the grid.
A
The Picture Control Grid
Pressing the W button in Step 2 displays a Picture
Control grid showing the contrast and saturation
for the selected Picture Control in relation to the
other Picture Controls (only contrast is displayed
when Monochrome is selected). Release the W
button to return to the Picture Control menu.
Previous Settings
J A
The line under the value display in the Picture
Control setting menu indicates the previous value
for the setting. Use this as a reference when
adjusting settings.
166
A Filter Effects (Monochrome Only)
The options in this menu simulate the effect of color filters on
monochrome photographs. The following filter effects are available:
Y
O
R
G
Option
Yellow
Orange
Red
Green
Description
Enhances contrast. Can be used to tone down the brightness
of the sky in landscape photographs. Orange produces more
contrast than yellow, red more contrast than orange.
Softens skin tones. Can be used for portraits.
Note that the effects achieved with Filter effects are more pronounced
than those produced by physical glass filters.
A Toning (Monochrome Only)
Pressing 3 when Toning is selected displays
saturation options. Press 4 or 2 to adjust
saturation. Saturation control is not available
when B&W (black-and-white) is selected.
A Custom Picture Controls
The options available with custom Picture Controls are the same as those
on which the custom Picture Control was based.
J
167
Creating Custom Picture Controls
The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera can be
modified and saved as custom Picture Controls.
1
Select Manage Picture
Control.
In the shooting menu (pg. 268),
highlight Manage Picture
Control and press 2.
2
Select Save/edit.
Highlight Save/edit and press
2.
J
168
3
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight an existing Picture
Control and press 2, or press J
to proceed to step 5 to save a
copy of the highlighted Picture
Control without further
modification.
4
Edit the selected Picture
Control.
See page 165 for more
information. To abandon any
changes and start over, press
the O button. Press J when settings are complete.
5
Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the
custom Picture Control (C-1
through C-9) and press 2.
J
169
6
Name the Picture
Control.
Keyboard
area
Name area
The text-entry dialog shown
at right will be displayed. By
default, new Picture
Controls are named by adding a two-digit number (assigned
automatically) to the name of the existing Picture Control.
This name can be edited to create a new name as described
below.
To move the cursor in the name area, press the W
button and press 4 or 2. To enter a new letter at
the current cursor position, use the multi selector to
highlight the desired character in the keyboard area
and press the center of the multi selector. To delete the
character at the current cursor position, press the O button.
J
Custom Picture Control names can be up to 19 characters
long. Any characters after the 19th will be deleted.
After entering the name, press J. The
new Picture Control will appear in the
Picture Control list.
Custom Picture Controls can be renamed
at any time using the Rename option in
the Manage Picture Control menu.
170
A Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls are not affected by Reset shooting menu
(pg. 271).
Custom Picture Controls do not have a Quick adjust option (pg. 165).
Custom Picture Controls based on Monochrome have Filter effects and
Toning options in place of Saturation and Hue controls.
A The Original Picture Control Icon
The Nikon Picture Control on which the custom
Picture Control is based is indicated by an icon
in the top right corner of the edit display.
Original Picture
Control icon
J
171
Sharing Custom Picture Controls
Custom Picture Controls created using the Picture Control Utility
available with ViewNX or optional software such as Capture NX 2
can be copied to a memory card and loaded into the camera, or
custom Picture Controls created with the camera can be copied to
the memory card to be used in compatible cameras and software.
❚❚ Copying Custom Picture Controls to the Camera
1
Select Load/save.
In the Manage Picture
Control menu, highlight Load/
save and press 2.
2
Select Copy to camera.
Highlight Copy to camera and
press 2.
J
3
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight a custom Picture
Control and either;
• press 2 to view current
Picture Control settings, or
• press J to proceed to Step 4.
172
4
Select a destination.
Choose a destination for the
custom Picture Control (C-1
through C-9) and press 2.
5
Name the Picture Control.
Name the Picture Control as described
on page 170. The new Picture Control
will appear in the Picture Control list and
can be renamed at any time using the
Rename option in the Manage Picture
Control menu.
J
173
❚❚ Saving Custom Picture Controls to the Memory Card
1
Select Copy to card.
After displaying the Load/save
menu as described in Step 1 on
page 172, highlight Copy to
card and press 2.
2
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight a custom Picture
Control and press 2.
3
Choose a destination.
Choose a destination from slots
1 through 99 and press J to
save the selected Picture
Control to the memory card.
Any Picture Controls that may
already have been saved to the selected slot will be
overwritten.
J
A
Saving Custom Picture Controls
Up to 99 custom Picture Controls can be stored on the memory card at
any one time. The memory card can only be used to store user-created
custom Picture Controls. The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the
camera can not be copied to the memory card.
174
Managing Custom Picture Controls
Follow the steps below to rename or delete custom Picture
Controls.
❚❚ Renaming Custom Picture Controls
1
Select Rename.
In the Manage Picture
Control menu, highlight
Rename and press 2.
2
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight a custom Picture
Control (C-1 through C-9) and
press 2.
3
Rename the Picture Control.
J
Rename the Picture Control as described
on page 170.
175
❚❚ Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Camera
1
Select Delete.
In the Manage Picture
Control menu, highlight
Delete and press 2.
2
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight a custom Picture
Control (C-1 through C-9) and
press 2.
3
Select Yes.
Highlight Yes and press J to
delete the selected Picture
Control.
J
A
Nikon Picture Controls
The Nikon Picture Controls supplied with the camera (Standard, Neutral,
Vivid, and Monochrome) can not be renamed or deleted.
176
❚❚ Deleting Custom Picture Controls from the Memory Card
1
Select Load/save.
In the Manage Picture
Control menu, highlight Load/
save and press 2.
2
Select Delete from card.
Highlight Delete from card
and press 2.
J
177
3
Select a Picture Control.
Highlight a custom Picture
Control (slot1 through 99) and
either;
• press 2 to view current
Picture Control settings, or
• press J to display
confirmation dialog shown at
right.
4
J
178
Select Yes.
Highlight Yes and press J to
delete the selected Picture
Control.
Active D-Lighting
Active D-Lighting preserves details in highlights and shadows,
creating photographs with natural contrast. Use for high contrast
scenes, for example when photographing brightly lit outdoor
scenery through a door or window or taking pictures of shaded
subjects on a sunny day.
Active D-Lighting off
Active D-Lighting:
Auto
J
Active D-Lighting off
Active D-Lighting:
High
179
To use active D-Lighting:
1
Select Active D-Lighting.
In the shooting menu (pg. 268),
highlight Active D-lighting
and press 2.
2
Choose an option.
Highlight Auto, Off, Low,
Normal, or High and press J.
Choose Auto to let the camera
adjust D-Lighting
automatically according to
shooting conditions.
J D Active D-Lighting
When Active D-Lighting is on, additional time will be required to record
images and the capacity of the memory buffer will drop (pg. 424). Use
matrix metering (pg. 112). Noise (grains, banding, mottling) may appear
in photographs taken with Active D-Lighting at high ISO sensitivities.
Active D-Lighting can not be used at ISO sensitivities of Hi 0.3 or above.
The Brightness and Contrast Picture Control settings (pg. 165) can not be
adjusted while active D-Lighting is in effect. In exposure mode h, an
Active D-Lighting setting of Auto is equivalent to Normal.
D
“Active D-Lighting” versus “D-Lighting”
The Active D-Lighting option in the shooting menu adjusts exposure
before shooting to optimize the dynamic range, while the D-Lighting
option in the retouch menu optimizes dynamic range in images after
shooting.
A
The Shooting Information Display
Active D-Lighting can also be adjusted from the shooting information
display (pg. 15).
180
Color Space
The color space determines the gamut of colors available for color
reproduction. Choose a color space according to how
photographs will be processed on leaving the camera.
Option
Description
Choose for photographs that will be printed or
W sRGB (default)
used “as is,” with no further modification.
This color space is capable of expressing a wider
gamut of colors than sRGB, making it the preferred
X Adobe RGB
choice for images that will be extensively
processed or retouched.
1
Select Color space.
Highlight Color space in the
shooting menu (pg. 268) and
press 2.
2
Select a color space.
J
Highlight the desired option
and press J.
A The Shooting Information Display
The color space can also be selected in the shooting information display
(pg. 15).
181
A
Color Space
Color spaces define the correspondence between colors and the numeric
values that represent them in a digital image file. The sRGB color space is
widely used, while the Adobe RGB color space is typically used in
publishing and commercial printing. sRGB is recommended when taking
photographs that will be printed without modification or viewed in
applications that do not support color management, or when taking
photographs that will be printed with ExifPrint, the direct printing option
on some household printers, or kiosk printing or other commercial print
services. Adobe RGB photographs can also be printed using these
options, but colors will not be as vivid.
JPEG photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space are Exif 2.21 and
DCF 2.0 compliant; applications and printers that support Exif 2.21 and
DCF 2.0 will select the correct color space automatically. If the application
or device does not support Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0, select the appropriate
color space manually. An ICC color profile is embedded in TIFF
photographs taken in the Adobe RGB color space, allowing applications
that support color management to automatically select the correct color
space. For more information, see the documentation provided with the
application or device.
J A Nikon Software
ViewNX (supplied) and Capture NX 2 (available separately) automatically
select the correct color space when opening photographs created with
the D700.
182
lFlash Photography
– Using the Built-in Flash
This chapter describes how to use the built-in flash.
The Built-in Flash........................................................... pg. 184
Using the Built-in Flash ................................................ pg. 185
Flash Modes.................................................................... pg. 188
Flash Compensation ..................................................... pg. 190
FV Lock ............................................................................ pg. 192
l
183
The Built-in Flash
The built-in flash has a Guide Number (GN) 17/56 (m/ft, ISO 200,
20 °C/68 °F) and can cover the field of view of a 24mm lens, or a
16mm lens in DX format. It supports i-TTL balanced fill-flash for
digital SLR, which uses monitor pre-flashes to adjust flash output
for balanced lighting not only when natural lighting is inadequate
but when filling in shadows and backlit subjects or adding a catch
light to the subject’s eyes. The following types of i-TTL flash
control are supported:
i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR: Speedlight emits series of nearly
invisible preflashes (monitor preflashes) immediately before main flash.
Preflashes reflected from objects in all areas of frame are picked up by
1,005-segment RGB sensor and are analyzed in combination with range
information from matrix metering system to adjust flash output for
natural balance between main subject and ambient background
lighting. If type G or D lens is used, distance information is included
when calculating flash output. Precision of calculation can be increased
for non-CPU lenses by providing lens data (focal length and maximum
aperture; see pg. 210). Not available when spot metering is used.
l
Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR: Flash output adjusted to bring lighting in
frame to standard level; brightness of background is not taken into
account. Recommended for shots in which main subject is emphasized
at expense of background details, or when exposure compensation is
used. Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when
spot metering is selected.
D
ISO Sensitivity
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 6400.
At values over 6400 or under 200, the desired results may not be achieved
at some ranges or aperture settings.
184
Using the Built-in Flash
Follow these steps when using the built-in flash.
1
Choose a metering method
(pg. 112).
Metering selector
Select matrix or center-weighted
metering to activate i-TTL balanced fillflash for digital SLR. Standard i-TTL flash
for digital SLR is activated automatically
when spot metering is selected.
2
Press the flash pop-up button.
The built-in flash will pop up and begin
charging. When the flash is fully
charged, the flash-ready indicator (c)
will light.
Flash pop-up button
3
l
Choose a flash mode.
Press the M button and rotate
the main command dial until
the desired flash mode icon is
displayed in the control panel
(pg. 188).
M button
Main command
dial
Control panel
185
4
Check exposure (shutter speed and aperture).
Press the shutter-release button halfway and check shutter
speed and aperture. The settings available when the built-in
flash is raised are listed below.
Mode
e
f
g
h
Shutter speed
Aperture
See page
Set automatically by camera
116
(1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2
Set automatically
by camera
Value selected by user
118
(1/250 s–30 s) 2
Set automatically by camera
119
(1/250 s–1/60 s) 1, 2
Value selected
3
by user
Value selected by user
121
(1/250 s–30 s) 2
1 Shutter speed may be set as slow as 30s in slow sync, slow rear-curtain
sync, and slow sync with red-eye reduction flash modes.
2 The built-in flash supports speeds of up to 1/320 s when 1/320 s (Auto
FP) is selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, pp. 305–306).
Optional SB-900, SB-800 and SB-600 flash units support speeds of up
to 1/8,000 s at settings of 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP).
3 Flash range varies with aperture and ISO sensitivity. Consult table of
flash ranges (pg. 427) when setting aperture in g and h modes.
l
At default settings, the effects of the flash can be previewed by
pressing the depth-of-field preview button to emit a modeling
preflash (pg. 315).
5
Take the picture.
Compose the photograph, focus, and shoot. If the flash-ready
indicator (M) blinks for about three seconds after the
photograph is taken, the flash has fired at full output and the
photograph may be underexposed. Check the results in the
monitor. If the photograph is underexposed, adjust settings
and try again.
A
See Also
See page 306 for information on 1/320 s (Auto FP).
186
Lowering the Built-in Flash
To save power when the flash is not in use,
press it gently downward until the latch
clicks into place.
D The Built-in Flash
Use with lenses with focal lengths of 24–300 mm in FX format (pg. 374).
Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows. The flash has a minimum range
of 60 cm (2 ft.) and can not be used in the macro range of macro zoom
lenses.
If the flash fires in continuous release mode (pg. 86), only one picture will
be taken each time the shutter-release button is pressed.
The shutter release may be briefly disabled to protect the flash after it has
been used for several consecutive shots. The flash can be used again after
a short pause.
l
A See Also
See page 192 for information on locking flash value (FV) for a metered
subject before recomposing a photograph.
For information on choosing a flash sync speed, see Custom Setting e1
(Flash sync speed, pg. 305). For information on choosing the slowest
shutter speed available when using the flash, see Custom Setting e2
(Flash shutter speed, pg. 308). For information on using the built-in flash
in commander mode, see Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in
flash, pg. 309).
See page 377 for information on using optional flash units. For
information on the range of the built-in flash, see page 427.
187
Flash Modes
The camera supports the following flash modes:
Flash mode
Front-curtain
sync
Red-eye
reduction
l
Red-eye
reduction with
slow sync
Slow sync
188
Description
This mode is recommended for most situations. In
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto modes,
shutter speed will automatically be set to values
between 1/250 and 1/60 s (1/8,000 to 1/60 s when an
optional flash unit is used with Auto FP High-Speed
Sync) (pg. 377).
Red-eye reduction lamp lights for approximately one
second before main flash. Pupils in subject’s eyes to
contract, reducing “red-eye” effect sometimes caused
by flash. Owing to one-second shutter-release delay,
this mode is not recommended with moving subjects
or in other situations in which quick shutter response
is required. Avoid moving camera while red-eye
reduction lamp is lit.
Combines red-eye reduction with slow sync. Use for
portraits taken against a backdrop of night scenery.
Available only in programmed auto and aperturepriority auto exposure modes. Use of a tripod is
recommended to prevent blurring caused by camera
shake.
Flash is combined with shutter speeds as slow as 30 s
to capture both subject and background at night or
under dim light. This mode is only available in
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto
exposure modes. Use of tripod is recommended to
prevent blurring caused by camera shake.
Flash mode
Description
In shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode,
flash fires just before the shutter closes. Use to create
Rear-curtain sync effect of a stream of light behind moving objects. In
programmed auto and aperture-priority auto, slow
rear-curtain sync is used to capture both subject and
background. Use of tripod is recommended to
Slow rear-curtain prevent blurring caused by camera shake.
sync
A Flash Control Mode
The shooting information display shows the flash control mode for the
built-in flash (Built-in) and for optional flash units attached to the camera
accessory shoe (Optional) as follows:
Built-in
i-TTL
Optional
TTL 2
Auto aperture (AA) 1
Built-in
Optional
Manual
Built-in
Optional
—
l
Auto FP
(pg. 306)
—
Repeating
flash 2
—
Commander
mode 2
—
—
—
—
—
—
1 Available with SB-900 and SB-800 only.
2 Flash control mode for built-in flash can be selected using Custom Setting e3
(Flash cntrl for built-in flash, pg. 309).
A See Also
See Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed, pg. 305) for information on
flash sync speeds as fast as 1/320 s.
189
Flash Compensation
Flash compensation is used to alter flash output by from –3EV to
+1EV in increments of 1/3 EV, changing the brightness of the main
subject relative to the background. Flash output can be increased
to make the main subject appear brighter, or reduced to prevent
unwanted highlights or reflections.
Press the Y button and rotate
the sub-command dial until the
desired value is displayed in the
control panel. In general, choose
positive values to make the main
subject brighter, negative values
to make it darker.
l
M button
Sub-command
dial
At values other than ±0, a Y icon will be
displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder after you release the Y button.
The current value for flash compensation
can be confirmed by pressing the Y
button.
Normal flash output can be restored by
setting flash compensation to ±0.0. Flash
compensation is not reset when the camera
is turned off.
±0 EV (Y button
pressed)
–0.3 EV
+1.0 EV
190
A Optional Flash Units
Flash compensation is also available with optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600,
SB-400, and SB-R200 flash units.
A See Also
For information on choosing the size of the increments available when
setting flash compensation, see Custom Setting b3 (Exp comp/fine tune,
pg. 292).
l
191
FV Lock
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to
be recomposed without changing the flash level and ensuring that
flash output is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is
not positioned in the center of the frame. Flash output is adjusted
automatically for any changes in ISO sensitivity and aperture.
To use FV lock:
1
Assign FV lock to the Fn button.
Select FV lock for Custom Setting f5
(Assign FUNC. button > FUNC. button
press, pg. 320).
2
Press the flash pop-up button.
The built-in flash will pop up and begin
charging.
l
Flash pop-up
button
3
Focus.
Position the subject in the
center of the frame and press
the shutter-release button
halfway to focus.
192
4
Lock flash level.
After confirming that the flash ready
indicator (M) is displayed in the
viewfinder, press the Fn button. The
flash will emit a monitor preflash to
determine the appropriate flash level.
Flash output will be locked at this level
and FV lock icon (e) will appear in the
viewfinder.
5
Recompose the photograph.
6
Take the photograph.
Fn button
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
shoot. If desired, additional pictures can be taken without
releasing FV lock.
7
l
Release FV lock.
Press the Fn button to release FV lock. Confirm that the FV lock
icon (e) is no longer displayed in the viewfinder.
193
D
Using FV Lock with the Built-in Flash
FV lock is only available with the built-in flash when TTL (the default
option) is selected for Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl for built-in flash,
pg. 309).
A
Using FV Lock with Optional Flash Units
FV lock is also available with SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200
flash units (available separately). Set the optional flash to TTL mode (the
SB-900 and SB-800 can also be used in AA mode; see the flash manual for
details). While FV lock is in effect, flash output will automatically be
adjusted for changes in flash zoom head position.
When Commander mode is selected for Custom Setting e3 (Flash cntrl
for built-in flash, pg. 309), FV lock can be used with remote SB-900,
SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units if (a) any of the built-in flash, flash
group A, or flash group B is in TTL mode, or (b) a flash group is composed
entirely of SB-900 and SB-800 flash units in TTL or AA mode.
A
Metering
The metering areas for FV lock when using optional speedlight are as
follows:
Speedlight
l
Stand-alone flash unit
Flash mode
i-TTL
AA
Metered area
5-mm circle in center of frame
Area metered by flash exposure
meter
Entire frame
i-TTL
Used with other flash
units (Advanced
AA
Area metered by flash exposure
Wireless Lighting) A (master flash)
meter
A
See Also
For information on using the depth-of-field preview or AE-L/AF-L button for
FV lock, see Custom Setting f6 (Assign preview button, pg. 324) or
Custom Setting f7 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, pg. 325).
194
tOther Shooting Options
This chapter covers restoring default settings, making multiple
exposures, interval timer photography, and using GPS units and
non-CPU lenses.
Two-Button Reset: Restoring Default Settings........ pg. 196
Multiple Exposure ......................................................... pg. 198
Interval Timer Photography........................................ pg. 203
Non-CPU Lenses ............................................................ pg. 210
Using a GPS Unit............................................................ pg. 213
t
195
Two-Button Reset: Restoring
Default Settings
The camera settings listed below
can be restored to default values
by holding the QUAL and E
buttons down together for more
than two seconds (these
buttons are marked by a green
dot). The control panel turns off
briefly while settings are reset.
Option
Focus point
Exposure mode
Flexible program
Exposure
compensation
AE hold
t
196
Default
Center
Programmed
auto
Off
Off
Off 1
E button
QUAL button
Option
Bracketing
Flash mode
Flash
compensation
FV lock
Multiple exposure
Default
Off 2
Front-curtain
sync
Off
Off
Off
1 Custom Setting f7 (Assign AE-L/AF-L button, pg. 325) is unaffected.
2 Number of shots is reset to zero. Bracketing increment is reset to 1EV
(exposure/flash bracketing) or 1 (white balance bracketing).
The following shooting-menu options will also be reset. Only
settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting menu
bank option will be reset (pg. 269). Settings in the remaining
banks are unaffected.
Option
Image quality
Image size
Default
JPEG Normal
Large
Option
White balance
ISO sensitivity
Default
Auto *
200
* Fine-tuning off.
If the current Picture Control has been modified, existing settings
for the Picture Control will also be restored.
t
A See Also
See page 418 for a list of default settings.
197
Multiple Exposure
Follow the steps below to record a series of two to ten exposures
in a single photograph. Multiple exposures can be recorded at any
image quality setting, and produce results with colors noticeably
better than photographs combined in an imaging application
because they make use of RAW data from the camera image
sensor.
❚❚ Creating a Multiple Exposure
Note that at default settings, shooting will end and a multiple
exposure will be recorded automatically if no operations are
performed for 30 s.
1
Select Multiple exposure.
Highlight Multiple exposure
in the shooting menu and
press 2.
2
Select Number of shots.
Highlight Number of shots
and press 2.
t
A
Extended Recording Times
For an interval between exposures of more than 30 s, select On for the
Image review (pg. 265) option in the playback menu and extend the
monitor-off delay for image review using Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off
delay, pg. 297). The maximum interval between exposures is 30 s longer
than the option selected for Custom Setting c4.
198
3
Select the number of shots.
Press 1 or 3 to choose the
number of exposures that will
be combined to form a single
photograph and press J.
4
Select Auto gain.
Highlight Auto gain and press
2.
5
Set gain.
Highlight one of the following
options and press J.
Option
Description
Gain adjusted according to number of exposures
On
actually recorded (gain for each exposure is set to 1/2 for
(default)
2 exposures, 1/3 for 3 exposures, etc.).
Gain is not adjusted when recording multiple exposure.
Off
Recommended if background is dark.
t
199
6
Select Done.
Highlight Done and press J. A
n icon will be displayed in the
control panel. To exit without
taking a multiple exposure,
select Multiple
exposure > Reset in the
shooting menu.
7
t
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.
In continuous high-speed and continuous lowspeed release modes (pg. 84), the camera records all
exposures in a single burst. In single-frame release mode, one
photograph will be taken each time the shutter-release button
is pressed; continue shooting until all exposures have been
recorded (for information on interrupting a multiple exposure
before all photographs are recorded, see page 202).
The n icon will blink until shooting
ends. When shooting ends, multiple
exposure mode will end and the n icon
will no longer be displayed. Repeat
steps 1–7 to take additional multiple
exposures.
200
D Multiple Exposure
Do not remove or replace the memory card while recording a multiple
exposure.
Live view (pg. 89) can not be used to record multiple exposures.
The information listed in the playback photo information display
(including date of recording and camera orientation) is for the first shot in
the multiple exposure.
If no operations are performed for 30 s after the monitor has turned off
during playback or menu operations, shooting will end and a multiple
exposure will be created from the exposures that have been recorded to
that point.
A Interval Timer Photography
If interval timer photography is activated before the first exposure is
taken, the camera will record exposures at the selected interval until the
number of exposures specified in the multiple exposure menu have been
taken (the number of shots listed in the interval timer shooting menu is
ignored). These exposures will then be recorded as a single photograph
and multiple exposure mode and interval timer shooting will end.
Cancelling multiple exposure cancels interval timer shooting.
A Other Settings
While multiple exposure mode is in effect, memory cards can not be
formatted and the following can not be changed: bracketing and
shooting menu options other than White balance and Interval timer
shooting (note that Interval timer shooting can only be adjusted before
the first exposure is taken). The Lock mirror up for cleaning and Dust off
ref photo options in the setup menu can not used.
t
201
❚❚ Interrupting Multiple Exposures
Selecting Multiple exposure in the shooting
menu while a multiple exposure is being
recorded displays the options shown at right.
To interrupt a multiple exposure before the
specified number of exposures have been
taken, highlight Cancel and press J. If
shooting ends before the specified number of exposures have
been taken, a multiple exposure will be created from the
exposures that have been recorded to that point. If Auto gain is
on, gain will be adjusted to reflect the number of exposures
actually recorded. Note that shooting will end automatically if:
• A two-button reset is performed (pg. 196)
• The camera is turned off
• The battery is exhausted
• Pictures are deleted
t
202
Interval Timer Photography
The camera is equipped to take photographs automatically at
preset intervals.
1
Select Interval timer
shooting.
Highlight Interval timer
shooting in the shooting
menu (pg. 268) and press 2.
2
Select a starting trigger.
Highlight one of the following
Choose start time options and
press 2.
• Now: Shooting begins about
3 s after settings are
completed (proceed to Step 4).
• Start time: Choose a start time (see Step 3).
D Before Shooting
Choose single-frame (S), continuous low speed (CL), or continuous high
speed (CH) release mode when using the interval timer. Before beginning
interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and view
the results in the monitor. Remember that the camera will focus before
each shot—no shots will be taken if the camera is unable to focus in
single-servo AF.
t
Before choosing a starting time, select World time in the setup menu and
make sure that the camera clock is set to the correct time and date
(pg. 38).
Use of a tripod is recommended. Mount the camera on a tripod before
shooting begins.
To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the battery is fully
charged.
203
3
Choose a start time.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight hours
or minutes; press 1 or 3 to
change. The starting time is
not displayed if Now is
selected for Choose start time.
4
Choose an interval.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight
hours, minutes, or seconds;
press 1 or 3 to change. Note
that the camera will not be
able to take photographs at
the specified interval if it is shorter than the shutter speed or
the time required to record images.
t
204
5
Choose the number of
intervals and number of
shots per interval.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight
number of intervals or number
of shots; press 1 or 3 to
change. The total number of
shots that will be taken is
displayed to the right.
Number of Number Total
intervals
6
of shots/ number of
interval shots
Start shooting.
Highlight Start > On and press
J (to return to the shooting
menu without starting the
interval timer, highlight
Start > Off and press J). The
first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time.
Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots
have been taken.
A message will be displayed in the monitor one minute before
each series of shots is taken. If shooting can not proceed at
current settings (for example, if a shutter speed of A is
currently selected in manual exposure mode or the start time
is in less than a minute), a warning will be displayed in the
monitor.
t
A Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter
Close the viewfinder eyepiece shutter after
focusing. This prevents light entering via the
viewfinder from interfering with exposure when
shooting with your eye away from the
viewfinder.
205
D
Out of Memory
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no
pictures will be taken. Resume shooting (pg. 207) after deleting some
pictures or turning the camera off and inserting another memory card.
A
Bracketing
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography. If
exposure and/or flash bracketing is active while interval timer
photography is in effect, the camera will take the number of shots in the
bracketing program at each interval, regardless of the number of shots
specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance bracketing is active
while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take one shot
at each interval and process it to create the number of copies specified in
the bracketing program.
A
t
206
During Shooting
During interval timer photography, the Q icon in
the control panel will blink. Immediately before
the next shooting interval begins, the shutter
speed display will show the number of intervals
remaining, and the aperture display will show the
number of shots remaining in the current interval.
At other times, the number of intervals remaining and the number of
shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-release
button halfway (once the button is released, the shutter speed and
aperture will be displayed until the exposure meters turn off ).
To view current interval timer settings, select
Interval timer shooting between shots. While
interval timer photography is in progress, the
interval timer menu will show the starting time,
the current time, and the number of intervals and
shots remaining. None of these items can be
changed while interval timer photography is in
progress.
❚❚ Pausing Interval Timer Photography
Interval time photography can be paused by:
• Pressing the J button between intervals
• Highlighting Start > Pause in the interval timer menu and
pressing J
• Turning the camera off and then on again (if desired, the
memory card can be replaced while the camera is off )
• Selecting live view (a), self-timer (E), or mirror-up (MUP) release
modes
To resume shooting:
1
Choose a new starting
trigger.
Choose a new starting trigger
and start time as described on
page 203.
2
Resume shooting.
Highlight Start > Restart and
press J. Note that if interval
timer photography was paused
during shooting, any shots
remaining in the current
interval will be canceled.
t
207
❚❚ Interrupting Interval Timer Photography
Interval timer shooting will end automatically if the battery is
exhausted. Interval timer photography can also be ended by:
• Selecting Start > Off in the interval timer menu
• Performing a two button reset (pg. 196)
• Selecting Reset shooting menu in the shooting menu (pg. 271)
• Changing bracketing settings (pg. 130)
Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography
ends.
❚❚ No Photograph
Photographs will not be taken if the previous photograph has yet
to be taken, the memory buffer or memory card is full, or the
camera is unable to focus in single-servo AF (note that the camera
focuses again before each shot).
t
A
Release Mode
Regardless of the release mode selected, the camera will take the
specified number of shots at each interval. In CH (continuous high speed)
mode, photographs will be taken at a rate of up to 5 shots per second. In S
(single frame) and CL (continuous low-speed) modes, photographs will be
taken at the rate chosen for Custom Setting d4 (CL mode shooting
speed, pg. 299).
A
Using the Monitor
Pictures can be played back and shooting and menu settings can be
adjusted freely while interval timer photography is in progress. The
monitor will turn off automatically about four seconds before each
interval.
208
A Shooting Menu Banks
Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks (pg.
269). If shooting menu settings are reset using the Reset shooting menu
item in the shooting menu (pg. 271), interval timer settings will be reset as
follows:
• Choose start time: Now
• Interval: 00:01':00"
• Number of intervals: 1
• Number of shots: 1
• Start shooting: Off
t
209
Non-CPU Lenses
By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture),
the user can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when
using a non-CPU lens. If the focal length of the lens is known:
• Automatic power zoom can be used with SB-900, SB-800, and
SB-600 Speedlights (available separately)
• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo
info display
When the maximum aperture of the lens is known:
• The aperture value is displayed in the control panel and
viewfinder
• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture
• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info
display
t
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the
lens:
• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to
use center-weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results
with some lenses, including Reflex-Nikkor lenses)
• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering
and i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR
A
Focal Length Not Listed
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater
than the actual focal length of the lens.
A
Zoom Lenses
Lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out.
After changing the zoom position, select new values for lens focal length
and maximum aperture.
210
❚❚ The Non-CPU Lens Data Menu
1
Select Non-CPU lens data.
Highlight Non-CPU lens data
in the setup menu (pg. 331)
and press 2.
2
Select a lens number.
Highlight Lens number and
press 4 or 2 to choose a lens
number between 1 and 9.
3
Select a focal length.
Highlight Focal length (mm)
and press 4 or 2 to choose a
focal length between 6 and
4,000 mm.
4
Select a maximum
aperture.
Highlight Maximum aperture
and press 4 or 2 to choose a
maximum aperture between
f/1.2 and f/22. The maximum aperture for teleconverters is the
combined maximum aperture of the teleconverter and lens.
t
211
5
Select Done.
Highlight Done and press J.
The specified focal length and
aperture will be stored under
the chosen lens number. This
combination of focal length
and aperture can be recalled at any time by selecting the lens
number using camera controls as described below.
❚❚ Choosing a Lens Number Using Camera Controls
1
Assign non-CPU lens number selection to a camera
control.
Select Choose non-CPU lens number as the “+command
dials” option for a camera control in the Custom Settings
menu. Non-CPU lens number selection can be assigned to the
Fn button (Custom Setting f5, Assign FUNC. button, pg. 320),
the depth-of-field preview button (Custom Setting f6, Assign
preview button, pg. 324), or the AE-L/AF-L button (Custom
Setting f7, Assign AE-L/AF-L button, pg. 325).
t
2
Use the selected control to choose a lens number.
Press the selected button and rotate the main command dial
until the desired lens number is displayed in the control panel.
Focal
length
Main command dial
212
Maximum
aperture
Lens number
Using a GPS Unit
Optional Garmin GPS units that conform to version 2.01 or 3.01 of
the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA0183 data
format can be connected to the camera’s ten-pin remote terminal
using an MC-35 GPS adapter cord (available separately; pg. 389),
allowing information on the camera’s current position to be
recorded when photographs are taken. Operation has been
confirmed with Garmin eTrex and Garmin geko series devices
equipped with a PC interface cable connector. These devices
connect to the MC-35 using a cable with a D-sub 9-pin connector
provided by the manufacturer of the GPS device. See the MC-35
instruction manual for details. Before turning the camera on, set
the GPS device to NMEA mode (4800 baud).
t
MC-35
213
When the camera establishes
communication with a GPS device, a k icon
will be displayed in the control panel. Photo
information for pictures taken while the k
icon is displayed will include an additional
page (pg. 229) recording the current latitude, longitude, altitude,
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and heading. If no data are
received from the GPS unit for two seconds, the k icon will clear
from the display and the camera will stop recording GPS
information.
t
A
GPS Data
GPS data are only recorded when the k icon is
displayed. Confirm that the k icon is displayed in
the control panel before shooting. A flashing k
icon indicates that the GPS device is searching for
a signal; pictures taken while the k icon is flashing
will not include GPS data.
214
❚❚ Setup Menu Options
The GPS item in the setup menu contains the options listed below.
• Auto meter off: Choose whether or not the exposure meters will
turn off automatically when a GPS unit is attached.
Option
Description
Exposure meters will turn off automatically if no operations
are performed for the period specified in Custom Setting c2
Enable (Auto meter-off delay). This reduces the drain on the
(default) battery but may prevent GPS data from being recorded if
the shutter-release button is pressed all the way down
without pausing.
Exposure meters will not turn off while a GPS unit is
Disable
connected; GPS data will always be recorded.
• Position: This item is only available if a GPS device is connected,
when it displays the current latitude, longitude, altitude,
Coordinated Universal Time (UTC), and heading as reported by
the GPS device.
t
A Heading
The heading is only recorded if the GPS device is
equipped with a digital compass. Keep the GPS
device pointing in the same direction as the lens
and at least 20cm (8in.) from the camera.
A Coordinated Universal Time (UTC)
UTC data is provided by the GPS device and is independent of the camera
clock.
215
t
216
IMore About Playback
– Playback Options
This chapter describes how to play back photographs and details
the operations that can be performed during playback.
Full-Frame Playback...................................................... pg. 218
Photo Information ........................................................ pg. 220
Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback ...... pg. 232
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom ....................... pg. 234
Protecting Photographs from Deletion .................... pg. 235
Deleting Individual Photographs............................... pg. 236
I
217
Full-Frame Playback
To play photographs back, press
the K button. The most recent
photograph will be displayed in the
monitor.
Multi selector
Sub-command dial
O button
K button
G button
L button
W button
X button
J button
Main command dial
I
A
Rotate Tall
To display “tall” (portrait-orientation)
photographs in tall orientation, select On for the
Rotate tall option in the playback menu (pg. 265).
Note that because the camera itself is already in
the appropriate orientation during shooting,
images are not rotated automatically during
image review (pg. 219).
218
To
View
additional
photographs
Use
Press 1 or 3 to view information
about current photograph (pg. 220).
View photo
information
View
thumbnails
Zoom in on
photograph
W
Delete images
O
Change
protect
status
Return to
shooting
mode
Display menus
Description
Press 2 to view photographs in order
recorded, 4 to view photographs in
reverse order.
X
L
/K
G
See page 232 for more information on
the thumbnail display.
See page 234 for more information on
playback zoom.
Confirmation dialog will be displayed.
Press O again to delete photo.
To protect image, or to remove
protection from protected image, press
L button (pg. 235).
Monitor will turn off. Photographs
can be taken immediately.
See page 259 for more information.
A Image Review
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu (pg. 265),
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor for about 4 s (the
default setting) after shooting. In single-frame, self-timer, and mirror-up
release modes, photographs are displayed one at a time as they are taken.
In continuous release mode, display begins when shooting ends, with the
first photograph in the current series displayed.
I
A See Also
For information on choosing how long the monitor will remain on when
no operations are performed, see Custom Setting c4 (Monitor off delay,
pg. 297).
The roles of the multi selector buttons can be reversed, so that the 1 and
3 buttons display other images and the 4 and 2 buttons control photo
information. See Custom Setting f4 (Photo info/playback, pg. 320) for
details.
219
Photo Information
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in fullframe playback. There are up to 9 pages of information for each
photo. Press 1 or 3 to cycle through photo information as shown
below. Note that shooting data, RGB histograms, and highlights
are only displayed if corresponding option is selected for Display
mode (pg. 264; shooting data page 4 is only displayed if copyright
information was recorded with the photograph as described on
page 343). GPS data are only displayed if a GPS device was used
when the photo was taken.
1/ 10
N I KON D700
1 / 10
LATITUDE
LONGITUDE
1/ 250
AUTO
100ND700 DSC _0001. JPG
15/07/2008 10 : 02 : 27
N OR
ORMAL
AL
4256x2832
File Information
F11
200
35mm
ALTITUDE
TIME(UTC)
HEADING
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N
35 º 36. 371'
E
139 º 43. 696'
35m
15/07/2008
10:02:27
105. 07 º
0, 0
100ND700 DSC_0001. JPG
15/07/2008 10: 02: 27
NOR
ORMAL
AL
4256x2832
N I KON D700
Overview Data
100--1
GPS Data
100-1
Highlights
I
Select R, G, B
Highlights
H ighlights
MTR, SPD, AP.
EXP. MODE, I SO
, EXP. TUN I NG
FOCAL LENGTH
LENS
AF / VR
FLASH MODE,
100--1
Select R, G, B
RGB Histogram
220
N I KON D700
: , 1/ 250, F11
: , 200
: 0, 0
: 35mm
: 24–120
/ 3. 5–5.6
: S / VR–On
:
100--1
Shooting Data pages 1–3
ARTI ST
: KOUGAKU TARO
COPYRI GHT
: NI KON
N I KON D700
100--1
Shooting Data page 4
❚❚ File Information
1
2
3 4
5
1/ 10
13
100ND700 DSC _0001. JPG
15/07/2008 10 : 02 : 27
12
1
2
3
4
5
11
Protect status ............................. 235
Retouch indicator..................... 349
Focus point 1 .............................. 264
AF area brackets ...................45, 94
Frame number/
total number of frames
6 File name..................................... 274
10 9
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
N OR
ORMAL
AL
4256x2832
6
7
8
Image quality ............................... 64
Image size...................................... 69
Image area 2 .................................. 58
Image authentication..............342
Time of recording ....................... 38
Date of recording........................ 38
Folder name................................272
1 Display only if Focus point is selected for Display mode (pg. 264).
2 c is displayed if FX format (36 × 24) was selected for the Image area
option in the shooting menu. If DX format (24 × 16) was selected, a will
be displayed in yellow.
I
221
❚❚ Highlights 1
1
2
3
4
100-1
6
5
Highlights
Select R, G, B
1 Protect status............................. 235
2 Retouch indicator..................... 349
3 Image highlights 2.................... 264
4 Folder number–
frame number 3 .........................272
5 Current channel 2
6 Highlight display indicator....264
1 Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode (pg. 264).
2 Blinking areas indicate highlights for current
channel. Press 4 or 2 while pressing W button to
cycle through channels as follows:
RGB
(all channels)
I
222
R
(red)
G
(green)
B
(blue)
3 Displayed in yellow if picture was taken with DX format (24 × 16) selected
for the Image area option in the shooting menu.
❚❚ RGB Histogram 1
1
2
7
3
4
H ighlights
8
100--1
9
5
6
1
2
3
4
Select R, G, B
Protect status ............................. 235
Retouch indicator..................... 349
Image highlights 2
Folder number–
frame number 3 ......................... 272
5 Histogram (RGB channel) 4. In all
histograms, horizontal axis gives
pixel brightness, vertical axis
number of pixels.
6 Current channel 2
7 Histogram (red channel) 4
8 Histogram (green channel) 4
9 Histogram (blue channel) 4
1 Displayed only if RGB histogram is selected for Display mode (pg. 264).
2 Blinking areas indicate highlights for current
channel. Press 4 or 2 while pressing W button to
cycle through channels as follows:
RGB
(all channels)
R
G
(red)
(green)
Highlight display off
B
(blue)
I
3 Displayed in yellow if picture was taken with DX format (24 × 16) selected
for the Image area option in the shooting menu.
223
4 Some sample histograms are shown below:
• If the image contains objects with a
wide range of brightnesses, the
distribution of tones will be
relatively even.
• If the image is dark, tone
distribution will be shifted to the
left.
• If the image is bright, tone
distribution will be shifted to the
right.
Increasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution of tones to the
right, while decreasing exposure compensation shifts the distribution to
the left. Histograms can provide a rough idea of overall exposure when
bright ambient lighting makes it difficult to see photographs in the
monitor.
I
A
Histograms
Camera histograms are intended as a guide only and may differ from
those displayed in imaging applications.
224
❚❚ Shooting Data Page 1 1
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
2
MTR, SPD, AP.
EXP. MODE, I SO
, EXP. TUN I NG
FOCAL LENGTH
LENS
AF / VR
FLASH MODE,
: , 1/ 250, F11
: , 200
: + 1. 3, +5 / 6
: 35mm
: 24– 120
/ 3. 5–5.6
: S / VR– On
: Built – i n, TTL, +1. 3
CMD : M : TTL, +3. 0 A: TTL, +3. 0
C: OFF
B: OFF
N I KON D700
11
100--1
12
1 Protect status............................. 235 8 Focus mode .................................. 72
Lens VR
2 Retouch indicator..................... 349
(vibration reduction) 4 ............... 37
3 Metering method..................... 112
Shutter speed ...................118, 121 9 Flash mode..................................185
Flash compensation.................190
Aperture .............................119, 121
10
Commander
mode/group
4 Exposure mode......................... 114
name/flash control mode/flash
ISO sensitivity 2 .......................... 106
compensation............................311
5 Exposure compensation........ 128
Optimal exposure tuning 3.... 294 11 Camera name
6 Focal length................................ 376 12 Folder number–
frame number 5..........................272
7 Lens data ..................................... 210
1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (pg. 264).
2 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.
3 Displayed if Custom Setting b6 (Fine tune optimal exposure, pg. 294) has
been set to a value other than zero for any metering method.
4 Displayed only if VR lens is attached.
5 Displayed in yellow if picture was taken with DX format (24 × 16) selected
for the Image area option in the shooting menu.
I
225
❚❚ Shooting Data Page 2 1
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
2
WHI TE BALANCE
COLOR SPACE
PI CTURE CNTRL
QUICK ADJUST
SHARPENING
CONTRAST
BRI GHTNESS
SATURATION
HUE
: AUTO, 0, 0
: s RGB
: STANDARD
:0
:3
:0
:0
:0
:0
N I KON D700
100--1
12
1 Protect status............................. 235
2 Retouch indicator..................... 349
3 White balance............................ 139
Color temperature ................... 147
White balance fine-tuning.... 143
Preset manual............................ 148
4 Color space................................. 181
5 Picture Control .......................... 162
6 Quick adjust 2 ............................. 165
Original Picture Control 3 ....... 162
I
226
1
2
3
4
5
6
13
7
8
9
10
Sharpening..................................165
Contrast........................................165
Brightness....................................165
Saturation 4..................................165
Filter effects 5 ..............................165
11 Hue 4 ..............................................165
Toning 5.........................................165
12 Camera name
13 Folder number–
frame number 6..........................272
Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (pg. 264).
Standard and Vivid Picture Controls only.
Neutral, Monochrome, and custom Picture Controls.
Not displayed with monochrome Picture Controls.
Monochrome Picture Controls only.
Displayed in yellow if picture was taken with DX format (24 × 16) selected
for the Image area option in the shooting menu.
❚❚ Shooting Data Page 3 1
1
2
3
4
5
6
NOI SE REDUC.
ACT . D–L I GHT.
VIGNETTE CTRL
RETOUCH
7
COMMENT
: H I I SO, NORM
: NORMAL
: NORMAL
: D– L I GHT I NG
WARM TONE
CYANOTYPE
TRI M
: SPRI NG HAS COME. SP
RI NG HAS COME. 3636
N I KON D700
100--1
8
1 Protect status............................. 235
2 Retouch indicator..................... 349
3 High ISO noise reduction ...... 278
Long exposure noise
reduction..................................... 277
4 Active D-Lighting ..................... 179
9
5
6
7
8
9
Vignette control ........................276
Retouch history .........................349
Image comment........................335
Camera name
Folder number–
frame number 2..........................272
1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (pg. 264).
2 Displayed in yellow if picture was taken with DX format (24 × 16) selected
for the Image area option in the shooting menu.
I
227
❚❚ Shooting Data Page 4 1
1
2
3
ARTIST
: KOUGAKU TARO
4
COPYRI GHT
: NI KON
N I KON D700
1
2
3
4
5
Protect status............................. 235
Retouch indicator..................... 349
Name of photographer.......... 343
Copyright holder ...................... 343
100--1
6
5 Camera name
6 Folder number–
frame number 2..........................272
1 Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode (pg. 264) and copyright
information was appended to photograph (pg. 343).
2 Displayed in yellow if picture was taken with DX format (24 × 16) selected
for the Image area option in the shooting menu.
I
228
❚❚ GPS Data 1
1
2
3
LATITUDE
4
LONGITUDE
5
6
ALTITUDE
TIME(UTC)
7
HEADING
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
N
35 º 36. 371'
E
139 º 43. 696'
35m
15/07/2008
10:02:27
105. 07 º
N I KON D700
8
1
2
3
4
5
Protect status............................. 235
Retouch indicator..................... 349
Latitude
Longitude
Altitude
100--1
9
6 Coordinated Universal Time
(UTC)
7 Heading 2
8 Camera name
9 Folder number–
frame number 3..........................272
1 Displayed only if GPS device was used when photo was taken (pg. 213).
2 Displayed only if GPS device is equipped with electronic compass.
3 Displayed in yellow if picture was taken with DX format (24 × 16) selected
for the Image area option in the shooting menu.
I
229
❚❚ Overview Data
1
2
N I KON D700
1 / 10
16
15
14
13
12
11
230
4
5
1/ 250 , F11
+ 1. 3
–1. 3
10000
200
35mm
L
A6, M1
100ND700 DSC_0001. JPG
15/07/2008 10: 02: 27
1 Frame number/
total number of frames
2 Protect status............................. 235
3 Camera name
4 Retouch indicator..................... 349
5 Histogram showing the
distribution of tones in the
image (pg. 224). Horizontal axis
corresponds to pixel brightness,
vertical axis shows number of
pixels of each brightness in
image.
I
3
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
NOR
ORMAL
AL
4256x2832
6
7
8
9
10
ISO sensitivity 1 ..........................106
Focal length ................................376
GPS data indicator....................213
Image comment
indicator.......................................335
Flash mode..................................185
Flash compensation.................190
Exposure compensation ........128
Metering method .....................112
Exposure mode..........................114
Shutter speed................... 118, 121
Aperture............................. 119, 121
1 Displayed in red if photo was taken with ISO sensitivity auto control on.
N I KON D700
1 / 10
28
27
26
1/ 250, F11
+ 1. 3
–1. 3
10000
35mm
A6, M1
100ND700 DSC_0001. JPG
15/07/2008 10 : 02: 27
25
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
200
24
Picture Control .......................... 162
Active D-Lighting .................... 180
File name..................................... 274
Image quality................................64
Image size ......................................69
Image area 2...................................58
Image authentication
indicator ...................................... 342
23 22
19
N OR
ORMAL
AL
4256x2832
21
17
18
20
24
25
26
27
Time of recording ....................... 38
Date of recording........................ 38
Folder name................................272
White balance ............................139
Color temperature....................147
White balance fine-tuning ....143
Preset manual ............................148
28 Color space..................................181
2 c is displayed if FX format (36 × 24) was selected for the Image area
option in the shooting menu. If DX format (24 × 16) was selected, a will
be displayed in yellow.
I
231
Viewing Multiple Images:
Thumbnail Playback
To display images in “contact sheets” of four or nine images, press
the W button.
Full-frame playback
I
232
W
W
X
X
Thumbnail playback
The following operations can be performed while thumbnails are
displayed:
To
Use
Display more
images
W
Display fewer
images
X
Description
Press W button to “zoom out”
from one to four images per page.
Press again to display nine images
per page.
Press X button to “zoom in” from
nine to four images per page.
Press again to display highlighted
image full frame.
Press center of multi selector to
switch back and forth between
full frame and thumbnail
playback.
Use multi selector to highlight
images for full-frame playback,
playback zoom (pg. 234), or
deletion (pg. 236).
See page 236 for more
information.
Toggle full frame
playback
Highlight images
Delete highlighted
photo
Change protect
status of
highlighted photo
O
Return to shooting
mode
Display menus
See page 235 for more
information.
L
/K
G
Monitor will turn off. Photographs
can be taken immediately.
I
See page 259 for more
information.
A See Also
For information on choosing the role played by the center of the multi
selector, see Custom Setting f2 (Multi selector center button, pg. 318).
233
Taking a Closer Look:
Playback Zoom
Press the X button to zoom in on the image displayed in full-frame
playback or on the image currently highlighted in thumbnail
playback.
The following operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:
To
Use
Zoom in or
out
X/ W
View other
areas of
image
I
234
Rotate main command dial to view same
location in other images at current zoom
ratio.
View other
images
Change
protect
status
Return to
shooting
mode
Display
menus
Description
Press X to zoom in
to maximum of
approximately
27 × (large
images), 20 ×
(medium images)
or 13 × (small
images). Press W to zoom out. While
photo is zoomed in, use multi selector to
view areas of image not visible in monitor.
Keep multi selector pressed to scroll
rapidly to other areas of frame. Navigation
window is displayed when zoom ratio is
altered; area currently visible in monitor is
indicated by yellow border.
L
See page 235 for more information.
/K
G
Monitor will turn off. Photographs can be
taken immediately.
See page 259 for more information.
Protecting Photographs from
Deletion
In full-frame, zoom, and thumbnail playback, the L button can
be used to protect photographs from accidental deletion.
Protected files can not be deleted using the O button or the
Delete option in the playback menu. Note that protected images
will be deleted when the memory card is formatted (pp. 43, 332).
To protect a photograph:
1
Select an image.
Display the image in full-frame playback or playback zoom or
highlight it in the thumbnail list.
2
Press the L button.
The photograph will be
marked with a a icon. To
remove protection from the
photograph so that it can be
deleted, display the
photograph or highlight it in the thumbnail list and then press
the L button.
I
A Removing Protection from All Images
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently
selected in the Playback folder menu, press the L and O buttons
together for about two seconds.
235
Deleting Individual Photographs
To delete the photograph displayed in full-frame playback or the
photograph highlighted in the thumbnail list, press the O button.
Once deleted, photographs can not be recovered.
1
Select an image.
Display the image or highlight it in the thumbnail list.
2
Press the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
Full-Frame Playback
Thumbnail Playback
I
To delete the photograph, press the O
button again. To exit without deleting
the photograph, press the K button.
A
See Also
To delete multiple images, use the Delete option in the playback menu
(pg. 262). The After delete option in the playback menu determines
whether the next image or the previous image is displayed after an image
is deleted (pg. 265).
236
QConnections
– Connecting to External Devices
This chapter describes how to copy photographs to a computer,
how to print pictures, and how to view them on a television set.
Connecting to a Computer ........................................... pg. 238
Direct USB Connection ................................................................ pg. 240
Wireless and Ethernet Networks .............................................. pg. 242
Printing Photographs .................................................... pg. 243
Direct USB Connection ................................................................ pg. 244
Viewing Photographs on TV ........................................ pg. 255
Standard Definition Devices...................................................... pg. 255
High-Definition Devices.............................................................. pg. 257
Q
237
Connecting to a Computer
This section describes how to use the supplied UC-E4 USB cable to
connect the camera to a computer. Before connecting the camera,
install Nikon Transfer and ViewNX from the supplied Software
Suite CD (see the Install Guide for more information). Nikon
Transfer starts automatically when the camera is connected and is
used to copy photographs to the computer, where they can be
viewed using ViewNX (Nikon Transfer can also be used to back up
photographs and embed information in photographs as they are
transferred, while ViewNX can be used to sort photographs,
convert images to different file formats, and perform simple
editing on NEF (RAW) photographs). To ensure that data transfer is
not interrupted, be sure the camera battery is fully charged. If in
doubt, charge the battery before use or use an EH-5a or EH-5 AC
adapter (available separately).
❚❚ Supported Operating Systems
The camera can be connected to computers running the following
operating systems:
• Windows: Windows Vista Service Pack 1 (32-bit Home Basic/Home
Premium/Business/Enterprise/Ultimate) and Windows XP
Service Pack 2 (Home Edition/Professional)
• Macintosh: Mac OS X (version 10.3.9, 10.4.11, or 10.5.2)
See the websites listed on page xxiv for the latest information on
supported operating systems.
Q
238
D Connecting Cables
Be sure the camera is off when connecting or disconnecting interface
cables. Do not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
A Camera Control Pro 2
Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately; pg. 388) can be used to control
the camera from a computer. When Camera Control Pro 2 is running, “c”
will be displayed in the control panel.
Q
239
Direct USB Connection
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable.
1
Turn the camera off.
2
Turn the computer on.
Power switch
Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.
3
Connect the USB cable.
Connect the USB cable as shown. Do not use force or attempt
to insert the connectors at an angle.
Q
240
D
USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the
cable via a USB hub or keyboard.
4
Turn the camera on.
5
Transfer photographs.
Power switch
Nikon Transfer will start automatically;
click the Start Transfer button to
transfer photographs (for more
Start Transfer button
information on using Nikon Transfer,
select Nikon Transfer help from the Nikon Transfer Help
menu).
6
Turn the camera off.
Turn the camera off and disconnect the USB cable when
transfer is complete.
Q
D During Transfer
Do not turn the camera off or disconnect the USB cable while transfer is in
progress.
241
Wireless and Ethernet Networks
If the optional WT-4 wireless transmitter (pg. 385) is attached,
photographs can be transferred or printed over wireless or
Ethernet networks and the camera can also be controlled from
network computers running Camera Control Pro 2 (available
separately). The WT-4 can be used in any of the following modes:
Mode
Function
Upload new or existing photographs to computer or ftp
Transfer mode
server.
Thumbnail Preview photographs on computer monitor before
select mode upload.
Control camera from computer using Camera Control
PC mode
Pro 2 (available separately).
Print JPEG photographs on printer connected to network
Print mode
computer.
For more information, see the WT-4 user’s manual. Be sure to
update to the latest versions of the WT-4 firmware and supplied
software.
D
Q
Transfer Mode
When Wireless transmitter > Mode > Transfer mode is selected in the
camera setup menu, the J button is used during playback to select
pictures for upload, preventing it from being used to select pictures for
other operations, such as side-by-side comparison (pg. 362). To restore
normal operation, select another option for Wireless transmitter >
Mode.
A
WT-4A/B/C/D/E
The principal difference between the WT-4 and WT-4A/B/C/D/E is in the
number of channels supported; unless otherwise stated, all references to
the WT-4 also apply to the WT-4A/B/C/D/E.
242
Printing Photographs
Photographs can be printed by any of the following methods:
• Connect the camera to a printer and print JPEG photographs
directly from the camera (pg. 244).
• Insert the camera memory card in a printer equipped with a card
slot (see the printer manual for details). If the printer supports
DPOF (pg. 435), photographs can be selected for printing using
Print set (DPOF) (pg. 253).
• Take the camera memory card to a developer or digital printer
center. If the center supports DPOF (pg. 435), photographs can
be selected for printing using Print set (DPOF) (pg. 253).
• Print JPEG photographs on a printer connected to a network
computer using the WT-4 wireless transmitter (available
separately; see the WT-4 user’s manual for details).
• Transfer pictures (pg. 238) and print them from a computer using
ViewNX (supplied; pg. 238) or Capture NX 2 (available separately;
pg. 388). Note that this is the only method available for printing
RAW (NEF) pictures.
Q
A TIFF Photographs
TIFF photographs can be printed from a computer. Some digital print
services may also support TIFF; check with the service before ordering.
243
Direct USB Connection
If the camera is connected to a PictBridge printer via the supplied
USB cable, selected JPEG pictures can be printed directly from the
camera.
Take photographs
Select photographs for printing
using Print set (DPOF) (pg. 253)
Connect camera to printer (pg. 245)
Print photographs
one at a time
(pg. 246)
Print multiple
photographs
(pg. 249)
Create index prints
(pg. 252)
Disconnect USB cable
Q
D
USB Hubs
Connect the camera directly to the computer; do not connect the cable
via a USB hub or keyboard.
A
Printing Via Direct USB Connection
Be sure the battery is fully charged or use an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC
adapter. When taking photographs to be printed via direct USB
connection, set Color space to sRGB (pg. 181).
244
❚❚ Connecting the Printer
Connect the camera using the supplied UC-E4 USB cable.
1
Turn the camera off.
2
Connect the USB cable.
Turn the printer on and connect the USB cable as shown. Do
not use force or attempt to insert the connectors at an angle.
3
Turn the camera on.
A welcome screen will be displayed in the monitor, followed
by a PictBridge playback display.
q
w
Q
245
❚❚ Printing Pictures One at a Time
1
Select a picture.
Press 4 or 2 to view additional
pictures, or press the X button
to zoom in on the current
frame (pg. 234). To view six
pictures at a time, press the W
button. Use the multi selector to highlight pictures, or press X
to display the highlighted picture full frame.
2
Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing
options.
J button
Q
246
3
Adjust printing options.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an option and press 2 to select.
Option
Description
Menu shown at right will be
displayed. Press 1 or 3 to
choose page size (to print at
Page size default page size for current
printer, select Printer default),
then press J to select and return
to previous menu.
Menu shown at right will be
displayed. Press 1 or 3 to
No. of choose number of copies
copies (maximum 99), then press J to
select and return to previous
menu.
Menu shown at right will be
displayed. Press 1 or 3 to
choose print style from Printer
default (default for current
Border
printer), Print with border (print
photo with white border), or No
border, then press J to select
and return to previous menu.
Menu shown at right will be
displayed. Press 1 or 3 to
choose Printer default (default
Time for current printer), Print time
stamp stamp (print time and date of
recording on photo), or No time
stamp, then press J to select
and return to previous menu.
Q
247
Option
Cropping
4
Description
Menu shown at right will be
displayed. To exit without
cropping picture, highlight No
cropping and press J. To crop
picture, highlight Crop and press
2.
If Crop is selected, dialog shown
at right will be displayed. Press X
to increase size of crop, W to
decrease. Choose position of
crop using multi selector and
press J.
Start printing.
Select Start printing and
press J to start printing. To
cancel before all copies have
been printed, press J.
Q
D
Selecting Photographs for Printing
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB)
(pg. 64) can not be selected for printing.
A
See Also
See page 415 for information on what to do if an error occurs during
printing.
248
Printing Multiple Pictures
1
Display the PictBridge menu.
Press the G button in the PictBridge
playback display (see Step 3 on page
245).
G button
2
Choose Print select or Print
(DPOF).
Highlight one of the following
options and press 2.
• Print select: Select pictures
for printing.
• Print (DPOF): Print an existing print order created with the
Print set (DPOF) option in the playback menu (pg. 253). The
current print order will be displayed in Step 3.
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory
card, select Index print. See page 252 for more information.
Q
249
3
Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to scroll
through the pictures on the
memory card. To display the
current picture full screen,
L button
press X button. To select the
current picture for printing,
press the L button and press
1. The picture will be marked
with a Z icon and the number
of prints will be set to 1.
Keeping the L button
pressed, press 1 or 3 to specify the number of prints (up to
99; to deselect the picture, press 3 when the number of prints
is 1). Continue until all the desired pictures have been
selected.
4
Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing
options.
J button
Q
250
5
Adjust printing options.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an
option and press 2 to select.
Option
Description
Menu of page size options will be displayed (pg. 247).
Press 1 or 3 to choose page size (to print at default
Page size
page size for current printer, select Printer default), then
press J to select and return to previous menu.
Menu of border options will be displayed (pg. 247). Press
1 or 3 to choose print style from Printer default
Border (default for current printer), Print with border (print
photo with white border), or No border, then press J to
select and return to previous menu.
Menu of time stamp options will be displayed (pg. 247).
Press 1 or 3 to choose Printer default (default for
Time
current printer), Print time stamp (print time and date
stamp
of recording on photo), or No time stamp, then press J
to select and return to previous menu.
6
Start printing.
Select Start printing and press J to start printing.
To cancel before all copies have been printed, press
J.
Q
A
Page Size, Border, Time Stamp, and Cropping
Choose printer default to print at current printer settings. Only options
supported by the current printer can be selected. Note that print quality may
drop if small crops are printed at large sizes.
A See Also
See page 415 for information on what to do if an error occurs during
printing.
251
❚❚ Creating Index Prints
To create an index print of all JPEG pictures on the memory card,
select Index print in Step 2 of “Printing Multiple Pictures” (pg.
249). Note that if the memory card contains more than 256
pictures, only the first 256 images will be printed.
1
Select Index print.
Highlight Index print in the
PictBridge menu (pg. 249) and
press 2.
The confirmation dialog shown at right
will be displayed.
2
Display printing options.
Press J to display PictBridge printing options.
3
Adjust printing options.
Choose page size, border, and time
stamp options as described on page 251
(a warning will be displayed if the
selected page size is too small).
Q
4
Start printing.
Highlight Start printing and press J to
start printing. To cancel before printing
is complete, press J.
252
❚❚ Creating a DPOF Print Order: Print Set
The Print set (DPOF) option in the playback menu is used to
create digital “print orders” for PictBridge-compatible printers and
devices that support DPOF. Selecting Print set (DPOF) from the
playback menu displays the menu shown in Step 1.
1
Choose Select/set.
Highlight Select/set and press
2.
2
Select pictures.
Use the multi selector to
scroll through the pictures on
the memory card. To display
the current picture in full
L button
screen, press X button. To
select the current picture for
printing, press the L button
and press 1. The picture will
be marked with a Z icon and
the number of prints will be
set to 1. Keeping the L
button pressed, press 1 or 3
to specify the number of prints (up to 99; to deselect the
picture, press 3 when the number of prints is 1). Press J
when all the desired pictures have been selected (to exit to the
playback menu without changing the print order, press G).
Q
253
3
Select imprint options.
Highlight the following options and
press 2 to toggle the highlighted
option on or off (to complete the print
order without including this
information, proceed to Step 4).
• Data imprint: Print shutter speed and aperture on all
pictures in print order.
• Imprint date: Print date of recording on all pictures in print
order.
4
Complete the print order.
Highlight Done and press J
to complete the print order.
D
Q
Print Set
To print the current print order when the camera is connected to a
PictBridge printer, select Print (DPOF) in the PictBridge menu and follow
the steps in “Printing Multiple Pictures” to modify and print the current
order (pg. 249). DPOF date and data imprint options are not supported
when printing via direct USB connection; to print the date of recording on
photographs in the current print order, use the PictBridge Time stamp
option.
The Print Set option can not be used if there is not enough space on the
memory card to store the print order.
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (RAW; pg. 64) can not be
selected for printing using this option.
Print orders may not print correctly if images are deleted using a
computer or other device after the print order is created.
254
Viewing Photographs on TV
The supplied EG-D100 video cable can be used to connect the
camera to a television or VCR for playback or recording. A type C
mini-pin High-Definition Multimedia Interface (HDMI) cable
(available separately from commercial sources) can be used to
connect the camera to high-definition video devices.
Standard Definition Devices
To connect the camera to a standard television:
1
Turn the camera off.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or
disconnecting the video cable.
2
Connect the supplied video cable as shown.
Connect to
camera
Connect to
video device
3
Tune the television to the video channel.
4
Turn the camera on and press K button.
Q
During playback, images will be displayed both on the
television screen or recorded to video tape and the camera
monitor.
255
A
Video Mode (pg. 333)
Be sure that the video standard matches the standard used in the video
device. Note that resolution will drop when images are output on a PAL
device.
A
Television Playback
Use of an EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter (available separately) is recommended
for extended playback. When the EH-5a or EH-5 is connected, the camera
monitor-off delay will be fixed at ten minutes and the exposure meters
will no longer turn off automatically. Note that the edges may not be
visible when photographs are viewed on a television screen.
A
Slide Shows
The Slide show option in the playback menu can be used for automated
playback (pg. 266).
Q
256
High-Definition Devices
The camera can be connected to HDMI devices using a type C
mini-pin HDMI cable (available separately from commercial
sources).
1
Turn the camera off.
Always turn the camera off before connecting or
disconnecting an HDMI cable.
2
Connect the HDMI cable as shown.
Connect to
camera
Connect to highdefinition device
3
Tune the device to the HDMI channel.
4
Turn the camera on and press K button.
During playback, images will be displayed on the highdefinition television or monitor screen; the camera monitor
will remain off.
Q
A HDMI (pg. 333)
At the default setting of Auto, the camera automatically selects the
appropriate HDMI format for the high-definition device. The HDMI format
can be chosen using the HDMI option in the setup menu (pg. 333).
257
Q
258
UMenu Guide
This chapter describes the options available in the camera menus.
D The Playback Menu: Managing Images ............... pg. 260
C The Shooting Menu: Shooting Options................. pg. 268
A Custom Settings: Fine-Tuning
Camera Settings........................................................ pg. 280
B The Setup Menu: Camera Setup............................... pg. 331
N The Retouch Menu: Creating
Retouched Copies..................................................... pg. 349
O My Menu: Creating a Custom Menu....................... pg. 364
U
259
D The Playback Menu:
Managing Images
The playback menu contains the options listed below. To display
the playback menu, press G and press 4 to highlight the tab for
current menu, then press 1 or 3 to highlight the playback menu
tab; for more information, see page 26.
Option
Delete
Playback folder
Hide image
Display mode
Image review
After delete
Rotate tall
Slide show
Print set (DPOF)
See page
262
263
263
264
265
265
265
266
253
Selecting Multiple Pictures
Follow the steps below to select multiple pictures for Delete (pg.
262), Hide image (pg. 263), or Print set (DPOF) (pg. 267). Multiple
pictures can also be selected for direct printing (pg. 249).
1
U
260
Display the menu.
Press the G button, select the playback menu tab, and
select the desired item in the playback menu.
2
Display thumbnails.
To select pictures from a list of
thumbnails, choose the
“Selected”, “Select/set”, or “Print
(DPOF)” option.
3
Highlight a picture.
To view the highlighted picture full
screen, press and hold the X button.
4
Press the center of the
multi selector to select the
highlighted picture.
Selected pictures are marked
by an icon. When selecting
pictures for printing, press the
L button and press 1 or 3
to choose the number of
copies.
5
U
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures.
To deselect a picture, highlight it and press center of multi
selector.
261
6
Press J to complete the
operation.
J button
A confirmation dialog will be displayed;
highlight Yes and press J.
Delete
Select this option to delete pictures. Protected and hidden images
will not be deleted.
Option
Q Selected
R All
U
262
Description
Delete selected pictures.
Delete all pictures in the folder currently selected for
playback (pg. 263).
Playback Folder
Choose a folder for playback.
Option
ND700
(default)
All
Current
Description
Pictures in all folders created with the D700 will be
visible during playback.
Pictures in all folders will be visible during playback.
Only pictures in the current folder will be visible
during playback.
Hide Image
Hide or reveal selected pictures. Hidden pictures are visible only in
the Hide image menu and can only be deleted by formatting the
memory card.
Option
Select/set
Deselect all?
Description
Hide or reveal selected pictures.
Reveal all pictures.
D Protected and Hidden Images
Revealing a protected image will also remove protection from the image.
U
263
Display Mode
Choose the information available in the
playback photo information display
(pg. 220). Press 1 or 3 to highlight an
option, then press 2 to select the option for
the photo information display. A L appears
next to selected items; to deselect, highlight
and press 2. To return to the playback
menu, highlight Done and press 2.
Option
Description
Basic photo info
Active focus point (or, in single-servo AF, focus point
where focus first locked) is shown in red in photo
information display. No focus point is displayed if
Focus point
camera was unable to focus using continuous-servo
autofocus or if continuous-servo autofocus was used
with auto-area AF.
Detailed photo info
Highlights for master RGB channel and for individual
Highlights red, green, and blue channels are shown in photo
information display. Very bright areas blink on and off.
RGB
Red, green, and blue histograms are displayed in photo
histogram information display.
Shooting data pages (including camera name,
Data
metering, exposure, focal length, white balance, and
image options) appear in photo information display.
U
264
Image Review
Choose whether pictures are automatically displayed in the
monitor immediately after shooting.
Option
Description
Pictures are automatically displayed in the monitor after
On
shooting.
Off (default) Pictures can only be displayed by pressing K button.
After Delete
Choose the picture displayed after an image is deleted.
Option
Show next
S
(default)
Show
T
previous
Description
Display following picture. If deleted picture was last
frame, previous picture will be displayed.
Display previous picture. If deleted picture was first
frame, following picture will be displayed.
If user was scrolling through pictures in order
recorded, following picture will be displayed as
Continue as
U
described for Show next. If user was scrolling
before
through pictures in reverse order, previous picture
will be displayed as described for Show previous.
Rotate Tall
Choose whether to rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures for
display during playback. Note that because the camera itself is
already in the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are
not rotated automatically during image review (pg. 219).
Option
On
Off
(default)
Description
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are automatically
rotated for display in the camera monitor. Pictures taken
with Off selected for Auto image rotation (pg. 336) will
be displayed in “wide” (landscape) orientation.
“Tall” (portrait-orientation) pictures are displayed in
“wide” (landscape) orientation.
U
265
Slide Show
Create a slide show of the pictures in the current playback folder
(pg. 263). Hidden images (pg. 263) are not displayed.
Option
Description
Start
Start slide show.
Frame interval Choose how long each picture will be displayed.
To start the slide show, highlight Start and press J. The following
operations can be performed while the slide show is in progress:
To
Press
Description
Skip back/skip
Press 4 to return to previous frame, 2 to skip
ahead
to next frame.
View additional
Change photo info displayed (pg. 220).
photo info
Pause slide show J Pause slide show (see below).
Exit to playback
G End slide show and return to playback menu.
menu
Exit to playback
End slide show and exit to full-frame (pg. 218)
K
mode
or thumbnail playback (pg. 232).
Exit to shooting
Press shutter-release button halfway to return
mode
to shooting mode.
A dialog shown at right is displayed when
the show ends or when the J button is
pressed to pause playback. Select Restart to
restart (if the slide was paused, the show will
resume from the next slide) or Exit to return
to the playback menu.
U
266
Print Set (DPOF)
Choose Select/set to select pictures for printing on a DPOFcompatible device (pg. 253). Choose Deselect all? to remove all
pictures from the current print order.
U
267
C The Shooting Menu:
Shooting Options
The shooting menu contains the options listed below. To display
the shooting menu, press G and press 4 to highlight the tab for
current menu, then press 1 or 3 to highlight the shooting menu
tab; for more information, see page 26.
U
268
Option
Shooting menu bank
Reset shooting menu
Active folder
File naming
Image quality
Image size
Image area
JPEG compression
NEF (RAW) recording
White balance
Set Picture Control
Manage Picture Control
Color space
Active D-Lighting
Vignette control
Long exp. NR
High ISO NR
ISO sensitivity settings
Live view
Multiple exposure
Interval timer shooting
See page
269
271
272
274
64
69
58
67
67
140
160
168
181
180
276
277
278
106
90
198
203
Shooting Menu Bank
Shooting menu options are stored in one of four banks. With the
exceptions of Multiple exposure, Interval timer shooting, and
modifications to Picture Controls (quick adjust and other manual
adjustments), changes to settings in one bank have no effect on
the others. To store a particular combination of frequently-used
settings, select one of the four banks and set the camera to these
settings. The new settings will be stored in the bank even when
the camera is turned off, and will be restored the next time the
bank is selected. Different combinations of settings can be stored
in the other banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one
combination to another by selecting the appropriate bank from
the bank menu.
The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A, B, C,
and D. A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename
option as described below.
A Shooting Menu Bank
The current shooting menu bank is shown in the
shooting information display, which can be
viewed by pressing the R button. The shooting
menu bank can also be selected from the
shooting information display (pg. 15).
❚❚ Renaming Shooting Menu Banks
Selecting Rename in the Shooting menu bank menu displays the
list of shooting menu banks shown in Step 1.
1
Select a bank.
U
Highlight the desired bank and
press 2.
269
2
Enter a name.
Keyboard area
To move the cursor in the name
area, press the W button and
press 4 or 2. To enter a new
letter at the current cursor
position, use the multi selector
Name area
to highlight the desired
character in the keyboard area
and press the center of the multi selector. To delete the
character at the current cursor position, press the O button. To
return to the shooting menu without changing the bank
name, press the G button.
Bank names can be up to twenty characters long. Any
characters after the twentieth will be deleted.
3
Save changes and exit.
After editing the name, press J to save
changes and exit.
J button
The Shooting menu bank menu will
be displayed.
U
270
Reset Shooting Menu
Choose whether to restore default settings for the current
shooting menu bank. See page 419 for a list of default settings.
With the exceptions of image quality, image size, white balance,
and ISO sensitivity, shooting menu settings are not reset when a
two-button reset (pg. 196) is performed.
Option
Description
Yes
Restore defaults for the current shooting menu bank.
No (default) Exit without changing shooting menu settings.
U
271
Active Folder
Select the folder in which subsequent images will be stored.
❚❚ New Folder Number
1
Select New folder number.
Highlight New folder number
and press 2.
2
Choose a folder number.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight a digit, press 1 or 3 to change. If a
folder with the selected number already exists, a W, X, or Y
icon will be displayed to the left of the folder number:
• W : Folder is empty.
• X : Folder is partially full.
• Y : Folder contains 999 pictures or a picture numbered
9999. No further pictures can be stored in this folder; folder
will not be selected when J button is pressed.
3
U
272
Save changes and exit.
Press J to complete the operation and return to the shooting
menu (to exit without changing the active folder, press the
G button). If a folder with the specified number does not
already exist, a new folder will be created. Subsequent
photographs will be stored in the selected folder unless it is
already full.
❚❚ Select Folder
1
Choose Select folder.
Highlight Select folder and
press 2.
2
Highlight a folder.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight a folder.
3
Select the highlighted folder.
Press J to select the highlighted folder and return to the
shooting menu (to exit without changing the active folder,
press the G button). Subsequent photographs will be
stored in the selected folder.
D Folder and File Numbers
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains 999 pictures or a
picture numbered 9999, the shutter-release will be disabled and no
further photographs can be taken. To continue shooting, create a folder
with a number less than 999, or select an existing folder with a number
less than 999 and less than 999 images.
A Number of Folders
Additional time may be required for camera startup if the memory card
contains a very large number of folders.
U
273
File Naming
Photographs are saved using file names consisting of “DSC_” or, in
the case of images that use the Adobe RGB color space, “_DSC”,
followed by a four-digit number and a three-letter extension (e.g.,
“DSC_0001.JPG”). The File naming option is used to select three
letters to replace the “DSC” portion of the file name. For
information on editing file names, see steps 2 and 3 of “Renaming
Shooting Menu Banks” (pg. 270). Note that the portion of the
name that can be edited is a maximum of three characters long.
A
Extensions
The following extensions are used: “.NEF” for NEF (RAW) images, “.TIF” for
TIFF (RGB) images, “.JPG” for JPEG images, and “.NDF” for dust off reference
data.
Image Quality
Choose image quality (pg. 64).
Image Size
Choose the size at which pictures are recorded (pg. 69).
Image Area
Although the D700 can record photographs with the same
diagonal picture angle as a 35mm format camera using a 3 : 2
aspect ratio, it can also be used to record photographs with the
smaller DX picture angle (pg. 58).
U
274
JPEG Compression
Choose whether to compress JPEG images to a fixed size or to vary
file size for improved image quality (pg. 67).
NEF (RAW) Recording
Choose compression and bit-depth options for NEF (RAW) images
(pg. 67).
White Balance
Adjust white balance settings (pg. 140).
Set Picture Control
Select from the Picture Controls provided with the camera to
instantly adjust image processing settings (pg. 160).
Manage Picture Control
Save and modify custom Picture Control combinations, or copy
custom Picture Controls to or from the memory card (pg. 168).
Color Space
Choose from sRGB and Adobe RGB color spaces (pg. 181).
U
275
Active D-Lighting
This option can be used to prevent loss of detail in highlights and
shadows (pg. 179). Choose from Auto, High, Normal, Low, and
Off (the default setting).
Vignette Control
“Vignetting” is a drop in brightness at the edges of a photograph.
Its effects vary from lens to lens and are most noticeable at
maximum aperture. Vignette control reduces vignetting for type
G and D lenses (DX and PC lenses excluded). Choose from High,
Normal (the default setting), Low, and Off.
A
Vignette Control
Depending on the scene, shooting conditions, and type of lens, TIFF and
JPEG images may exhibit unevenness or variations in peripheral
brightness, while custom Picture Controls and Nikon Picture Controls that
have been modified from default settings may not produce the desired
effect. Take test shots and view the results in the monitor. Vignette
control does not apply to multiple exposures (pg. 198), DX-format images
(pg. 58), or images created with Image overlay (pg. 361). The effects of
vignette control can not be previewed in live view (pg. 89).
U
276
Long Exp. NR (Long Exposure Noise Reduction)
Choose whether to reduce noise in pictures taken at slow shutter
speeds.
Option
Description
Photographs taken at shutter
speeds slower than 1 s are
processed to reduce noise. While
photographs are being
processed, the capacity of the
memory buffer will drop.
“l m” will blink in the shutter
speed/aperture displays for a
On
period of time approximately
equal to the current shutter speed. In continuous release
mode, frame rates will slow and while photographs are
being processed, the capacity of the memory buffer will
drop. Photographs can not be taken until processing is
complete and “l m” has cleared from the displays.
Noise reduction will not be performed if the camera is
turned off before processing is complete.
Off (default) Long exposure noise reduction off.
A The Shooting Information Display
Long exposure noise reduction can be adjusted from the shooting
information display (pg. 15).
U
277
High ISO NR
Photographs taken at high ISO sensitivities can be processed to
reduce “noise.”
Option
Description
S High
Noise reduction is performed at ISO sensitivities of ISO
Normal 2000 and higher. While photographs are being
T
(default) processed, the capacity of the memory buffer will drop.
Choose the amount of noise reduction performed from
U Low
High, Normal, and Low.
Noise reduction is only performed at sensitivities of Hi 0.3
and higher. The amount of noise reduction is less than
Off
the amount performed when Low is selected for High
ISO NR.
A
The Shooting Information Display
High ISO noise reduction can be adjusted from the shooting information
display (pg. 15).
ISO Sensitivity Settings
Adjust ISO sensitivity and ISO sensitivity auto control settings
(pp. 106, 108).
Live View
Choose a live view mode and the release mode that will be used
when the camera is in live view mode (pg. 90).
Multiple Exposure
Create a single photograph from two to ten exposures (pg. 198).
U
278
Interval Timer Shooting
Take photographs automatically at pre-selected intervals. Use for
time-lapse movies of such subjects as flowers opening or
butterflies emerging from cocoons (pg. 203).
U
279
A Custom Settings:
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings
Custom Settings are used to customize
camera settings to suit individual
preferences. To display the Custom
Settings, press G and press 4 to
highlight the tab for current menu, then
press 1 or 3 to highlight the Custom
Settings tab; for more information, see
page 26.
Main menu
U
280
B: Custom
setting bank
(pg. 282)
A: Reset custom
settings (pg. 282)
Custom Setting
groups
The following Custom Settings are available:
Custom Setting
B Custom setting bank
A Reset custom settings
a Autofocus
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
a8
a9
a10
AF-C priority selection
AF-S priority selection
Dynamic AF area
Focus tracking with lock-on
AF activation
AF point illumination
Focus point wrap-around
AF point selection
Built-in AF-assist illuminator
AF-ON for MB-D10
Page
282
282
283
284
285
287
287
288
288
289
290
291
b Metering/exposure
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
ISO sensitivity step value
EV steps for exposure cntrl.
Exp comp/fine tune
Easy exposure compensation
Center-weighted area
Fine tune optimal exposure
292
292
292
293
294
294
c Timers/AE lock
c1
c2
c3
c4
Shutter-release button AE-L
Auto meter-off delay
Self-timer delay
Monitor off delay
296
296
297
297
Beep
Viewfinder grid display
Screen tips
CL mode shooting speed
298
298
298
299
d Shooting/display
d1
d2
d3
d4
Custom Setting
d Shooting/display
d5
d6
d7
d8
d9
d10
d11
Max. continuous release
File number sequence
Shooting info display
LCD illumination
Exposure delay mode
MB-D10 battery type
Battery order
Page
299
300
301
302
302
302
304
e Bracketing/flash
e1
e2
e3
e4
e5
e6
e7
Flash sync speed
Flash shutter speed
Flash cntrl for built-in flash
Modeling flash
Auto bracketing set
Auto bracketing (Mode M)
Bracketing order
305
308
309
315
315
316
317
f Controls
f1
f2
f3
f4
f5
f6
f7
f8
f9
f10
f11
f12
D switch
Multi selector center button
Multi selector
Photo info/playback
Assign FUNC. button
Assign preview button
Assign AE-L/AF-L button
Shutter spd & aperture lock
Customize command dials
Release button to use dial
No memory card?
Reverse indicators
318
318
319
320
320
324
325
326
326
328
329
330
U
281
C: Custom Setting Bank
Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks. Changes to
settings in one bank have no effect on the others. To store a
particular combination of frequently-used settings, select one of
the four banks and set the camera to these settings. The new
settings will be stored in the bank even when the camera is turned
off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected.
Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other
banks, allowing the user to switch instantly from one combination
to another by selecting the appropriate bank from the bank menu.
The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A, B, C,
and D. A descriptive caption can be added using the Rename
option as described on page 270.
A
Custom Settings Bank
The bank letter is shown in the shooting
information display, which can be viewed by
pressing the R button; the Custom Settings
bank can also be selected from the shooting
information display (pg. 15). If settings in the
current bank have been modified from default
values, an asterisk will be displayed adjacent to
the altered settings in the second level of the Custom Settings menu.
Reset Custom Settings
Choose whether to restore default settings for the current Custom
Settings bank. See page 420 for a list of default settings. Custom
Settings are not reset when a two-button reset is performed.
U
282
Option
Description
Yes
Restore defaults for the current Custom Settings bank.
No (default) Exit without changing Custom Settings.
a: Autofocus
a1: AF-C Priority Selection
This option controls whether
Focus mode selector
photographs can be taken
whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed (release priority)
or only when the camera is in focus
(focus priority) in continuous-servo
AF. To select continuous-servo AF,
rotate the focus mode selector to C.
Option
Release
G
(default)
Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed.
Photos can be taken even when the camera is not in
Release +
E
focus. In continuous mode, frame rate slows for
focus
improved focus if the subject is dark or low contrast.
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator
F Focus
(I) is displayed.
Regardless of the option selected, focus will not lock when the infocus indicator (I) is displayed.
U
283
a2: AF-S Priority Selection
This option controls whether
photographs can be taken only
when the camera is in focus (focus
priority) or whenever the shutterrelease button is pressed (release
priority) in single-servo AF. To
select single-servo AF, rotate the
focus mode selector to S.
Option
G Release
F
Focus
(default)
Focus mode selector
Description
Photos can be taken whenever the shutter-release
button is pressed.
Photos can only be taken when the in-focus indicator
(I) is displayed.
Regardless of the option selected, focus will lock while the in-focus
indicator (I) is displayed.
U
284
a3: Dynamic AF Area
If the subject leaves the selected focus point when dynamic-area
AF (I; pg. 74) is selected in continuous-servo AF (focus mode C;
pg. 72), the camera will focus based on information from
surrounding focus points. Choose the number of focus points
from 9, 21, and 51 based on subject movement.
Only active focus point is displayed in the viewfinder. Remaining
focus points provide information to assist focus operation.
Option
c
9 points
(default)
d 21 points
e 51 points
Description
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the
camera will focus based on information from the
surrounding eight focus points. Choose when
there is time to compose the photograph or when
photographing subjects that are moving
predictably (e.g., runners or race cars on a track).
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the
camera will focus based on information from the
surrounding 20 focus points. Choose when
photographing subjects that are moving
unpredictably (e.g., players at a football game).
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the
camera will focus based on information from the
surrounding 50 focus points. Choose when
photographing subjects that are moving quickly
and can not be easily framed in the viewfinder
(e.g., birds).
U
285
Option
Description
If the subject leaves the selected focus point, the
camera will use 3D-tracking to track the subject
and select a new focus point as required. Use to
51 points
f
(3D-tracking) quickly compose pictures with subjects that are
moving erratically from side to side (e.g., tennis
players). If the subject leaves the viewfinder,
remove your finger from the shutter-release button
and recompose the photograph with the subject in
the selected focus point.
A
3D-tracking
When the shutter-release button is pressed halfway, the colors in the area
surrounding the focus point are stored in the camera. Consequently 3Dtracking may not produce the desired results with subjects that are the
same color as the background or that occupy a very small area of the
frame.
U
286
a4: Focus Tracking with Lock-On
This option controls how autofocus adjusts to sudden large
changes in the distance to the subject.
Option
Description
C Long
When the distance to the subject changes abruptly, the
Normal camera waits for the specified period (long, normal, or
D
(default) short) before adjusting the distance to the subject. This
prevents the camera from refocusing when the subject is
E Short
briefly obscured by objects passing through the frame.
The camera immediately adjusts focus when the distance
Off
to the subject changes. Use when photographing a series
of subjects at varying distances in quick succession.
a5: AF Activation
This option controls whether both the shutter-release button and
the B button can be used to initiate autofocus, or whether
autofocus is only initiated when the B button is pressed.
Option
Description
Shutter/
Autofocus can be performed with the B button or by
AF-ON
pressing the shutter-release button halfway.
(default)
AF-ON only Autofocus can only be performed using the B button.
U
287
a6: AF Point Illumination
Choose whether the active focus point is highlighted in red in the
viewfinder.
Option
Description
The selected focus point is automatically highlighted as
Auto
needed to establish contrast with the background. DX
(default)
format crop is indicated by frame in viewfinder.
The selected focus point is always highlighted, regardless of
the brightness of the background. DX format crop is
indicated by frame in viewfinder. Depending on the
On
brightness of the background, the selected focus point may
be difficult to see.
The selected focus point is not highlighted. Area outside DX
Off
format crop is indicated by transparent mask in viewfinder.
a7: Focus Point Wrap-Around
Choose whether focus-point selection “wraps around” from one
edge of the viewfinder to another.
Option
U
288
Description
Focus-point selection “wraps around”
from top to bottom, bottom to top,
w
q
right to left, and left to right, so that,
Wrap for example, pressing 2 when a focus
point at the right edge of the
viewfinder display is highlighted (q) selects the
corresponding focus point at the left edge of the display (w).
The focus-area display is bounded by the outermost focus
No wrap
points so that, for example, pressing 2 when a focus point at
(default)
the right edge of the display is selected has no effect.
a8: AF Point Selection
Choose the number of focus points available for manual focuspoint selection.
Option
B
51 points
(default)
Description
Choose from the 51 focus points
shown at right.
Choose from the 11 focus points
shown at right. Use for quick
A 11 points focus-point selection.
U
289
a9: Built-in AF-Assist Illuminator
Choose whether the built-in AF-assist
illuminator lights to assist the focus
operation when lighting is poor.
Option
Description
The AF-assist illuminator lights when lighting is poor. AFassist illumination is only available when both of the
following conditions are met:
On
1. Single-servo autofocus is selected for focus mode (pg. 72).
(default)
2. Auto-area AF is chosen for AF-area mode (pg. 74), or
single-point or dynamic-area AF is chosen and the center
focus point is selected.
The AF-assist illuminator does not light to assist the focus
Off
operation. The camera may not be able to focus using
autofocus when lighting is poor.
A
The AF-Assist Illuminator
The AF-assist illuminator has a range of about 0.5–3.0 m (1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft.
10 in.); when using the illuminator, use a lens with a focal length of 24–
200 mm and remove the lens hood.
A
See Also
See page 375 for restrictions on the lenses that can be used with AF assist.
U
290
a10: AF-On for MB-D10
Choose the function assigned to
the B button on the optional
MB-D10 battery pack.
Option
AF-ON
A
(default)
Description
Pressing the MB-D10 B button initiates
autofocus.
Focus and exposure lock while the MB-D10 B
B AE/AF lock
button is pressed.
Exposure locks while the MB-D10 B button is
C AE lock only
pressed.
Exposure locks when the MB-D10 B button is
AE lock (Reset pressed, and remains locked until the button is
D
on release)
pressed a second time, the shutter is released or
the exposure meters turn off.
Exposure locks when the MB-D10 B button is
pressed, and remains locked until the button is
E AE lock (Hold)
pressed a second time or the exposure meters turn
off.
Focus locks while the MB-D10 B button is
F AF lock only
pressed.
Same as
The MB-D10 B button performs the function
G
FUNC. button selected for Custom Setting f5 (pg. 320).
D
The B Button
Pressing the B button will not activate vibration reduction when a VR
lens is attached.
U
291
b: Metering/Exposure
b1: ISO Sensitivity Step Value
This option determines whether
adjustments to sensitivity are made in
increments equivalent to 1/3 EV, 1/2 EV, or
1 EV.
Option
H 1/3 step (default)
I 1/2 step
J 1 step
b2: EV Steps for Exposure Cntrl.
This option determines whether adjustments to shutter speed,
aperture, and bracketing are made in increments equivalent to
1/3 EV, 1/2 EV, or 1 EV.
Option
Description
Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments
1/3 step
H
equivalent to 1/3 EV. The bracketing increment can be
(default)
selected from 1/3, 2/3, and 1 EV.
Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments
I 1/2 step equivalent to 1/2 EV. The bracketing increment can be
selected from 1/2 and 1 EV.
Changes to shutter speed and aperture are in increments
J 1 step
equivalent to 1 EV. The bracketing increment is set to 1 EV.
b3: Exp Comp/Fine Tune
U
292
This option determines whether
adjustments to exposure and flash
compensation are made in increments
equivalent to 1/3 EV, 1/2 EV, or 1 EV.
Option
H 1/3 step (default)
I 1/2 step
J 1 step
b4: Easy Exposure Compensation
This option controls whether the E button is needed to set
exposure compensation (pg. 128). If On (Auto reset) or On is
selected, the 0 at the center of the exposure display will blink even
when exposure compensation is set to ±0.
Option
Description
Exposure compensation is set by rotating one of the
command dials (see note below). The setting
On
selected using the command dial is reset when the
K
(Auto reset) camera or exposure meters turn off (exposure
compensation settings selected using the E button
are not reset).
As above, except that the exposure compensation
On
value selected using the command dial is not reset
when the camera or exposure meters turn off.
Off
Exposure compensation is set by pressing the E
(default)
button and rotating the main command dial.
A Change Main/Sub
The dial used to set exposure compensation when On (Auto reset) or On
is selected for Custom Setting b4 (Easy exposure compensation)
depends on the option selected for Custom Setting f9 (Customize
command dials) > Change main/sub (pg. 326).
Exposure
mode
e
f
g
h
Customize command dials > Change main/sub
Off (default)
On
Sub-command dial
Sub-command dial
Sub-command dial
Main command dial
Main command dial
Sub-command dial
N/A
U
293
b5: Center-Weighted Area
When calculating exposure, centerweighted metering assigns the greatest
weight to a circle in the center of the frame.
The diameter (φ ) of this circle can be set to
8, 12, 15, or 20 mm or to the average of the
entire frame.
L
y
z
0
P
Option
φ 8 mm
φ 12 mm (default)
φ 15 mm
φ 20 mm
Average
Note that unless Average is selected, the diameter is fixed at
12 mm when a non-CPU lens is used, regardless of the setting
selected for Non-CPU lens data in the setup menu (pg. 210).
When Average is selected, the average of the entire frame will be
used for both CPU and non-CPU lenses.
b6: Fine Tune Optimal Exposure
Use this option to fine-tune the exposure value selected by the
camera. Exposure can be fine tuned separately for each metering
method by from +1 to –1 EV in steps of 1/6 EV.
1
Select Custom Setting b6.
Highlight Custom Setting b6
(Fine tune optimal exposure)
and press 2.
U
294
2
Select Yes.
The message shown at right
will be displayed; highlight Yes
and press 2 to proceed, or
select No to exit without
altering exposure.
3
Select a metering method.
Highlight Matrix metering,
Center-weighted, or Spot
metering and press 2.
4
Choose an exposure value.
Press 1 or 3 to choose an
exposure value from +1 to –1
EV. Press J to save changes
and exit.
D Fine-Tuning Exposure
Exposure can be fine-tuned separately for each Custom Settings bank and
is not affected by two-button resets. Note that as the exposure
compensation (E) icon is not displayed, the only way to determine how
much exposure has been altered is to view the amount in the fine-tuning
menu. Exposure compensation (pg. 128) is preferred in most situations.
U
295
c: Timers/AE Lock
c1: Shutter-Release Button AE-L
At the default setting of Off, exposure only locks when the AE-L/AF-L
button is pressed. If On is selected, exposure will also lock when
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.
c2: Auto Meter-off Delay
This option controls how long the camera
continues to meter exposure when no
operations are performed. Choose from 4 s,
6 s, 8 s, 16 s, 30 s, 1 minute, 5 minutes,
10 minutes, 30 minutes, or until the camera is
turned off (No limit). The shutter-speed and
aperture displays in the control panel and
viewfinder turn off automatically when the
exposure meters turn off.
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
Option
4s
6 s (default)
8s
16 s
30 s
1 min.
5 min.
10 min.
30 min.
No limit
Choose a shorter meter-off delay for longer battery life. When the
camera is powered by an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter, the
auto meter-off delay is equivalent to No limit.
U
296
c3: Self-Timer Delay
This option controls the length of the shutter
release delay in self-timer mode. Choose from
2 s, 5 s, 10 s, and 20 s.
Option
a 2s
b 5s
c 10 s (default)
d 20 s
c4: Monitor off Delay
This option controls how long the monitor
remains on when no operations are performed
during playback, image review, or when
menus or shooting information is displayed.
Choose from 4 s (the default for image review),
10 s (the default for playback and shooting
information), 20 s (the default for menus),
1 minute, 5 minutes, or 10 minutes. Choose a
shorter monitor-off delay for longer battery
life. Regardless of the setting chosen, the
monitor remains on if no operations are
performed for about ten minutes when the
camera is powered by an optional EH-5a or
EH-5 AC adapter.
Option
2 4s
4 10 s (default)
6 20 s
1 1 min.
3 5 min.
5 10 min.
U
297
d: Shooting/Display
d1: Beep
Choose High or Low to sound a beep when the self-timer is used
or the camera focuses in single-servo autofocus (note that a beep
will not sound if Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 (AF-S
priority selection, pg. 284).
Option
High
y
(default)
z Low
Off
Description
Choose the pitch of the beep
from High and Low. A c icon is
displayed in the control panel
and shooting information
displays.
Turn the beep speaker off.
d2: Viewfinder Grid Display
Choose whether on-demand grid lines are displayed in the
viewfinder for reference when composing photographs.
Option
Description
On-demand grid lines displayed except when DX format
On
(24 × 16) is selected for Image area.
Off (default) On-demand grid lines not displayed.
d3: Screen Tips
Choose whether to show on-screen tips for items selected in the
shooting display.
U
298
Option
On (default) Tips displayed.
Off
Tips not displayed.
Description
d4: CL Mode Shooting Speed
This option determines the maximum frame advance rate in CL
(continuous low speed) mode (during interval timer photography,
this setting also determines the frame advance rate for singleframe mode). Choose from values between one and seven frames
per second (fps); the default setting is 3 fps. Note that the frame
advance rate may drop below the selected value at slow shutter
speeds, and that the maximum frame rate without the optional
MB-D10 battery pack is 5 fps.
d5: Max. Continuous Release
The maximum number of shots that can be taken in a single burst
in continuous mode can be set to any value between 1 and 100.
A The Memory Buffer
Regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting d5, shooting will
slow when the memory buffer fills. See page 423 for more information on
the capacity of the memory buffer.
U
299
d6: File Number Sequence
When a photograph is taken, the camera names the file by adding
one to the last file number used. This option controls whether file
numbering continues from the last number used when a new
folder is created, the memory card is formatted, or a new memory
card is inserted in the camera.
Option
J
D
U
300
Description
When a new folder is created, the memory card
formatted, or a new memory card inserted in the
camera, file numbering continues from the last number
used or from the largest file number in the current
On
folder, whichever is higher. If a photograph is taken
(default)
when the current folder contains a photograph
numbered 9999, a new folder will be created
automatically and file numbering will begin again from
0001.
File numbering is reset to 0001 when a new folder is
created, the memory card is formatted, or a new
memory card is inserted in the camera. Note that a
Off
new folder is created automatically if a photograph is
taken when the current folder contains 999
photographs.
Same as for On, except that the next photograph taken
is assigned a file number by adding one to the largest
Reset
file number in the current folder. If the folder is empty,
file numbering is reset to 0001.
File Number Sequence
If the current folder is numbered 999 and contains either 999
photographs or a photograph numbered 9999, the shutter-release button
will be disabled and no further photographs can be taken. Choose Reset
for Custom Setting d6 (File number sequence) and then either format
the current memory card or insert a new memory card.
d7: Shooting Info Display
At the default setting of Auto (AUTO), the color of the lettering in
the information display (pg. 12) will automatically change from
black to white or white to black to maintain contrast with the
background. To always use the same color lettering, select
Manual and choose Dark on light (B; black lettering) or Light on
dark (W; white lettering). Monitor brightness will automatically be
adjusted for maximum contrast with the selected text color.
Dark on light
Light on dark
U
301
d8: LCD Illumination
At the default setting of Off, the control panel backlight (LCD
illuminator) will only light while the power switch is in the D
position. If On is selected, the control panel will be illuminated
while the exposure meters are active (pg. 48). Select Off for
increased battery life.
d9: Exposure Delay Mode
At the default setting of Off, shutter is released when the shutterrelease button is pressed. When shooting with Tripod selected in
live view mode (pg. 96) or in situations where the slightest camera
movement can blur pictures, On can be selected to delay shutter
release until about 1 s after the shutter-release button is pressed
and the mirror is raised.
d10: MB-D10 Battery Type
To ensure that the camera functions as expected when eight AA
batteries are used in the optional MB-D10 battery pack, match the
option selected in this menu to the type of batteries inserted in
the battery pack. There is no need to adjust this option when
using EN-EL3e or optional EN-EL4a or EN-EL4 batteries.
1
2
3
4
U
302
Option
LR6 (AA alkaline)
HR6 (AA Ni-MH)
FR6 (AA lithium)
ZR6 (AA Ni-Mn)
Description
Select when using LR6 alkaline AA batteries.
Select when using HR6 Ni-MH AA batteries.
Select when using FR6 lithium AA batteries.
Select when using ZR6 Ni-Mn AA batteries.
A Using AA Batteries
EN-EL4a or EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion batteries (available separately) or
EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion batteries are recommended for best
performance. Fewer pictures can be taken with AA batteries (pg. 436).
The capacity of AA batteries drops sharply at temperatures below 20 °C
(68 °F) and varies with make and storage conditions; in some cases,
batteries may cease to function before their expiry date. Some AA
batteries can not be used; due to their performance characteristics and
limited capacity, alkaline and nickel-manganese batteries should only be
used if no alternative is available and then only at warmer temperatures.
The camera shows the level of AA batteries as follows:
Control panel
L
I
H
(blinks)
Viewfinder
—
d
d
(blinks)
Description
Batteries fully charged.
Low battery. Ready fresh batteries.
Shutter release disabled. Change batteries.
Battery level for EN-EL3e, EN-EL4a, or EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion batteries
is displayed normally.
U
303
d11: Battery Order
Choose whether the battery in the camera or the batteries in the
battery pack are used first when an optional MB-D10 battery pack
is attached.
Option
Use MB-D10 batteries
5
first (default)
Use camera battery
6
first
Description
The camera battery is used only when the
batteries in the MB-D10 are exhausted.
The batteries in the MB-D10 are used only
when the camera battery is exhausted.
A X icon is displayed in the camera control
panel when the batteries in the MB-D10
are in use.
A
The MB-D10 Battery Pack
The MB-D10 takes one EN-EL3e, EN-EL4a, or
EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion battery or eight AA alkaline, Ni-MH, lithium, or
nickel manganese batteries (an EN-EL3e is supplied with the camera;
EN-EL4a, EN-EL4, and AA batteries are available separately). Higher frame
rates are available with EN-EL4a, EN-EL4, and AA batteries (pg. 87); note,
however, that in the case of AA batteries the frame rate will decrease as
battery level drops.
The shooting information display shows the type
of battery inserted in the MB-D10 as follows:
U
304
MB-D10 battery type display
u
v
w
Battery type
EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery
EN-EL4a or EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion battery
AA batteries
e: Bracketing/Flash
e1: Flash Sync Speed
This option controls flash sync speed.
Option
Description
Use auto FP high-speed sync with SB-900, SB-800,
SB-600, and SB-R200 flash units. If other flash units are
used, shutter speed is set to 1/320 s. When the camera
1/320 s (Auto FP)
shows a shutter speed of 1/320 s in exposure mode e or
g, auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the
actual shutter speed is faster than 1/320 s.
Use auto FP high-speed sync with SB-900, SB-800,
SB-600, and SB-R200 flash units. If other flash units are
used, shutter speed is set to 1/250 s. When the camera
1/250 s (Auto FP)
shows a shutter speed of 1/250 s in exposure mode e or
g, auto FP high-speed sync will be activated if the
actual shutter speed is faster than 1/250 s.
1/250 s (default) Flash sync speed set to 1/250 s.
1/200 s
Flash sync speed set to 1/200 s.
1/160 s
Flash sync speed set to 1/160 s.
1/125 s
Flash sync speed set to 1/125 s.
1/100 s
Flash sync speed set to 1/100 s.
1/80 s
Flash sync speed set to 1/80 s.
1/60 s
Flash sync speed set to 1/60 s.
A Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit
To fix shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or
manual exposure modes, select the next shutter speed after the slowest
possible shutter speed (30 s or bulb). An X (flash sync indicator) will be
displayed in the control panel and viewfinder.
U
A Auto FP High-Speed Sync
Allows the flash to be used at the highest shutter speed supported by the
camera, making it possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced
depth of field. “FP” is displayed in the shooting information display when
auto-FP high-speed sync is active.
305
Flash Control at 1/320 s (Auto FP)
When 1/320 s (Auto FP) is selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash
sync speed, pg. 305), the built-in flash and optional SB-900,
SB-800, SB-600, and SB-R200 flash units can be used at shutter
speeds as fast as 1/320 s; at faster speeds, Auto FP High-Speed Sync
is available with optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-R200
flash units.
Flash sync speed
Shutter speed
1/8,000–1/320 s
1/320–1/250 s
1/250–30 s
1/320 s (Auto FP)
Built-in
Optional
flash
flash unit
—
Auto FP
Flash sync *
1/250 s (Auto FP)
Built-in
Optional
flash
flash unit
—
Auto FP
—
Auto FP
Flash sync
* Flash range drops as shutter speed increases.
U
306
1/250 s
Built-in
Optional
flash
flash unit
—
—
—
—
D The Flash-Ready Indicator
When the flash fires at full power, the flash-indicator in the camera
viewfinder will blink to warn that the resulting photograph may be
underexposed. Note that the flash-ready indicators on optional flash
units will not display this warning when 1/320 s (Auto FP) is selected.
U
307
e2: Flash Shutter Speed
This option determines the slowest shutter speed available when
using front- or rear-curtain sync or red-eye reduction in
programmed auto or aperture-priority auto exposure modes
(regardless of the setting chosen, shutter speeds can be as slow as
30 s in shutter-priority auto and manual exposure modes or at
flash settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, or red-eye
reduction with slow sync). Options range from 1/60 s (1/60 s, the
default setting) to 30 s (30 s).
U
308
e3: Flash Cntrl for Built-in Flash
Choose the flash mode for the built-in flash.
1
2
3
4
Option
TTL
(default)
Manual
Repeating
flash
Commander
mode
Description
Flash output is adjusted automatically in response to
shooting conditions.
Choose the flash level (pg. 310).
The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter is open,
producing a strobe-light effect (pg. 310).
Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling
one or more remote optional flash units (pg. 311).
A “Manual” and “Repeating Flash”
Y icons blink in the control panel and viewfinder when these options are
selected.
A The Shooting Information Display
The flash control mode for the built-in flash can be
viewed in the shooting information display
(pg. 189).
A
The SB-400
When an optional SB-400 flash unit is attached
and turned on, Custom Setting e3 changes to
Optional flash, allowing the flash control mode
for the SB-400 to be selected from TTL and
Manual (Repeating flash and Commander
mode options are not available).
U
309
❚❚ Manual
Choose a flash level between Full and 1/128 (1/128 of full power).
At full power, the built-in flash has a Guide Number of 18/59 (m/ft.,
ISO 200, 20°C/68°F).
❚❚ Repeating Flash
The flash fires repeatedly while the shutter
is open, producing a strobe-light effect.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the following
options, 1 or 3 to change.
Option
Output
Description
Choose flash output (expressed as a fraction of full power).
Choose the number of times the flash fires at the selected
output. Note that depending on shutter speed and the
Times
option selected for Frequency, the actual number of
flashes may be less than selected.
Frequency Choose how often the flash fires per second.
A
U
310
“Times”
The options available for Times are determined by flash output.
Output
1/4
1/8
1/16
1/32
1/64
1/128
Options available for Times
2
2–5
2–10
2–10, 15
2–10, 15, 20, 25
2–10, 15, 20, 25, 30, 35
❚❚ Commander Mode
Use the built-in flash as a master flash controlling one or more
remote optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 flash units in
up to two groups (A and B) using advanced wireless lighting.
Selecting this option displays the menu
shown at right. Press 4 or 2 to highlight the
following options, 1 or 3 to change.
Option
Description
Built-in
Choose a flash mode for the built-in flash (commander flash).
flash
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between
TTL
+3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1/3 EV.
Choose the flash level from values between Full and 1/128
M
(1/128 of full power).
The built-in flash does not fire, but the AF-assist illuminator
– – lights. The built-in flash must be raised so that it can emit
monitor pre-flashes.
Group A Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group A.
i-TTL mode. Choose flash compensation from values between
TTL
+3.0 and –3.0 EV in increments of 1/3 EV.
Auto aperture (available only with SB-900 and SB-800 flash
AA units). Choose flash compensation from values between +3.0
and –3.0 EV in increments of 1/3 EV.
Choose the flash level from values between Full and 1/128
M
(1/128 of full power).
– – The flash units in this group do not fire.
Choose a flash mode for all flash units in group B. The options
Group B
available are the same as those listed for Group A, above.
Choose from channels 1–4. All flash units in both groups must
Channel
be set to the same channel.
U
311
Follow the steps below to take photographs in commander mode.
1
Adjust settings for the built-in
flash.
Choose the flash control mode and
output level for the built-in flash. Note
that output level can not be adjusted in
– – mode.
2
Adjust settings for group A.
Choose the flash control mode and
output level for the flash units in group
A.
3
Adjust settings for group B.
Choose the flash control mode and
output level for the flash units in group
B.
U
312
4
Select the channel.
5
Press J.
6
Compose the shot.
Compose the shot and arrange the flash units as shown below.
Note that the maximum distance at which the remote flash
units can be placed may vary with shooting conditions.
60 ° or less
10 m/33 ft.
or less
30 ° or less
30 ° or less
Remote flash
7
60 ° or less
5 m/15 ft. or
less
Camera
(built-in flash)
Wireless remote
sensors on flash
units should face
camera.
5 m/15 ft. or
less
Set the remote flash units to the selected channel.
Turn all the remote flash units on and set them to the channel
selected in Step 4. See the Speedlight instruction manuals for
details.
8
Raise the built-in flash.
Press the flash pop-up button to raise the built-in flash. Note
that even if – – is selected for Built-in flash>Mode, the builtin flash must be raised so that monitor preflashes will be
emitted.
9
Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.
After confirming that the camera flash-ready light and the
flash-ready lights for all other flash units are lit, frame the
photograph, focus, and shoot. FV lock (pg. 192) can be used if
desired.
U
313
A
The Flash Sync Mode Display
M does not appear in the control panel flash sync mode display when – – is
selected for Built-in flash > Mode.
A
Flash Compensation
The flash compensation value selected with the Y (M) button and subcommand dial is added to the flash compensation values selected for the
built-in flash, group A, and group B in the Commander mode menu. A
Y icon is displayed in the control panel and viewfinder when a flash
compensation value other than ±0 is selected for Built-in flash > TTL.
The Y icon flashes when the built-in flash is in mode M.
D
Commander Mode
Position the sensor windows on the remote flash units to pick up the
monitor preflashes from the built-in flash (particular care is required when
not using a tripod). Be sure that direct light or strong reflections from the
remote flash units do not enter the camera lens (in TTL mode) or the
photocells on the remote flash units (AA mode), as this may interfere with
exposure. To prevent timing flashes emitted by the built-in flash from
appearing in photographs taken at short range, choose low ISO
sensitivities or small apertures (large f-numbers) or use an optional SG-3IR
infrared panel for the built-in flash. An SG-3IR is required for best results
with rear-curtain sync, which produces brighter timing flashes. After
positioning the remote flash units, take a test shot and view the results in
the camera monitor.
Although there is no limit on the number of remote flash units that may
be used, the practical maximum is three. With more than this number, the
light emitted by the remote flash units will interfere with performance.
U
314
e4: Modeling Flash
If On (the default setting) is selected when the camera is being
used with the built-in flash or an optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600,
or SB-R200 flash unit, a modeling flash will be emitted when the
camera depth-of-field preview button is pressed (pg. 115). No
modeling flash is emitted if Off is selected.
e5: Auto Bracketing Set
Choose the setting or settings bracketed when auto bracketing
(pg. 130) is in effect. Choose AE & flash (j; the default setting) to
perform both exposure and flash-level bracketing, AE only (k) to
bracket only exposure, Flash only (l) to perform only flash-level
bracketing, or WB bracketing (m) to perform white-balance
bracketing (pg. 135). Note that white balance bracketing is not
available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or
NEF (RAW) + JPEG.
U
315
e6: Auto Bracketing (Mode M)
This option determines which settings are affected when AE &
flash or AE only is selected for Custom Setting e5 in manual
exposure mode.
Option
F
G
H
I
Description
Camera varies shutter speed (Custom Setting e5
Flash/speed
set to AE only) or shutter speed and flash level
(default)
(Custom Setting e5 set to AE & flash).
Camera varies shutter speed and aperture (Custom
Flash/speed/ Setting e5 set to AE only) or shutter speed,
aperture
aperture, and flash level (Custom Setting e5 set to
AE & flash).
Camera varies aperture (Custom Setting e5 set to
Flash/
AE only) or aperture and flash level (Custom
aperture
Setting e5 set to AE & flash).
Camera varies flash level only (Custom Setting e5
Flash only
set to AE & flash).
Flash bracketing is performed only with i-TTL or AA flash control. If
a setting other than Flash only is selected and the flash is not
used, ISO sensitivity will be fixed at the value for the first shot,
regardless of the setting selected for ISO sensitivity auto control
(pg. 108).
U
316
e7: Bracketing Order
At the default setting of MTR>under>over (H), bracketing is
performed in the order described on pages 132 and 136. If
Under>MTR>over (I) is selected, shooting will proceed in
order from the lowest to the highest value.
U
317
f: Controls
f1: D Switch
Choose the function performed by rotating the power switch to
the D position.
D
Option
LCD backlight (D)
(default)
0 Both
Description
Control panel backlight illuminates for 6 s.
Control panel backlight illuminates and
shooting information is displayed in monitor.
f2: Multi Selector Center Button
This option determines what operations can be performed by
pressing the center of the multi selector in shooting and playback
modes.
❚❚ Shooting Mode
Selecting Shooting mode displays the following options:
J
Option
Select center
focus point
(default)
Highlight active
K focus point
Not used
U
318
Description
Pressing the center of the multi selector in
shooting mode selects the center focus point.
Pressing the center of the multi selector in
shooting mode highlights the active focus
point.
Pressing the center of the multi selector has
no effect when the camera is in shooting
mode.
❚❚ Playback Mode
Selecting Playback mode displays the following options:
n
o
p
u
Option
Description
Thumbnail
Press the center of the multi selector to toggle
on/off
between full-frame and thumbnail playback.
(default)
In both full-frame and thumbnail playback, a
View
histogram is displayed while the center of the multi
histograms
selector is pressed.
Press the center of the multi selector to toggle
between full-frame or thumbnail playback and
Zoom on/ playback zoom. Choose the initial zoom setting from
off
Low magnification, Medium magnification, and
High magnification. The zoom display will center on
the active focus point.
Pressing center of multi selector displays list of
Choose
folders. Highlight folder and press J to select folder
folder
for playback. Folders displayed depend on option
selected for Playback folder (pg. 263).
f3: Multi Selector
If Reset meter-off delay is selected, operating the multi selector
when the exposure meters are off (pg. 48) will activate the
exposure meters. If Do nothing (the default option) is selected,
the exposure meters will not be activated when the multi selector
is pressed.
U
319
f4: Photo Info/Playback
At the default setting of Info13/Playback42, pressing 1 or 3
in full-frame playback changes the photo information displayed,
while pressing 4 or 2 displays additional images. To reverse the
role of the multi selector buttons so that pressing 1 or 3 displays
additional images and pressing 4 or 2 changes the photo
information displayed, select Info42/Playback13. This setting
also applies to the multi selector on the optional MB-D10 battery
pack.
f5: Assign FUNC. Button
Choose the role played by the Fn button,
either by itself (FUNC. button press) or
when used in combination with the
command dials (FUNC. button+dials).
A
The Shooting Information Display
The role of the Fn button can also be selected in
the shooting information display (pg. 15).
❚❚ FUNC. Button Press
Selecting FUNC. button press for Custom Setting f5 displays the
following options:
Option
q
r
U
B
C
320
Description
Press
the
Fn
button
to preview depth of field
Preview *
(pg. 115).
Press the Fn button to lock flash value (built-in flash
and SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200
*
FV lock
flash units only, pg. 192). Press again to cancel FV
lock.
Focus and exposure lock while the Fn button is
AE/AF lock
pressed.
AE lock only Exposure locks while the Fn button is pressed.
Option
D
E
F
s
t
L
M
N
f
g
Description
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and
AE lock
remains locked until the button is pressed a second
(Reset on
time, the shutter is released, or the exposure meters
*
release)
turn off.
Exposure locks when the Fn button is pressed, and
AE lock
remains locked until the button is pressed a second
(Hold) *
time or the exposure meters turn off.
AF lock only Focus locks while the Fn button is pressed.
The flash will not fire in photos taken while the Fn
Flash off
button is pressed.
If the Fn button is pressed while exposure or flash
bracketing is active in single frame release mode,
all shots in the current bracketing program will be
taken each time the shutter-release button is
pressed. If white balance bracketing is active or
Bracketing
continuous release mode (mode CH or CL) is
burst
selected, the camera will repeat the bracketing
burst while the shutter-release button is held down
(in single frame release mode, white balance
bracketing will be repeated at the frame rate for CH
release mode).
Matrix
Matrix metering is activated while the Fn button is
metering
pressed.
CenterCenter-weighted metering is activated while the Fn
weighted
button is pressed.
Spot
Spot metering is activated while the Fn button is
metering
pressed.
Access top Press the Fn button to jump to the top item in “MY
item in My MENU.” Select this option for quick access to a
Menu *
frequently-used menu item.
Press
the Fn button to toggle live view on and off.
Live view *
Not available when the mode dial is set to a or MUP.
U
321
Option
e
m
Description
If image quality is set to JPEG fine, JPEG normal, or
JPEG basic, “RAW” will be displayed in the control
panel and an NEF (RAW) copy will be recorded with
*
+NEF (RAW)
the next picture taken after the Fn button is
pressed. To exit without recording an NEF (RAW)
copy, press the Fn button again.
Virtual
The electronic analog exposure displays act as a tilt
horizon *
meter (pg. 322).
None
No operation is performed when the Fn button is
(default)
pressed.
* This option can not be used in combination with FUNC. button+dials
(pg. 323). Selecting this options displays a message and sets FUNC.
button+dials to None. If another option is selected for FUNC.
button+dials while this setting is active, FUNC. button press will be set to
None.
A
Virtual Horizon
When Virtual horizon is selected for FUNC. button press, the electronic
analog exposure displays in the viewfinder and control panel act as a
horizontal level when the Fn button is pressed.
Camera tilted right
Camera level
Camera tilted left
Control panel
Viewfinder
U
322
Note that the display may not be accurate when the camera is tilted at a
sharp angle forward or back. If the camera is unable to measure the tilt
angle, the display will flash.
❚❚ FUNC. Button+Dials
Selecting FUNC. button+dials for Custom Setting f5 displays the
following options:
Option
i
h
v
w
t
I
Description
Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to
Choose
choose the image area (pg. 58). Not available
image area
while a multiple exposure is being recorded.
Lock shutter speed (modes S and M) or aperture
Shutter spd (modes A and M). Press the Fn button and rotate
& aperture
the main command dial to lock or unlock shutter
speed; press the Fn button and rotate the sublock
command dial to toggle lock or unlock aperture.
If the Fn button is pressed when the command
1 step spd/ dials are rotated, changes to shutter speed
aperture
(exposure modes S and M) and aperture (exposure
modes A and M) are made in increments of 1 EV.
Choose non- Press the Fn button and rotate a command dial to
CPU lens
choose a lens number specified using the Nonnumber
CPU lens data option.
Press the Fn button and rotate the main command
Auto
dial to choose the number of shots in the
bracketing bracketing program. Press the Fn button and
(default)
rotate the sub-command dial to select bracketing
increment.
If continuous-servo AF (focus mode C; pg. 72) is
selected when dynamic-area AF (I) is chosen for
Dynamic AF
AF-area mode (pg. 74), the number of focus points
area
can be selected by pressing the Fn button and
rotating either of the command dials (pg. 285).
No operation is performed when the command
None
dials are rotated while the Fn button is pressed.
U
323
f6: Assign Preview Button
Choose the role played by the depth-of-field
preview button, either by itself (Preview
button press) or when used in combination
with the command dials (Preview +
command dials). The options available are
the same as for FUNC. button press (pg.
320) and FUNC. button+dials (pg. 323),
except that the default option for Preview button press is
Preview and the default setting for Preview + command dials is
None.
A
The Shooting Information Display
The role of the depth-of-field preview button can also be selected in the
shooting information display (pg. 15).
U
324
f7: Assign AE-L/AF-L Button
Choose the role played by the AE-L/AF-L
button, either by itself (AE-L/AF-L button
press) or when used in combination with the
command dials (AE-L/AF-L+command
dials). The options available for AE-L/AF-L
button press are the same as for FUNC.
button press (pg. 320), except that AE-L/AF-L button press
defaults to AE/AF lock and has an additional B option (if this
option is selected, pressing the AE-L/AF-L button has the same effect
as pressing the B button to initiate autofocus). The options
available for AE-L/AF-L+command dials are the same as for
FUNC. button+dials (pg. 323), except that AE-L/AF-L
+command dials defaults to None and lacks 1 step spd/aperture
option.
A The Shooting Information Display
The role of the AE-L/AF-L button can also be selected in the shooting
information display (pg. 15).
U
325
f8: Shutter Speed and Aperture Lock
Use this option to lock shutter speed at the value selected in
shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, or to lock
aperture at the value selected in aperture-priority auto or manual
exposure mode. Lock is not available in programmed auto
exposure mode.
Option
Description
Choose On to lock shutter speed, Off (the default
Shutter speed lock
option) to unlock.
Choose On to lock aperture, Off (the default
Aperture lock
option) to unlock.
f9: Customize Command Dials
This option controls the operation of the main and sub-command
dials.
Option
Reverse
rotation
Change
main/sub
U
326
Description
Controls the direction of the command dials. Choose No (the
default option) for normal command dial operation, or Yes to
reverse the rotation of the command dials. This setting also
applies to the command dials for the MB-D10.
At the default setting of Off, the main command dial controls
shutter speed and the sub-command dial controls aperture.
If On is selected, the main command dial will control aperture
and the sub-command dial shutter speed. This setting also
applies to the command dials for the MB-D10.
Option
Description
At the default setting of Sub-command dial, aperture can
only be adjusted with the sub-command dial (or with the
main command dial if On is selected for Change main/sub).
If Aperture ring is selected, aperture can only be adjusted
with the lens aperture ring and the camera aperture display
Aperture
will show aperture in increments of 1 EV (aperture for type G
setting
lenses is still set using the sub-command dial). Live view is
not available when Aperture ring is selected and a CPU lens
with an aperture ring is attached. Note that regardless of the
setting chosen, the aperture ring must be used to adjust
aperture when a non-CPU lens is attached.
At the default setting of Off, the multi selector is used to
choose the picture displayed during full-frame playback,
highlight thumbnails, and navigate menus. If On is selected,
the main command dial can be used to choose the picture
displayed during full-frame playback, move the cursor left or
right during thumbnail playback, and move the menu
Menus
highlight bar up or down. The sub-command dial is used to
and
display additional photo information in full-frame playback
playback
and to move the cursor up or down during thumbnail
playback. While menus are displayed, rotating the subcommand dial right displays the sub-menu for the selected
option, while rotating it left displays the previous menu. To
make a selection, press 2, the center of the multi selector, or
J.
U
327
f10: Release Button to Use Dial
This option allows adjustments that are normally made by holding
a button and rotating a command dial to be made by rotating the
command dial after the button is released. At the default setting
of No, the button must be pressed while the command dial is
rotated. If Yes is selected, the setting can be changed by rotating
the command dial after the button is released. Setting ends when
the button is pressed again, the shutter-release button is pressed
halfway, or any of the I, E, M, ISO, QUAL, or WB button is pressed
(if Auto bracketing is selected for the corresponding “+dials”
option as described on page 323, setting will also end when the Fn,
depth-of-field preview, or AE-L/AF-L button is pressed). Except
when No limit is selected for Custom Setting c2 Auto meter-off
delay or an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter is used, setting will
also end when the exposure meters turn off.
U
328
f11: No Memory Card?
At the default setting of Enable release, the shutter can be
released when no memory card is inserted, although no pictures
will be recorded (they will however be displayed in the monitor in
demo mode). If Release locked is selected, the shutter-release
button is only enabled when a memory card is inserted in the
camera. Note that when photographs are being captured to a
computer using Camera Control Pro 2 (available separately),
photographs are not recorded to the camera memory card and the
shutter will be enabled regardless of the setting chosen for this
option.
U
329
f12: Reverse Indicators
At the default setting of
(V), the exposure
indicators in the control panel, viewfinder and shooting
information display are displayed with positive values on the left
(W) to
and negative values on the right. Select
display negative values on the left and positive values on the right.
U
330
B The Setup Menu:
Camera Setup
The setup menu contains the options listed below. To display the
setup menu, press G and press 4 to highlight the tab for current
menu, then press 1 or 3 to highlight the setup menu tab; for
more information, see page 26.
Option
Format memory card
LCD brightness
Clean image sensor
Lock mirror up for cleaning 1
Video mode
HDMI
World time
Language
Image comment
Auto image rotation
Dust off ref photo
Battery info
Wireless transmitter
Image authentication
Copyright information
Save/load settings
GPS
Virtual horizon
Non-CPU lens data
AF fine tune
Firmware version
See page
332
332
392
395
333
333
334
334
335
336
337
340
242
342
343
344
215
346
210
347
348
U
1 Not available when battery is low.
331
Format Memory Card
Format the card. Note that formatting permanently deletes all
pictures and other data on the card. Before formatting, be sure to
make backup copies as required.
D
During Formatting
Do not turn the camera off or remove memory cards during formatting.
A
Two-Button Format
Memory cards can also be formatted using the Q (O and I) buttons
(pg. 43).
LCD Brightness
Press 1 or 3 to choose from seven settings
for monitor brightness. Choose higher
values for increased brightness, lower values
for reduced brightness.
Clean Image Sensor
Select this option to remove dust from the image sensor or to
choose options for automatic image sensor cleaning (pg. 392).
Lock Mirror up for Cleaning
Lock the mirror in the up position to allow inspection or manual
cleaning of the low-pass filter that protects the camera image
sensor (pg. 395).
U
332
Video Mode
When connecting the camera to a television or VCR via the video
connector, be sure the camera video mode matches the device
video standard (NTSC or PAL).
HDMI
The camera is equipped with an HDMI (High-Definition
Multimedia Interface) mini-pin connector, allowing pictures to be
played back on high-definition televisions or monitors using a
type C cable (available separately from commercial suppliers).
Before connecting the camera to high-definition device, choose
the HDMI format from the options below.
Option
v Auto (default)
J
K
L
M
480p (progressive)
576p (progressive)
720p (progressive)
1080i (interlaced)
Description
The camera automatically selects the
appropriate format.
640 × 480 (progressive) format
720 × 576 (progressive) format
1,280 × 720 (progressive) format
1,920 × 1,080 (interlaced) format
The camera monitor turns off automatically when an HDMI device
is connected.
U
333
World Time
Change time zones, set the camera clock, choose the date display
order, and turn daylight saving time on or off.
Option
Description
Choose a time zone. The camera clock is automatically
Time zone
set to the time in the new time zone.
Date and time Set the camera clock (pg. 38).
Choose the order in which the day, month, and year are
Date format
displayed.
Turn daylight saving time on or off. The camera clock
Daylight
will automatically be advanced or set back one hour.
saving time
The default setting is Off.
If the clock is not set, a blinking B icon will appear in the control
panel.
Language
Choose a language for camera menus and messages. The
following options are available.
German
English
Spanish
Finnish
French
Italian
Dutch
Polish
U
334
Portuguese
Russian
Swedish
Traditional Chinese
Simplified Chinese
Japanese
Korean
Image Comment
Add a comment to new photographs as they are taken.
Comments can be viewed in ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2
(available separately) (pg. 388). The comment is also visible on the
third page of the photo information display.
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.
• Input comment: Input a comment as described on page 270.
Comments can be up to 36 characters long.
• Attach comment: Select this option to
attach the comment to all subsequent
photographs. Attach comment can be
turned on and off by highlighting it and
pressing 2.
U
335
Auto Image Rotation
Photographs taken while On (the default option) is selected
contain information on camera orientation, allowing them to be
rotated automatically during playback (pg. 265) or when viewed in
ViewNX or Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 388). The
following orientations are recorded:
Landscape (wide)
orientation
Camera rotated 90°
clockwise
Camera rotated 90°
counter-clockwise
Camera orientation is not recorded when Off is selected. Choose
this option when taking photographs with the lens pointing up or
down.
A
Rotate Tall
To automatically rotate “tall” (portrait-orientation) photographs for
display during playback, select On for the Rotate tall option in the
playback menu (pg. 265). Note that because the camera itself is already in
the appropriate orientation during shooting, images are not rotated
automatically during image review (pg. 219).
U
336
Dust off Ref Photo
Acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off option in
Capture NX 2 (available separately; for more information, see the
Capture NX 2 manual).
Dust off ref photo is available only when a CPU lens is mounted
on the camera. A lens with a focal length of at least 50 mm is
recommended. When using a zoom lens, zoom all the way in.
1
Choose a start option.
Highlight one of the following
options and press J. To exit
without acquiring image dust
off data, press G.
• Start: The message shown at right will
be displayed and “rEF” will appear in
the viewfinder and control panel
displays.
• Clean sensor and then start: Select
this option to clean the image sensor
before starting. The message shown at
right will be displayed and “rEF” will
appear in the viewfinder and control
panel displays when cleaning is
complete.
D
Image Sensor Cleaning
Dust off reference data recorded before image sensor cleaning is
performed can not be used with photographs taken after image
sensor cleaning is performed. Select Clean sensor and then start
only if the dust off reference data will not be used with existing
photographs.
U
337
2
Frame a featureless white object in the viewfinder.
With the lens about ten centimeters (four inches) from a welllit, featureless white object, frame the object so that it fills the
viewfinder and then press the shutter-release button halfway.
In autofocus mode, focus will automatically be set to infinity;
in manual focus mode, set focus to infinity manually.
3
Acquire dust off reference data.
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the way down to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data. The monitor turns off
when the shutter-release button is pressed.
If the reference object is too bright or too
dark, the camera may be unable to
acquire Image Dust Off reference data
and the message shown at right will be
displayed. Choose another reference
object and repeat the process from
step 1.
U
338
D Image Dust Off Reference Data
The same reference data can be used for
photographs taken with different lenses or at
different apertures. Reference images can not be
viewed using computer imaging software. A grid
pattern is displayed when reference images are
viewed on the camera; histograms and highlights
are not displayed.
U
339
Battery Info
View information on the battery currently
inserted in the camera.
Item
Bat. meter
Description
The current battery level expressed as a percentage.
The number of times the shutter has been released with the
current battery since the battery was last charged. Note
Pic. meter that the camera may sometimes release the shutter without
recording a photograph, for example when measuring
preset white balance.
This item is displayed only when the camera is powered by
an optional MB-D10 battery pack equipped with an EN-EL4a
or EN-EL4 battery (available separately).
Calibration • j: Due to repeated use and recharging, calibration is
required to ensure that battery level can be measured
accurately; recalibrate battery before charging.
• —: Calibration not required.
A five-level display showing battery age. 0 (k) indicates
that battery performance is unimpaired, 4 (l) that the
battery has reached the end of its charging life and should
be replaced. Note that batteries charged at temperatures
Charging life
under about 5 °C (41 °F) may show a temporary drop in
charging life; the charging life display will however return to
normal once the battery has been recharged at a
temperature of about 20 °C (68 °F) or higher.
U
340
A The MB-D10 Battery Pack
The information displayed when the camera is
powered by an optional MB-D10 battery pack
depends on the type of batteries used:
EN-EL3e
EN-EL4a/EN-EL4 (option)
8 × AA (option)
Bat. meter
✔
✔
✔
Pic. meter
✔
✔
—
Calibration
—
✔
—
Charging life
✔
✔
—
Wireless Transmitter
This option is used to adjust settings for connection to a wireless
network, using an optional WT-4 wireless transmitter. See
“Connections: Wireless and Ethernet Networks” (pg. 242).
U
341
Image Authentication
Choose whether to embed image authentication information in
new photographs as they are taken, allowing alterations to be
detected using Nikon’s optional Image Authentication software.
Image authentication information can not be embedded in
existing photographs. Photographs taken with image
authentication on are marked with a p icon on the file information
and overview pages of the photo information display (pp. 221,
231).
Option
Description
Image authentication information embedded in new
s On
photographs as they are taken.
Off
Image authentication information not embedded in new
(default) photographs.
D
Camera Control Pro 2
Image authentication information is not embedded in TIFF (RGB)
photographs recorded directly to a computer using Camera Control Pro 2
(available separately).
A
Copies
Image authentication information is not embedded in copies created
using the options in the retouch menu (pg. 349).
U
342
Copyright Information
Add a copyright information to new photographs as they are
taken. Copyright information is visible on the fourth page of the
photo information display (pg. 228) and can be viewed using
ViewNX (supplied) or Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 388).
• Done: Save changes and return to the setup menu.
• Artist: Enter a photographer name as described on page 270.
Photographer names can be up to 36 characters long.
• Copyright: Enter the name of the copyright holder as described
on page 270. Copyright holder names can be up to 54 characters
long.
• Attach copyright information: Select this
option to attach copyright information to
all subsequent photographs. Attach
copyright information can be turned on
and off by highlighting it and pressing J.
D Copyright Information
To prevent unauthorized use of the artist or copyright holder names,
make sure that Attach copyright information is not selected and that
the Artist and Copyright fields are blank before lending or transferring
the camera to another person. Nikon does not accept liability for any
damages or disputes arising from the use of the Copyright Information
option.
U
343
Save/Load Settings
Select Save settings to save the following settings to the memory
card (if the card is full, an error will be displayed; see pg. 412).
Menu
Playback
Shooting
(all banks)
Option
Display mode
Image review
After delete
Rotate tall
Shooting menu bank
File naming
Image quality
Image size
Image area
JPEG compression
NEF (RAW) recording
White balance (with fine tuning and presets d-0–d-4)
Set Picture Control
Color space
Active D-Lighting
Vignette control
Long exp. NR
High ISO NR
ISO sensitivity settings
Live view
Custom settings
All Custom Settings except Reset custom settings
(all banks)
U
344
Menu
Option
Clean image sensor
Video mode
HDMI
World time (excepting date and time)
Language
Setup
Image comment
Auto image rotation
Image authentication
Copyright information
GPS
Non-CPU lens data
All My Menu items
My Menu/
All recent settings
Recent Settings
Choose tab
Settings saved using the D700 can be restored by selecting Load
settings. Note that Save/load settings is only available when a
memory card is inserted in the camera, and that the Load settings
option is only available if the card contains saved settings.
A Saved Settings
Settings are saved in a file named NCSETUP4. The camera will not be able
to load settings if the file name is changed. Settings saved using the D700
can not be used in other cameras.
U
345
GPS
Adjust settings for connection to a GPS unit (pg. 213).
Virtual Horizon
Display a virtual horizon based on
information from the camera orientation
sensor. The virtual horizon is displayed in
green when the camera is level.
D
Tilting the Camera
The virtual horizon display is not accurate when
the camera is tilted at a sharp angle forward or back. If the camera is
unable to measure the tilt angle, the virtual horizon display will turn off.
A
See Also
For information on using the electronic analog exposure displays as a tilt
meter, see Custom Setting f5 (Assign FUNC. button > FUNC. button
press; pg. 320).
Non-CPU Lens Data
By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture)
for up to nine non-CPU lenses, the user can gain access to a variety
of CPU lens functions (pg. 210).
U
346
AF Fine Tune
Fine-tune focus for up to 12 lens types. AF tuning is not
recommended in most situations and may interfere with normal
focus; use only when required.
Option
Description
AF fine
tune • On: Turn AF tuning on.
(On/ • Off (default): Turn AF tuning off.
Off)
Tune AF for the current lens (CPU
Move focal
lenses only). Press 1 or 3 to choose point away
Saved a value between +20 and –20.
from camera.
value Values for up to 12 lens types can be
stored. Only one value can be
stored for each type of lens.
Choose the AF tuning value used
when no previously saved value
Default
exists for the current lens (CPU
lenses only).
Move focal
point toward
camera.
Current
value
Previous
value
List previously saved AF tuning values. If a value exists for the
current lens, it will be shown with a V icon. To delete a lens from
the list, highlight the desired lens and press O. To change a lens
identifier (for example, to choose an identifier that is the same as
the last two digits of the lens serial number to distinguish it from
other lenses of the same type in light of the fact that Saved value
List can be used with only one lens of each type), highlight the
saved desired lens and press 2.
values The menu shown at right will be
displayed; press 1 or 3 to choose an
identifier and press J to save changes
and exit.
U
347
D
AF Tuning
The camera may be unable to focus at minimum range or at infinity when
AF tuning is applied.
D
Live View (Tripod) Mode
Tuning is not applied to contrast-detect autofocus when Tripod is
selected in live view mode (pg. 96).
A
Saved Value
Only one value can be stored for each type of lens. If a teleconverter is
used, separate values can be stored for each combination of lens and
teleconverter.
Firmware Version
View the current camera firmware version.
U
348
N The Retouch Menu:
Creating Retouched Copies
The options in the retouch menu are used to create trimmed, or
retouched copies of the photographs on the memory card. The
retouch menu is only displayed when a memory card containing
photographs is inserted in the camera. To display the retouch
menu, press G and press 4 to highlight the tab for current
menu, then press 1 or 3 to highlight the retouch menu tab; for
more information, see page 26.
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
Option
D-lighting *
Red-eye correction *
Trim
Monochrome *
Filter effects *
Color balance *
Image overlay
Side-by-side comparison
See page
354
355
356
357
358
358
359
362
* Not available with photographs taken with Monochrome selected for Set
Picture Control (pg. 162).
U
349
Creating Retouched Copies
Except in the case of Image overlay (pg. 359) and Side-by-side
comparison (pg. 362), the photographs to be retouched can be
selected in full-frame playback as well as from the retouch menu.
❚❚ Creating Retouched Copies in Full-Frame Playback
1
Choose a picture.
Display the desired picture in
full-frame playback (pg. 218).
2
Display the retouch menu.
Press J to display the retouch
menu.
3
Select retouch options.
Highlight the desired item in
the retouch menu and press 2
to display retouch options (for
more information, see the
section for the selected item on
the following pages). To return to full-frame playback without
creating a retouched copy, press K.
U
A
See Also
See page 242 for information on using the J button with the WT-4
wireless transmitter.
350
4
Create a retouched copy.
Press J to create a retouched copy.
Retouched copies are indicated by a N
icon.
❚❚ Creating Retouched Copies from the Retouch Menu
1
Select an item in the
retouch menu.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight an
item, 2 to select. Depending
on the option selected, a menu
may be displayed; highlight an
option and press 2.
2
Select a picture.
The pictures on the memory
card will be displayed. Use the
multi selector to highlight a
picture (to view the
highlighted picture full screen,
press and hold the X button).
U
351
3
Display retouch options.
Press J to display retouch options (see
the section for the selected option for
details). To exit without creating a
retouched copy, press G.
4
Create a retouched copy.
Press J to create a retouched copy.
Retouched copies are indicated by a N
icon.
U
352
D Retouching Copies
Copies created with Trim can not be further modified. D-lighting, red-eye
correction, filter effects, and color balance can not be applied to
monochrome copies. Image overlay can be applied multiple times.
Otherwise the options in the retouch menu can each be applied once to
existing copies, although multiple edits may result in loss of detail.
A Image Quality
Except in the case of copies created with Trim (pg. 356) and Image
overlay, copies created from JPEG images are the same size and quality as
the original, copies created from NEF (RAW) photos are saved as large
fine-quality JPEG images, and copies created from TIFF (RGB) photos are
saved as fine-quality JPEG images of the same size as the original. Sizepriority compression is used when copies are saved in JPEG format.
U
353
D-Lighting
D-lighting brightens shadows, making it ideal for dark or backlit
photographs.
Before
Press 1 or 3 to choose the amount of
correction performed. The effect can be
previewed in the edit display. Press J to
copy the photograph.
U
354
After
Red-Eye Correction
This option is used to correct “red-eye”
caused by the flash, and is available only with
photographs taken using the flash. The
photograph selected for red-eye correction is
previewed as shown at right. Confirm the
effects of red-eye correction and create a
copy as described in the following table. Note that red-eye
correction may not always produce the expected results and may
in very rare circumstances be applied to portions of the image that
are not affected by red-eye; check the preview thoroughly before
proceeding.
To
Use
Zoom in
X
Zoom out
W
View other
areas of image
Cancel zoom
Create copy
J
J
Description
Press X button to
zoom in, W button
to zoom out. While
photo is zoomed in,
use multi selector to
view areas of image
not visible in
monitor. Keep multi selector pressed to
scroll rapidly to other areas of frame.
Navigation window is displayed when
zoom buttons or multi selector is pressed;
area currently visible in monitor is indicated
by yellow border. Press J to cancel zoom.
If the camera detects red-eye in the
selected photograph, a copy will be created
that has been processed to reduce its
effects. No copy will be created if the
camera is unable to detect red-eye.
U
355
Trim
Create a cropped copy of the selected
photograph. The selected photograph is
displayed with the selected crop shown in
yellow; create a cropped copy as described in
the following table.
To
Use
Reduce size of crop
W
Increase size of
crop
X
Rotate the main command dial to
switch between aspect ratios of 3 : 2,
4 : 3, and 5 : 4.
Change crop aspect
ratio
Use multi selector to move the crop to
another area of the image.
Move crop
Press center of multi selector to
preview cropped image.
Preview crop
Create copy
U
356
Description
Press the W button to reduce the size
of the crop.
Press the X button to increase the size
of the crop.
J
Save the current crop as a separate file.
D Trim: Image Quality and Size
Copies created from NEF (RAW), NEF (RAW) + JPEG, or TIFF (RGB) photos
have an image quality (pg. 64) of JPEG fine; cropped copies created from
JPEG photos have the same image quality as the original. The size of the
copy varies with crop size and aspect ratio.
Aspect ratio
3:2
4:3
5:4
Possible sizes
3,424 × 2,280, 2,560 × 1,704, 1,920 × 1,280, 1,280 × 856,
960 × 640, 640 × 424
3,424 × 2,568, 2,560 × 1,920, 1,920 × 1,440, 1,280 × 960,
960 × 720, 640 × 480
3,216 × 2,568, 2,400 × 1,920, 1,808 × 1,440, 1,200 × 960,
896 × 720, 608 × 480
Monochrome
Copy photographs in Black-and-white,
Sepia, or Cyanotype (blue and white
monochrome).
Selecting Sepia or Cyanotype
displays a preview of the selected
image; press 1 to increase color
saturation, 3 to decrease. Press J
to create a monochrome copy.
Increase
saturation
Decrease
saturation
U
357
Filter Effects
Choose from the following color filter effects. After adjusting filter
effects as described below, press J to copy the photograph.
Option
Skylight
Warm filter
Description
Creates the effect of a skylight
filter, making the picture less
blue. The effect can be
previewed in the monitor as
shown at right.
Creates a copy with warm tone filter effects, giving the
copy a “warm” red cast. The effect can be previewed in
the monitor.
Color Balance
Use the multi selector to create a copy with
modified color balance as shown below. The
effect is displayed in the monitor together
with red, green, and blue histograms (pg.
223) giving the distribution of tones in the
copy. Press J to copy the photograph.
Increase amount of green
Increase
amount of
blue
Increase
amount of
amber
Increase amount of magenta
U
358
A
Creating JPEG Copies of NEF (RAW) Pictures
To create a JPEG copy of an NEF (RAW) picture, select the NEF (RAW)
picture for Color balance and press J without modifying color balance.
The JPEG copy will have an image quality of “fine” and a size of L.
Image Overlay
Image overlay combines two existing NEF (RAW) photographs to
create a single picture that is saved separately from the originals;
the results, which make use of RAW data from the camera image
sensor, are noticeably better than overlays created in imaging
applications. The new picture is saved at current image quality
and size settings; before creating an overlay, set image quality and
size (pp. 64, 69; all options are available). To create a NEF (RAW)
copy, choose an image quality of NEF (RAW).
1
Select Image overlay.
Highlight Image overlay in the
retouch menu and press 2.
The dialog shown at right will
be displayed, with Image 1
highlighted.
2
Display NEF (RAW) images.
Press J. A picture selection
dialog will be displayed.
3
Highlight a photograph.
Press 134 or 2 to highlight
the first photograph in the
overlay. To view the
highlighted photograph full
frame, press and hold the X
button. Hidden images are not displayed and can not be
selected.
U
359
4
Select the highlighted
photograph.
Press J to select the
highlighted photograph and
return to the preview display.
The selected image will appear as Image 1.
5
Set gain.
Optimize exposure for the
overlay by pressing 1 or 3 to
select the gain for image 1
from values between 0.1 and
2.0. The default value is 1.0;
selecting 0.5 cuts gain in half, while selecting 2.0 doubles gain.
The effects of gain are visible in the Preview column.
6
Select the second
photograph.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight
Image 2. Repeat Steps 2–5 to
select the second photo and
adjust gain.
7
U
360
Highlight the Preview
column.
Press 4 or 2 to highlight the
Preview column.
8
Preview the overlay.
Press 1 or 3 to highlight
Overlay and press J (to save
the overlay without displaying
a preview, highlight Save and
press J). To return to Step 7
and select new photos or adjust gain, press W.
9
Save the overlay.
Press J while the preview is
displayed to save the overlay.
After an overlay is created, the
resulting image will be displayed
full-frame in the monitor.
+
D Image Overlay
Only NEF (RAW) photographs created with the D700 can be selected for
image overlay. Other images are not displayed in the selection screen.
Only NEF (RAW) photographs with the same bit-depth can be combined.
The overlay has the same photo info (including date of recording,
metering, shutter speed, aperture, exposure mode, exposure
compensation, focal length, and image orientation but excluding image
comments and copyright information) and values for white balance and
picture control as the photograph selected for Image 1. Overlays saved in
NEF (RAW) format use the compression selected for Type in the NEF
(RAW) recording menu and have the same bit depth as the original
images; JPEG overlays are saved using size-priority compression. Vignette
control (pg. 276) does not apply, even if both the original images were
created using vignette control.
U
361
Side-by-Side Comparison
Compare retouched copies to the original photographs.
❚❚ Making a Side-by-Side Comparison
1
Select a picture.
Use the multi selector to select
a picture and press J. Only
retouched copies (shown by a
N icon) or photographs that
have been retouched can be
selected.
2
Select Side-by-side
comparison.
Highlight Side-by-side
comparison and press J.
U
362
3
Compare the copy with the
original.
Options used to
created copy
The source image is displayed
on the left, the retouched copy
on the right, with the options
used to create the copy listed
at the top of the display. Press
Source Retouched
the multi selector in the
image
copy
direction indicated by the
arrow adjacent to the highlighted image (1 3 4 or 2) to
switch between the source image and the retouched copy. To
view the highlighted picture full frame, press and hold the X
button. If the copy was created from two images using Image
overlay, press 1 or 3 to view the other source image. To exit
to playback mode, press the K button. To exit to playback
mode with the highlighted image displayed, press J or the
center of the multi selector.
D Side-by-Side Comparison
The source image will not be displayed if the copy was created from a
photograph that has since been deleted, is currently protected (pg. 235)
or hidden (pg. 263), or contains embedded image authentication
information (pg. 342).
U
363
O My Menu:
Creating a Custom Menu
The My Menu option can be used to create and edit a customized
list of options from the playback, shooting, Custom Settings,
setup, and retouch menus for quick access (up to 20 items). If
desired, recent settings can be displayed in place of My Menu
(pg. 368).
Options can be added, deleted, and reordered as described below.
For information on basic menu operations, see “Tutorial: Camera
Menus” (pg. 26).
Adding Options to My Menu
1
Select Add items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Add
items and press 2.
2
Select a menu.
Highlight the name of the
menu containing the option
you wish to add and press 2.
U
3
Select an item.
Highlight the desired menu
item and press J.
364
4
Position the new item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the new
item up or down in My Menu.
Press J to add the new item.
5
View My Menu.
The items currently displayed in My
Menu are indicated by a check mark.
Items indicated by a V icon can not be
selected. Repeat steps 1–4 to select
additional items.
U
365
Deleting Options from My Menu
1
Select Remove items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Remove items and press 2.
2
Select items.
Highlight items and press 2 to
select or deselect. Selected
items are indicated by a check
mark.
3
Select Done.
Highlight Done and press J. A
confirmation dialog will be
displayed.
4
Delete the selected items.
Press J to delete the selected
items.
A
Deleting Items in My Menu
To delete the item currently highlighted in My Menu, press the O button.
A confirmation dialog will be displayed; press O again to remove the
selected item from My Menu.
U
366
Reordering Options in My Menu
1
Select Rank items.
In My Menu (O), highlight Rank items and press 2.
2
Select an item.
Highlight the item you wish to
move and press J.
3
Position the item.
Press 1 or 3 to move the
item up or down in My Menu
and press J. Repeat Steps 2–3
to reposition additional items.
U
367
Displaying Recent Settings
To display the twenty most recently used settings, select Recent
settings for My Menu > Choose tab.
1
Select Choose tab.
In My Menu (O), highlight
Choose tab and press 2.
2
Select Recent Settings.
Highlight Recent settings and
press J. The name of the menu
will change from “MY MENU” to
“RECENT SETTINGS.”
Menu items will be added to the top of the recent settings menu
as they are used. To view My Menu again, select My Menu for
Recent settings > Choose tab.
U
368
nTechnical Notes
– Camera Care, Options, and Resources
This chapter covers the following topics:
Compatible Lenses......................................................... pg. 370
Optional Flash Units (Speedlights) ............................. pg. 377
Other Accessories........................................................... pg. 385
Caring for the Camera ................................................... pg. 391
Storage .............................................................................................. pg. 391
Cleaning............................................................................................ pg. 391
The Low-Pass Filter........................................................................ pg. 392
“Clean Now”.............................................................................. pg. 392
“Clean at Startup/Shutdown”............................................. pg. 393
Manual Cleaning ..................................................................... pg. 395
Caring for the Camera and Battery: Cautions ........... pg. 398
Troubleshooting............................................................. pg. 402
Error Messages................................................................ pg. 409
Appendix ......................................................................... pg. 417
Specifications.................................................................. pg. 428
n
369
Compatible Lenses
CPU lenses (particularly types G and D) are recommended for use
with the D700. CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of
CPU contacts, type G and D lenses by a letter on the lens barrel.
Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring.
CPU contacts
Aperture ring
CPU lens
Type G lens
Type D lens
Compatible CPU Lenses 1
Camera setting
Lens/accessory
Type G or D AF Nikkor 2
AF-S, AF-I Nikkor
PC-E NIKKOR series
PC Micro 85mm f/2.8D 5
AF-S / AF-I Teleconverter 7
Other AF Nikkor
(except lenses for F3AF)
AI-P Nikkor
n
370
1
2
3
4
5
Exposure
mode
Focus mode
Metering system
a
S
C
M (with
electronic
rangefinder)
M
P
S
A
M
3D Color
Z
b
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔3
—
—
✔8
✔4
✔4
✔8
✔ ✔4 ✔4 ✔4
✔ — ✔6 ✔
✔ ✔ ✔ ✔
—
—
—
✔ 3, 4
✔ 3, 4
✔3
✔9
✔9
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔3
—
✔ 10
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔3
IX-Nikkor lenses can not be used.
Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.
Spot metering meters selected focus point.
Can not be used with shifting or tilting.
The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not work
properly when shifting and/or tilting the lens, or when an aperture other than
the maximum aperture is used.
6 Manual exposure mode only.
7 Can be used with AF-S and AF-I lenses only (pg. 371).
8 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
9 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm f/2.8, AF 35–
70mm f/2.8, AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 <New>, or AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5 lens at
maximum zoom, in-focus indicator may be displayed when image on matte
screen in viewfinder is not in focus. Adjust focus manually until image in
viewfinder is in focus.
10 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
A The AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter
The AF-S/AF-I teleconverter can be used with the following AF-S and AF-I
lenses:
• AF-S VR Micro 105mm f/2.8G ED 1
• AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED
• AF-S VR 300mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED II
• AF-S 300mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-I 300mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S 300mm f/4D ED 2
• AF-S NIKKOR 400mm f/2.8G ED VR
• AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED II
• AF-S 400mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-I 400mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 500mm f/4G ED VR 2
• AF-S 500mm f/4D ED II 2
• AF-S 500mm f/4D ED 2
• AF-I 500mm f/4D ED 2
• AF-S NIKKOR 600mm f/4G ED VR 2
• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED II 2
• AF-S 600mm f/4D ED 2
• AF-I 600mm f/4D ED 2
• AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED 2
1 Autofocus not supported.
2 Autofocus not supported when used with AF-S Teleconverter TC-17E II/TC-20E II.
n
A Lens f-number
The f-number given in lens names is the maximum aperture of the lens.
371
Non-CPU Lenses 1
Non-CPU lenses include manual focus lenses and other lenses
without a built-in CPU. The following is a list of compatible nonCPU lenses and accessories.
Camera setting
Lens/accessory
AI-, AI-modified, Nikkor or
Nikon Series E lenses 2
Medical-Nikkor 120mm f/4
Reflex-Nikkor
PC-Nikkor
AI-type Teleconverter 10
PB-6 Bellows Focusing
Attachment 12
Auto extension rings (PKseries 11A, 12, or 13; PN-11)
n
372
Focus mode
Exposure
Metering system
mode
a
P
A
Z
S M 3D Color b
S
C
M (with
electronic
rangefinder)
M
—
✔3
✔
— ✔4 —
✔5 ✔6
—
—
—
—
✔
—
✔8
✔ 11
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔7
✔4
✔9
✔4
— —
— ✔6
— ✔
✔5 ✔6
—
✔ 11
✔
— ✔ 13 —
—
✔
—
✔ 11
✔
— ✔4 —
—
✔
—
—
—
—
1 Some lenses can not be used (pg. 373).
2 Range of rotation for AI 80–200mm f/2.8 ED tripod mount is limited by camera
body. Filters can not be exchanged while AI 200–400mm f/4 ED is mounted on
camera.
3 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
4 If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU lens data (pg. 210), aperture
value will be displayed in viewfinder and control panel.
5 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are specified using
Non-CPU lens data (pg. 210). Use spot or center-weighted metering if desired
results are not achieved.
6 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum aperture using
Non-CPU lens data (pg. 210).
7 Can be used in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower than 1/125 s.
8 Electronic rangefinder can not be used with shifting or tilting.
9 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In aperture-priority auto
exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture ring before performing AE
lock or shifting lens. In manual exposure mode, preset aperture using lens
aperture ring and determine exposure before shifting lens.
10 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–
105mm f/3.5–4.5, AI 35–135mm f/3.5–4.5, or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D. See
teleconverter manual for details.
11 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.
12 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. PB-6D may be required
depending on camera orientation.
13 Use preset aperture. In aperture-priority auto exposure mode, set aperture
using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking
photograph.
• PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder.
A Compatible Non-CPU Lenses
If lens data are specified using Non-CPU lens data (pg. 210), many of the
features available with CPU lenses can also be used with non-CPU lenses.
If lens data are not specified, color matrix metering can not be used, and
center-weighted metering is used when matrix metering is selected.
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure modes g and h, when
aperture must be set using the lens aperture ring. If the maximum
aperture has not been specified using Non-CPU lens data, the camera
aperture display will show the number of stops from maximum aperture;
the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring.
Aperture-priority auto will be selected automatically in exposure modes e
and f. The exposure-mode indicator (e or f ) in the control panel will
blink, and g will be displayed in the viewfinder.
D Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses
The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with the
D700:
• TC-16AS AF teleconverter
• Non-AI lenses
• Lenses that require the AU-1
focusing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm
f/5.6, 800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 7.5mm f/5.6,
8mm f/8, OP 10mm f/5.6)
• 2.1cm f/4
• Extension Ring K2
• 180–600mm f/8 ED (serial numbers
174041–174180)
• 360–1200mm f/11 ED (serial
numbers 174031–174127)
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers
280001–300490)
• AF lenses for the F3AF (AF 80mm
f/2.8, AF 200mm f/3.5 ED,
AF Teleconverter TC-16)
• PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900
or earlier)
• PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers
851001–906200)
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/6.3 (old type)
• Reflex 1000mm f/11 (serial numbers
142361–143000)
• Reflex 2000mm f/11 (serial numbers
200111–200310)
n
373
A
The Built-in Flash
The built-in flash can be used with CPU lenses with focal lengths of 24 mm
(16 mm in DX format) to 300mm. Remove lens hoods to prevent shadows.
The flash has a minimum range of 60 cm (2 ft.) and can not be used in the
macro range of macro zoom lenses. The flash may be unable to light the
entire subject with the following lenses at ranges less than those given
below:
DX
FX
Lens
AF-S DX 12–24mm f/4G ED
AF-S DX 17–55mm f/2.8G ED
AF-S 17–35mm f/2.8D ED
AF 18–35mm f/3.5–4.5D ED
AF 20–35mm f/2.8D
PC-E NIKKOR 24mm f/3.5D ED
AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
AF-S 28–70mm f/2.8D ED
Zoom position
18 mm
20 mm
28 mm
24 mm
24 mm
24 mm
35 mm
24 mm
35 mm
Min. range
0.6 m/2 ft.
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.0 m/3 ft. 3 in.
1.5 m/4 ft. 11 in.
When used with the AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED, the flash will be
unable to light the entire subject at all ranges.
The built-in flash can also be used with AI-, AI-modified Nikkor, Nikon
Series E and non-CPU lenses with a focal length of 24–300mm. AI 50–
300mm f/4.5, modified AI 50–300mm f/4.5, and AI-S 50–300mm f/4.5 ED
lenses must be used at a zoom position of 180mm or above, and AI 50–
300mm f/4.5 ED lenses at a zoom position of 135mm or above.
n
374
D Red-Eye Reduction
Lenses that block the subject’s view of the AF-assist illuminator may
interfere with red-eye reduction.
D AF-Assist Illumination
The AF-assist illuminator can be used with lenses with focal lengths of 24–
200 mm. AF-assist illumination is not available with the following lenses:
• AF-S VR 200mm f/2G ED
• AF-S VR 200–400mm f/4G ED
At ranges under 0.7m (2ft. 4in.), the following lenses may block the AFassist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:
• AF Micro 200mm f/4D ED
• AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G ED
• AF Micro 70–180mm f/4.5–5.6D ED
• AF-S 17–35mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S DX 17–55mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 24–70mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S 28–70mm f/2.8D ED
At ranges under 1.1m (3ft. 7in.), the following lenses may block the AFassist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:
• AF-S DX VR 55–200mm f/4–5.6G ED
At ranges under 1.5m (4ft. 11in.), the following lenses may block the AFassist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:
• AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED
• AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D ED
• AF 80–200mm f/2.8D ED
• AF-S VR 70–300mm f/4.5–5.6G ED
• AF-S NIKKOR 14–24mm f/2.8G ED
At ranges under 2.3m (7ft. 7in.), the following lenses may block the AFassist illuminator and interfere with autofocus when lighting is poor:
• AF VR 80–400mm f/4.5–5.6D ED
n
375
A
Calculating Picture Angle
The D700 can be used with Nikon lenses for 35mm (135) format cameras.
If Auto DX crop is on (the default setting) and a 35mm format lens is
attached, the picture angle will be the same as a frame of 35mm film
(36.0 × 23.9 mm); if a DX lens is attached, the picture angle will
automatically be adjusted to 23.5 × 15.6 mm (DX format).
To choose a picture angle different from that of the current lens, turn Auto
DX crop off and select FX format (36 × 24) or DX format (24 × 16). If a
35 mm format lens is attached, the picture angle could be reduced by
1.5 × by selecting DX format (24 × 16), exposing a smaller area.
FX format (36 × 24) picture size (36.0 × 23.9 mm,
equivalent to 35mm format camera)
Lens
Picture diagonal
DX format (24 × 16) picture size
(23.5 × 15.6 mm, equivalent to DX
format camera)
Picture angle (FX format (36 × 24);
35mm format)
Picture angle (DX format (24 × 16); DX format)
n
376
The DX format (24 × 16) picture angle is about 1.5 times smaller than the
35mm format picture angle. To calculate the focal length of lenses in
35mm format when DX format (24 × 16) is selected, multiply the focal
length of the lens by about 1.5 (for example, the effective focal length of a
50mm lens in 35mm format would be 75 mm when DX format (24 × 16)
is selected).
Optional Flash Units
(Speedlights)
The D700 can be used with CLS-compatible
flash units. Remove the accessory shoe cover
when attaching optional flash units. The
built-in flash will not fire when an optional
flash unit is attached.
The Nikon Creative Lighting System (CLS)
Nikon’s advanced Creative Lighting System (CLS) offers improved
communication between the camera and compatible flash units
for improved flash photography. The Creative Lighting System
supports the following features:
• i-TTL flash control: Improved through-the-lens (TTL) flash control
for use with CLS (see page 184). Flash level is set using monitor
pre-flashes to measure the light reflected by the subject,
ensuring optimal flash output.
• Advanced Wireless Lighting: Allows i-TTL flash control with remote
wireless flash units.
• FV lock (pg. 192): Locks flash level at the metered value, allowing a
series of photographs to be taken at the same flash level.
• Auto FP High-Speed Sync (pg. 306): Allows the flash to be used at the
highest shutter speed supported by the camera, making it
possible to choose the maximum aperture for reduced depth of
field.
n
377
❚❚ CLS-Compatible Flash Units
The D700 can be used with the following CLS-compatible flash
units: the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, SB-R200, and SU-800.
The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, and SB-R200
The principal features of these flash units are listed below.
Flash unit
SB-900 1
ISO
100
34/111
Guide No. 3
ISO 200 48/157
Auto power zoom (mm) 17–200
Wide panel (mm)
12, 14, 17
Feature
Head rotation
SB-R200 2
10/32
14/49
—5
—
60 ° down
7 ° down, 7 ° down,
90 ° up,
(toward lens
90 ° up,
90 ° up,
180 ° left, 90 ° up light axis), 45 °
180 ° left 180 ° left,
90 ° right
up (away from
and right 90 ° right
light axis)
SB-800
38/125
53/175
24–105
14, 17
SB-600
30/98
42/138
24–85
14
SB-400
21/69
30/98
—4
—
1 If a color filter is attached to the SB-900 when v or N (flash) is selected for white
balance, the camera will automatically detect the filter and adjust white balance
appropriately.
2 Controlled remotely with built-in flash in commander mode or using optional
SB-900, SB-800 flash unit or SU-800 wireless Speedlight commander.
3 m/ft., 20 °C (68 °F); SB-900, SB-800 and SB-600 at 35 mm zoom head position;
SB-900 with standard illumination.
4 27 mm zoom coverage.
5 24 mm zoom coverage.
SU-800 Wireless Speedlight Commander
When mounted on a CLS-compatible camera, the SU-800 can be
used as a commander for remote SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or
SB-R200 flash units. The SU-800 itself is not equipped with a flash.
n
378
A Guide Number
To calculate the range of the flash at full power, divide the Guide Number
by the aperture. For example, at ISO 100 the SB-800 has a Guide Number
of 38 m or 125 ft. (35 mm zoom head position); its range at an aperture of
f/5.6 is 38÷5.6 or about 6.8 meters (or in feet, 125÷5.6=approximately
23 ft. 7 in.). For each twofold increase in ISO sensitivity, multiply the Guide
Number by the square root of two (approximately 1.4).
n
379
The following features are available with the SB-900, SB-800,
SB-600, SB-400, SB-R200, and SU-800:
Flash unit
Advanced Wireless Lighting
Commander
Remote
SB-900
SB-900
SB-900
SB-800 SB-600 SB-400 SB-800 SU-800 1 SB-800 SB-600 SB-R200
Flash mode/feature
i-TTL balanced fill-flash
i-TTL
✔2
for digital SLR
AA
Auto aperture
✔4
A
Non-TTL auto
✔6
GN Distance-priority manual ✔
M
Manual
✔
RPT
Repeating flash
✔
✔
Auto FP High-Speed Sync 7
FV lock
✔
✔
AF-assist for multi-area AF 8
Flash Color Information
✔
Communication
REAR
Rear-curtain sync
✔
Y
Red-eye reduction
✔
Auto zoom
✔
✔2
✔3
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
—
✔5
✔5
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔5
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔5
✔5
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
—
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
—
—
—
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
✔
✔
✔
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
✔
—
—
1 Only available when SU-800 is used to control other flash units.
2 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering or when selected
with flash unit.
3 Standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR is used with spot metering.
4 Selected with flash unit. Non-TTL auto (A) selected automatically if non-CPU lens
is attached without specifying lens data using Non-CPU lens data.
5 Auto aperture (AA) is used regardless of mode selected with flash unit. Non-TTL
auto (A) selected automatically if non-CPU lens is attached without specifying
lens data using Non-CPU lens data.
6 Selected with flash unit.
7 Select 1/320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto FP) for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync
speed, pg. 305).
8 CPU lens required.
n
380
Other Flash Units
The following flash units can be used in non-TTL auto and manual
modes. If they are set to TTL, the camera shutter-release button
will lock and no photographs can be taken.
Speedlight
Flash mode
A Non-TTL auto
M Manual
G Repeating flash
REAR Rear-curtain sync
SB-80DX,
SB-28DX,
SB-28, SB-26,
SB-25, SB-24
✔
✔
✔
✔
SB-50DX
—
✔
—
✔
SB-30, SB-27 1,
SB-23, SB-29 2,
SB-22S, SB-22,
SB-21B 2,
SB-20,
SB-29S 2
SB-16B, SB-15
✔
—
✔
✔
—
—
✔
✔
1 Flash mode is automatically set to TTL and shutter-release is disabled. Set flash
unit to A (non-TTL auto flash).
2 Autofocus is only available with AF-Micro lenses (60 mm, 105 mm, or 200 mm).
n
381
D
Notes on Optional Speedlights
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the Speedlight
supports the Nikon Creative Lighting System, refer to the section on CLScompatible digital SLR cameras. The D700 is not included in the “digital
SLR” category in the SB-80DX, SB-28DX, and SB-50DX manuals.
i-TTL flash control can be used at ISO sensitivities between 200 and 6400.
At values over 6400, the desired results may not be achieved at some
ranges or aperture settings. If the flash-ready indicator blinks for about
three seconds after a photograph is taken, the flash has fired at full power
and the photograph may be underexposed.
The SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400 provide red-eye reduction, while
the SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SU-800 provide AF-assist illumination.
With other Speedlights, the camera AF-assist illuminator is used for AFassist illumination and red-eye reduction. When used with AF lenses with
focal lengths of 17–135 mm, the SB-900 provides active AF-assist
illumination for all focus points; note, however, that autofocus is available
only with the following focus points:
17–19 mm
20–105 mm
106–135mm
When used with AF lenses with focal lengths of 24–105 mm, the SB-800,
SB-600, and SU-800 provides active AF-assist illumination to assist
autofocus for the following focus points:
24–34 mm
35–49 mm
50–105mm
In programmed auto, the maximum aperture (minimum f-number) is
limited according to sensitivity (ISO equivalency), as shown below:
n
382
200
5
400
5.6
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
800
1600
3200
7.1
8
10
6400
11
For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400), aperture is
stopped down by half an f-stop. If the maximum aperture of the lens is
smaller than given above, the maximum value for aperture will be the
maximum aperture of the lens.
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash
photography, correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL mode. We
recommend that you choose spot metering to select standard i-TTL flash
control. Take a test shot and view the results in the monitor.
In i-TTL, use the flash panel or bounce adapter provided with the flash
unit. Do not use other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may
produce incorrect exposure.
D Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories
Use only Nikon Speedlights. Negative voltages or voltages over 250 V
applied to the accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation,
but damage the sync circuitry of the camera or flash. Before using a
Nikon Speedlight not listed in this section, contact a Nikon-authorized
service representative for more information.
n
383
Flash Contacts
The D700 is equipped with an accessory shoe for attaching
optional flash units directly to the camera and a sync terminal that
allows flash units to be connected via a sync cable.
❚❚ The Accessory Shoe
Use the accessory shoe to mount optional
flash units directly on the camera without a
sync cable (pg. 378). The accessory shoe is
equipped with a safety lock for Speedlights
with a locking pin, such as the SB-900, SB-800,
SB-600 and SB-400.
❚❚ The Sync Terminal
A sync cable can be connected to the sync
terminal as required. Do not connect
another flash unit via a sync cable when
performing rear-curtain sync flash
photography with a flash unit mounted on
the camera accessory shoe.
D
n
384
ISO Sensitivity
When auto ISO sensitivity control is on (pg. 108), ISO sensitivity will
automatically be adjusted as required for optimal flash output when an
optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-400 flash unit is attached. This may
result in foreground subjects being underexposed in photographs taken
with the flash at slow shutter speeds, in daylight, or against a bright
background. In these cases, choose a flash mode other than slow sync or
choose a larger aperture.
Other Accessories
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for
the D700.
• Rechargeable Li-ion Battery EN-EL3e (pp. 32, 34): Additional
EN-EL3e batteries are available from local retailers and
Nikon service representatives. The EN-EL3e can be
recharged using an MH-18a or MH-18 quick charger.
• Multi-Power Battery Pack MB-D10: The MB-D10 takes one
rechargeable Nikon EN-EL3e, EN-EL4a, or EN-EL4 Li-ion
battery or eight AA alkaline, NiMH, lithium, or nickelmanganese batteries. A BL-3 battery-chamber cover is
required when using EN-EL4a or EN-EL4 batteries. It is
Power sources
equipped with a shutter-release button, B button,
multi selector, and main- and sub-command dials for
improved operation when taking photographs in portrait
(tall) orientation. When attaching the MB-D10, remove
contact cover for the MB-D10 from the camera.
• Quick Charger MH-18a (pg. 32): The MH-18a can be used to
recharge EN-EL3e battery.
• AC Adapter EH-5a/EH-5: These AC adapters can be used to
power the camera for extended periods.
• Wireless Transmitter WT-4: Connects the camera to wireless
and Ethernet networks. The photographs on the camera
memory card can be viewed by computers on the same
network or copied to a computer for long-term storage.
Wireless LAN
The camera can also be controlled from any computer on
adapters
the network using Camera Control Pro 2 (available
separately). Note that the WT-4 requires an independent
power source; an EH-6 AC adapter or a second EN-EL3e
battery is recommended. See the WT-4 manual for
details.
n
385
Viewfinder
eyepiece
accessories
n
386
• DK-17C Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses (with Safety Lock): To
accommodate individual differences in vision, viewfinder
lenses are available with diopters of –3, –2, 0, +1, +2 m–1.
Use diopter adjustment lenses only if the desired focus
can not be achieved with the built-in diopter adjustment
control (–3 to +1 m–1). Test diopter adjustment lenses
before purchase to ensure that the desired focus can be
achieved.
• Magnifying Eyepiece DK-17M (with Safety Lock): The DK-17M
magnifies the view through the viewfinder by
approximately 1.2 × for greater precision when framing.
• Magnifier DG-2: The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in
the viewfinder. Use for close-up photography, copying,
telephoto lenses, and other tasks that call for added
precision. DK-18 eyepiece adapter (available separately)
required.
• Eyepiece Adapter DK-18: The DK-18 is used when attaching
the DG-2 magnifier or DR-3 right-angle viewing
attachment to the D700.
• Antifog Finder Eyepiece DK-14, DK-17A: These viewfinder
eyepieces prevent fogging in humid or cold conditions.
The DK-17A is equipped with a safety lock.
• Rubber Eyepiece Cup DK-19: The DK-19 makes the image in the
viewfinder easier to see, preventing eye fatigue.
• Right-Angle Viewing Attachment DR-5/DR-4: The DR-5 and DR-4
attach to the viewfinder eyepiece at a right angle,
allowing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from
above when the camera is in the horizontal shooting
position. The DR-5 can also magnify the view through the
viewfinder by 2 × for greater precision when framing
(note that the edges of the frame will not be visible when
the view is magnified).
• Nikon filters can be divided into three types: screw-in,
slip-in, and rear-interchange. Use Nikon filters; filters
manufactured by other makers may interfere with
autofocus or electronic range finding.
• The D700 can not be used with linear polarizing filters.
Use the C-PL circular polarizing filter instead.
• The NC and L37C filters are recommended for protecting
Filters
the lens.
• To prevent moiré, use of a filter is not recommended
when the subject is framed against a bright light, or when
a bright light source is in the frame.
• Center-weighted metering is recommended with filters
with exposure factors (filter factors) over 1× (Y44, Y48,
Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4, ND4S, ND8, ND8S,
ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12).
Water Guard WG-AS3: Covers the base of the optional SB-900
Water guards flash unit to protect the camera accessory shoe from water
droplets.
• Nikon Speedlights SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, and SB-400
Optional flash • Nikon Wireless Remote Speedlight SB-R200
units
• Wireless Speedlight Commander SU-800
See page 378 for more information.
• PC Card Adapter EC-AD1: The EC-AD1 PC card adapter allows
PC card
Type I CompactFlash memory cards to be inserted in
adapters
PCMCIA card slots.
n
387
Software
• Capture NX 2: A complete photo editing package.
• Camera Control Pro 2: Control the camera remotely from a
computer and save photographs directly to the computer
hard disk.
• Image Authentication: Determine whether photographs
taken with image authentication (pg. 342) on have been
modified after shooting.
Note: Use the latest versions of Nikon software. Most Nikon
software offers an auto update feature when the computer is
connected to the Internet.
Body cap
n
388
• Body Cap: The body cap keeps the mirror, viewfinder
screen, and low-pass filter free of dust when a lens is not
in place.
The D700 is equipped with a tenpin remote terminal for remote
control and automatic
Remote
photography. The terminal is
terminal
provided with a cap, which protects
accessories
the contacts when the terminal is
not in use. The following
accessories can be used (all lengths are approximate):
Description
Length
Accessory
Remote Cord
MC-22
Remote Cord
MC-30
Remote Cord
MC-36
Extension Cord
MC-21
Connecting Cord
MC-23
Adapter Cord
MC-25
GPS Adapter Cord
MC-35
Modulite Remote
Control Set ML-3
Remote shutter release with blue, yellow,
1m
and black terminals for connection to a
remote shutter-triggering device, allowing (3 ft. 3 in.)
control via sound or electronic signals.
Remote shutter release; can be used to
80 cm
reduce camera shake or keep the shutter
(2 ft. 7 in.)
open during a time exposure.
Remote shutter release; can be used for
interval timer photography or to reduce
camera shake or keep the shutter open
85 cm
during a time exposure. Equipped with
(2 ft. 9 in.)
back-lit control panel, shutter-release lock
for use in bulb photography, and timer that
beeps at one-second intervals.
Can be connected to ML-3 or MC-series 20,
3m
22, 23, 25, 30, or 36. Only one MC-21 can
(9 ft. 10 in.)
be used at a time.
Connects two cameras for simultaneous
40 cm
operation.
(1 ft. 4 in.)
Ten-pin to two-pin adapter cord for
connection to devices with two-pin
20 cm
terminals, including the MW-2 radio
(8 in.)
control set, MT-2 intervalometer, and ML-2
modulite control set.
Connects GPS devices to D700 via PC cable
35 cm
supplied by manufacturer of GPS device
(14 in.)
(pg. 213).
Allows infrared remote control at ranges of
–
up to 8 m (26 ft.).
n
389
❚❚ Approved Memory Cards
The following Type I CompactFlash memory cards have been
tested and approved for use in the D700:
SanDisk
Extreme IV
Extreme III
Ultra II
Standard
Professional UDMA
Lexar Media Platinum II
Professional
SDCFX4
SDCFX3
SDCFH
SDCFB
300 ×
80 ×
60 ×
133 × WA
8 GB, 4 GB, 2 GB
8 GB, 4 GB, 2 GB, 1 GB
4 GB, 2 GB, 1 GB
8 GB, 4 GB, 2 GB
2 GB, 1 GB, 512 MB
4 GB
8 GB, 4 GB, 2 GB, 1 GB
Other cards have not been tested. For more details on the above
cards, please contact the manufacturer.
n
390
Caring for the Camera
Storage
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, replace
the monitor cover, remove the battery, and store the battery in a
cool, dry area with the terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or
mildew, store the camera in a dry, well-ventilated area. Do not
store your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in
locations that:
• are poorly ventilated or subject to humidities of over 60%
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic
fields, such as televisions or radios
• are exposed to temperatures above 50 °C (122 °F) or below
–10 °C (14 °F)
Cleaning
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a
soft, dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside,
Camera
wipe off sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled
water and dry thoroughly. Important: Dust or other foreign
body
matter inside the camera may cause damage not covered under
warranty.
These glass elements are easily damaged. Remove dust and
Lens,
lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can
mirror, and vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove
viewfinder fingerprints and other stains, apply a small amount of lens
cleaner to a soft cloth and clean with care.
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing
fingerprints and other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a
Monitor
soft cloth or chamois leather. Do not apply pressure, as this
could result in damage or malfunction.
n
Do not use alcohol, thinner, or other volatile chemicals.
391
The Low-Pass Filter
The image sensor that acts as the camera’s picture element is fitted
with a low-pass filter to prevent moiré. If you suspect that dirt or
dust on the filter is appearing in photographs, you can clean the
filter using the Clean image sensor option in the setup menu.
The filter can be cleaned at any time using the Clean now option,
or cleaning can be performed automatically when the camera is
turned on or off.
❚❚ “Clean Now”
1
Place the camera base down.
Image sensor cleaning is most effective
when the camera is placed base down as
shown at right.
2
Display the Clean image
sensor menu.
Highlight Clean image sensor
in the setup menu and press 2.
D
n
Image Dust Off
The Image Dust Off option in Capture NX 2 can not use dust off reference
data recorded before image sensor cleaning is performed to retouch
photographs taken after image sensor cleaning is performed. If you
intend to use Image Dust Off with photographs recorded after image
sensor cleaning is performed, we recommend that you record dust off
reference data after cleaning the image sensor.
A
Image Sensor Cleaning
If the options described in this section are not sufficient to remove dust or
other foreign objects from the image sensor, clean the sensor manually as
described on page 395.
392
3
Select Clean now.
Highlight Clean now and press
2. The message shown at right
will be displayed while
cleaning is in progress.
The message shown at right
will be displayed when cleaning is
complete.
❚❚ “Clean at Startup/Shutdown”
1
Select Clean at startup/
shutdown.
Display the Clean image
sensor menu as described in
Step 2 on the previous page.
Highlight Clean at startup/
shutdown and press 2.
n
393
2
Select an option.
Highlight one of the following
options and press J.
Option
Description
The image sensor is automatically cleaned
5 Clean at startup
each time the camera is turned on.
The image sensor is automatically cleaned
Clean at
6
during shutdown each time the camera is
shutdown
turned off.
Clean at startup The image sensor is cleaned automatically at
7
& shutdown
startup and at shutdown.
Cleaning off
8
Automatic image sensor cleaning off.
(default)
D
Image Sensor Cleaning
The following interrupt image sensor cleaning: raising the built-in flash,
pressing the shutter-release, depth-of-field preview, or B button, or
using FV lock.
n
Cleaning is performed by vibrating the image sensor. If dust can not be
fully removed using the options in the Clean image sensor menu, clean
the image sensor manually (pg. 395) or consult a Nikon-authorized service
representative.
If image sensor cleaning is performed several times in succession, image
sensor cleaning may be temporarily disabled to protect the camera’s
internal circuitry. Cleaning can be performed again after a short wait.
394
❚❚ Manual Cleaning
If foreign matter can not be removed from the low-pass filter using
the Clean image sensor (pg. 392) option in the setup menu, the
filter can be cleaned manually as described below. Note, however,
that the filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged. Nikon
recommends that the filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized
service personnel.
1
Charge the battery or connect an AC adapter.
A reliable power source is required when inspecting or
cleaning the low-pass filter. If the battery level is below J
(60 %), turn the camera off and insert a fully-charged EN-EL3e
battery or connect an optional EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter.
2
Select Lock mirror up for cleaning.
Remove the lens and turn the camera on.
Highlight Lock mirror up for cleaning
in the setup menu and press 2 (note
that this option is not available at battery
levels of J or below).
3
Press J.
The message shown at right will be
displayed in the monitor and a row of
dashes will appear in the control panel
and viewfinder. To restore normal
operation without inspecting the lowpass filter, turn the camera off.
n
395
4
Raise the mirror.
Press the shutter-release
button all the way down.
The mirror will be raised and
the shutter curtain will open,
revealing the low-pass filter. The display in the viewfinder will
turn off and the row of dashes in the control panel will blink.
5
Examine the low-pass filter.
Holding the camera so that light falls on
the low-pass filter, examine the filter for
dust or lint. If no foreign objects are
present, proceed to Step 7.
6
Clean the filter.
Remove any dust and lint from the filter
with a blower. Do not use a blowerbrush, as the bristles could damage the
filter. Dirt that can not be removed with
a blower can only be removed by Nikonauthorized service personnel. Under no circumstances should
you touch or wipe the filter.
7
Turn the camera off.
The mirror will return to the down position and the shutter
curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap.
n
396
D Use a Reliable Power Source
The shutter curtain is delicate and easily damaged. If the camera powers
off while the mirror is raised, the curtain will close automatically. To
prevent damage to the curtain, observe the following precautions:
• Do not turn the camera off or remove or disconnect the power source
while the mirror is raised.
• If the battery runs low while the mirror is raised, a beep will sound and
the self-timer lamp will blink to warn that the shutter curtain will close
and the mirror will be lowered after about two minutes. End cleaning or
inspection immediately.
D Foreign Matter on the Low-Pass Filter
Nikon takes every possible precaution to prevent foreign matter from
coming into contact with the low-pass filter during production and
shipping. The D700, however, is designed to be used with
interchangeable lenses, and foreign matter may enter the camera when
lenses are removed or exchanged. Once inside the camera, this foreign
matter may adhere to the low-pass filter, where it may appear in
photographs taken under certain conditions. To protect the camera when
no lens is in place, be sure to replace the body cap provided with the
camera, being careful to first remove all dust and other foreign matter that
may be adhering to the body cap.
Should foreign matter find its way onto the low-pass filter, clean the filter
as described above, or have the filter cleaned by authorized Nikon service
personnel. Photographs affected by the presence of foreign matter on the
filter can be retouched using Capture NX 2 (available separately; pg. 388)
or the clean image options available in some third-party imaging
applications.
D Servicing the Camera and Accessories
The camera is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon
recommends that the camera be inspected by the original retailer or
Nikon service representative once every one to two years, and that it be
serviced once every three to five years (note that fees apply to these
services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly
recommended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories
regularly used with the camera, such as lenses or optional Speedlights,
should be included when the camera is inspected or serviced.
n
397
Caring for the Camera and
Battery: Cautions
Do not drop: The product may
malfunction if subjected to strong
shocks or vibration.
Keep dry: This product is not
waterproof, and may malfunction if
immersed in water or exposed to
high levels of humidity. Rusting of
the internal mechanism can cause
irreparable damage.
Avoid sudden changes in temperature:
Sudden changes in temperature,
such as occur when entering or
leaving a heated building on a cold
day, can cause condensation inside
the device. To prevent
condensation, place the device in a
carrying case or plastic bag before
exposing it to sudden changes in
temperature.
n
398
Keep away from strong magnetic fields:
Do not use or store this device in
the vicinity of equipment that
generates strong electromagnetic
radiation or magnetic fields.
Strong static charges or the
magnetic fields produced by
equipment such as radio
transmitters could interfere with
the monitor, damage data stored
on the memory card, or affect the
product’s internal circuitry.
Do not leave the lens pointed at the sun:
Do not leave the lens pointed at
the sun or other strong light source
for an extended period. Intense
light may cause the image sensor
to deteriorate or produce a white
blur effect in photographs.
Cleaning: When cleaning the camera
body, use a blower to gently
remove dust and lint, then wipe
gently with a soft, dry cloth. After
using the camera at the beach or
seaside, wipe off any sand or salt
using a cloth lightly dampened in
pure water and then dry the
camera thoroughly. In rare
instances, static electricity may
cause the LCD displays to light up
or go dark. This does not indicate a
malfunction, and the display will
soon return to normal.
The lens and mirror are easily
damaged. Dust and lint should be
gently removed with a blower.
When using an aerosol blower,
keep the can vertical to prevent
discharge of liquid. To remove
fingerprints and other stains from
the lens, apply a small amount of
lens cleaner to a soft cloth and
wipe the lens carefully.
See “The Low-Pass Filter” (pp. 392,
395) for information on cleaning
the low-pass filter.
Lens contacts: Keep the lens contacts
clean.
Do not touch the shutter curtain: The
shutter curtain is extremely thin
and easily damaged. Under no
circumstances should you exert
pressure on the curtain, poke it
with cleaning tools, or subject it to
powerful air currents from a
blower. These actions could
scratch, deform, or tear the curtain.
The shutter curtain may appear to
be unevenly colored, but this has
no affect on pictures and does not
indicate a malfunction.
Storage: To prevent mold or mildew,
store the camera in a dry, wellventilated area. If the product will
not be used for an extended
period, remove the battery to
prevent leakage and store the
camera in a plastic bag containing
a desiccant. Do not, however, store
the camera case in a plastic bag, as
this may cause the material to
deteriorate. Note that desiccant
gradually loses its capacity to
absorb moisture and should be
replaced at regular intervals.
To prevent mold or mildew, take
the camera out of storage at least
once a month. Turn the camera on
and release the shutter a few times
before putting it away.
Store the battery in a cool, dry
place. Replace the terminal cover
before putting the battery away.
n
399
Turn the product off before removing or
disconnecting the power source: Do not
unplug the product or remove the
battery while the product is on or
while images are being recorded or
deleted. Forcibly cutting power in
these circumstances could result in
loss of data or in damage to
product memory or internal
circuitry. To prevent an accidental
interruption of power, avoid
carrying the product from one
location to another while the AC
adapter is connected.
Notes on the monitor: The monitor
may contain a few pixels that are
always lit or that do not light. This
is common to all TFT LCD monitors
and does not indicate a
malfunction. Images recorded
with the product are unaffected.
Images in the monitor may be
difficult to see in a bright light.
Do not apply pressure to the
monitor, as this could cause
damage or malfunction. Dust or
lint on the monitor can be removed
with a blower. Stains can be
removed by wiping lightly with a
soft cloth or chamois leather.
Should the monitor break, care
should be taken to avoid injury
from broken glass and to prevent
liquid crystal from the monitor
touching the skin or entering the
eyes and mouth.
Replace the monitor cover when
transporting the camera or leaving
it unattended.
n
400
Batteries: Dirt on the battery
terminals can prevent the camera
from functioning and should be
removed with a soft, dry cloth
before use.
Batteries may leak or explode if
improperly handled. Observe the
following precautions when
handling batteries:
Turn the product off before
replacing the battery.
The battery may become hot when
used for extended periods.
Observe due caution when
handling the battery.
Use only batteries approved for use
in this equipment.
Do not expose the battery to flame
or excessive heat.
After removing the battery from
the camera, be sure to replace the
terminal cover.
Charge the battery before use.
When taking photographs on
important occasions, ready a spare
EN-EL3e battery and keep it fully
charged. Depending on your
location, it may be difficult to
purchase replacement batteries on
short notice.
On cold days, the capacity of
batteries tends to decrease. Be
sure the battery is fully charged
before taking photographs outside
in cold weather. Keep a spare
battery in a warm place and
exchange the two as necessary.
Once warmed, a cold battery may
recover some of its charge.
Continuing to charge the battery
after it is fully charged can impair
battery performance.
Used batteries are a valuable
resource. Please recycle used
batteries in accord with local
regulations.
n
401
Troubleshooting
If the camera fails to function as expected, check the list of
common problems below before consulting your retailer or Nikon
representative. Refer to the page numbers in the right-most
column for more information.
❚❚ Display
Problem
Solution
Page
Adjust viewfinder focus or use
Viewfinder is out of focus.
45
optional diopter adjustment lenses.
Viewfinder is dark.
Insert a fully-charged battery.
46
Choose longer delays for Custom
Displays turn off without
Setting c2 (Auto meter-off delay) 296, 297
warning.
or c4 (Monitor off delay).
Unusual characters
See “A Note on Electronically402
displayed in control panel. Controlled Cameras,” below.
Displays in control panel The response times and brightness
or viewfinder are
of these displays varies with
—
temperature.
unresponsive and dim.
Fine lines are visible
These phenomena are normal for
around active focus point
this type of viewfinder and do not
—
or display turns red when
indicate a malfunction.
focus point is highlighted.
A
n
402
A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras
In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may appear in the control
panel and the camera may stop functioning. In most cases, this
phenomenon is caused by a strong external static charge. Turn the
camera off, remove and replace the battery, and turn the camera on again,
or, if you are using an AC adapter (available separately), disconnect and
reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again. In the event of
continued malfunction, contact your retailer or Nikon-authorized service
representative. Note that disconnecting the power source as described
above may result in loss of any data not recorded to the memory card at
the time the problem occurred. Data already recorded to the card will not
be affected.
❚❚ Shooting
Problem
Solution
Camera takes time to turn
Delete files or folders.
on.
• Memory card is full or not
inserted.
• CPU lens with aperture ring
attached but aperture not locked
at highest f-number. If B is
displayed in control panel, select
Shutter-release disabled.
Aperture ring for Custom Setting
f9 (Customize command dials) >
Aperture setting to use lens
aperture ring to adjust aperture.
• Exposure mode S selected with
A selected for shutter speed.
Photos are out of focus.
• Rotate focus-mode selector to S
or C.
• Camera unable to focus using
autofocus: use manual focus or
focus lock.
• Shutter-release button can not be
used to focus when Tripod is
selected in live view mode. Use
the AF-ON button to focus.
Page
–
41, 47
327
118
72
78, 81
96
n
403
Problem
Solution
Page
Flash in use. Flash sync speed can
be selected using Custom Setting
e1 (Flash sync speed); when using
optional SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or
SB-R200 Speedlight, choose 1/
320 s (Auto FP) or 1/250 s (Auto
FP) for full range of shutter speeds.
305
Focus does not lock when
Camera is in focus mode C: use AE-L/
shutter-release button is
AF-L button to lock focus.
pressed halfway.
79
Image size can not be
changed.
64
Full range of shutter
speeds not available.
Image quality set to NEF (RAW).
• Unlock focus selector lock.
• Auto-area AF selected for focus
mode: choose another mode.
• The camera is in playback mode.
Can not select focus point
• The camera is in menu operation.
• Press shutter-release button
halfway to turn monitor off or
activate exposure meters.
n
404
Camera is slow to record
photos.
Turn long exposure noise reduction
off.
Photos not recorded in
live view mode.
• Sound of mirror clicking down
when shutter-release button was
pressed halfway in hand-held
mode was mistaken for sound of
shutter.
• Unless Release is chosen for
Custom Setting a2 (AF-S priority
selection), shutter release is
disabled if camera is unable to
focus when focus mode S is
selected in hand-held mode.
76
74
217
259
48
277
95
95, 284
Problem
Randomly-spaced bright
pixels (“noise”) appear in
photos.
Solution
Page
• Choose lower ISO sensitivity or
106, 278
turn high ISO noise reduction on.
• Shutter speed is slower than 1 s:
277
use long exposure noise
reduction.
• Camera is in focus mode C.
• Center focus point is not selected
for single-point AF or dynamicarea AF.
• Off selected for Custom Setting
AF-assist illuminator does
a9 (Built-in AF-assist
not light.
illuminator).
• Illuminator has turned off
automatically. Illuminator may
become hot with continued use;
wait for lamp to cool down.
72
74
290
—
Photos are blotched or
smeared.
• Clean lens.
• Clean low-pass filter.
—
392
140
Colors are unnatural.
• Adjust white balance to match
light source.
• Adjust Set Picture Control
settings.
160
n
405
Problem
Can not measure white
balance.
Solution
Subject is too dark or too bright.
Image can not be selected
as source for preset white Image was not created with D700.
balance.
• NEF (RAW) or NEF+JPEG image
quality option selected for image
White balance bracketing
quality.
unavailable.
• Multiple exposure mode is in
effect.
154
64
202
A (auto) is selected for sharpening,
contrast, or saturation. For
consistent results over a series of
photographs, choose a setting
other than A (auto).
166
Metering can not be
changed.
• Autoexposure lock is in effect.
• Camera is in live view mode.
126
100
Exposure compensation
can not be used.
Choose exposure mode e, f, or g.
128
Reddish areas and uneven textures
may appear in long timeexposures. Turn long exposure
noise reduction on when shooting
at shutter speeds of “A”.
277
Textures are uneven.
Only one shot taken each
time shutter-release
button is pressed in
Lower built-in flash.
continuous shooting
mode.
406
151
Effects of Picture Control
differ from image to
image.
Reddish areas appear in
photos.
n
Page
187
❚❚ Playback
Problem
Solution
Page
Flashing areas appear
in images
Press 1 or 3 to choose photo
Shooting data appear
information displayed, or change
on images
settings for Display mode.
A graph appears
during playback.
NEF (RAW) image is
not played back.
Photo was taken at image quality of NEF
+ JPEG.
Some photos are not
displayed during
Select All for Playback folder.
playback.
220, 264
66
263
• Select On for Rotate tall.
• Photo was taken with Off selected for
Auto image rotation.
• Photo is displayed in image review.
• Camera was pointed up or down
when photo was taken.
265
336
Can not delete photo. Photo is protected: remove protection.
235
Message is displayed
stating that no
Select All for Playback folder.
images are available
for playback.
263
Can not change print
Memory card is full: delete photos.
order.
47
Photo is in NEF (RAW) format. Transfer
Can not select photo
to computer and print using supplied
for printing.
software or Capture NX 2.
243
Photo is not
displayed on TV.
333
“Tall” (portrait)
orientation photos
are displayed in
“wide” (landscape)
orientation.
Choose correct video mode.
Photo is not displayed
Confirm that HDMI cable (available
on high-definition
separately) is connected.
video device.
219
336
n
257
407
Problem
NEF (RAW) photos
not displayed in
Capture NX.
Solution
Page
Update to Capture NX 2.
388
Image sensor cleaning changes the
position of dust on the low-pass filter.
Dust off reference data recorded before
image sensor cleaning is performed can
Image Dust Off option not be used with photographs taken
in Capture NX 2 does
after image sensor cleaning is
not have desired
performed. Dust off reference data
effect.
recorded after image sensor cleaning is
performed can not be used with
photographs taken before image sensor
cleaning is performed.
337
Third-party software does not display
effects of Picture Controls, active Dlighting, or vignette control. Use
Capture NX 2 (available separately).
—
The camera is not compatible with
Can not copy picture
Windows 2000 Professional. Use card
to computer using
reader to copy pictures from memory
Nikon Transfer.
card.
—
Computer displays
NEF (RAW) images
differently from
camera.
❚❚ Miscellaneous
Problem
Date of recording is
not correct.
n
408
Solution
Page
Set camera clock.
38
Some options are not available at certain
Menu item can not be combinations of settings or when no
memory card is inserted. Note that Battery
selected.
info option is not available when camera is
powered by an optional AC adapter.
340
Error Messages
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in
the viewfinder, control panel, and monitor.
Indicator
Control Viewpanel finder
B
(blinks)
H
d
H
d
(blinks) (blinks)
Problem
Solution
Page
Lens aperture ring is
not set to minimum
aperture.
Set ring to minimum
aperture (largest
f-number).
37
Low battery.
Ready a fully-charged
spare battery.
46
• Battery exhausted.
• Recharge or replace
battery.
• Battery can not be
used.
• Contact Nikonauthorized service
representative.
• An extremely
• Replace the battery,
xxiii, 32,
exhausted
or recharge the
34
rechargeable Li-ion
battery if the
rechargeable Li-ion
battery or a thirdparty battery is
battery is exhausted.
inserted either in the
camera or in the
optional MB-D10
battery pack.
n
409
Indicator
Control Viewpanel finder
B
—
(blinks)
F
—
Problem
Solution
Page
Camera clock is not set. Set camera clock.
38
No lens attached, or
non-CPU lens attached
Aperture value will be
without specifying
displayed if maximum
maximum aperture.
Aperture shown in
aperture is specified.
stops from maximum
aperture.
210
2 4 Camera unable to focus
Focus manually.
(blinks) using autofocus.
• Use a lower ISO
sensitivity
81
106
• In exposure mode:
q
n
410
Subject too bright;
photo will be
overexposed.
e Use optional ND
filter
387
f Increase shutter
speed
118
g Choose a smaller
aperture (larger
f-number)
119
Indicator
Control Viewpanel finder
Problem
Solution
• Use a higher ISO
sensitivity
Page
106
• In exposure mode:
r
A
(blinks)
Subject too dark; photo
will be underexposed.
A selected in
exposure mode f.
e Use flash
f Lower shutter
speed
185
g Choose a larger
aperture (smaller
f-number)
119
Change shutter speed
or select manual
exposure mode.
118
118, 121
n
411
Indicator
Control Viewpanel finder
Problem
Solution
Optional flash unit that
Change flash mode
c does not support i-TTL
setting on optional
(blinks) flash control attached
flash unit.
(blinks)
and set to TTL.
—
Check photo in
If indicator blinks for 3s
c
monitor; if
after flash fires, photo
(blinks)
underexposed, adjust
may be underexposed.
settings and try again.
Memory insufficient to • Reduce quality or
size.
record further photos
n j
at current settings, or • Delete photographs.
(blinks) (blinks)
camera has run out of • Insert new memory
file or folder numbers.
card.
O
(blinks)
n
412
Camera malfunction.
Release shutter. If error
persists or appears
frequently, consult
Nikon-authorized
service representative.
Page
381
427
64, 69
262
41
—
Indicator
Monitor
No memory
card.
Control
panel
Problem
Camera cannot
S detect memory
card.
• Error accessing
memory card.
Solution
Page
Turn camera off and
confirm that card is
correctly inserted.
41
• Use Nikonapproved card.
390
This memory
• Check that contacts
card cannot
—
are clean. If card is
be used.
Card may be
damaged, contact
(blinks)
damaged.
retailer or Nikon
Insert
representative.
another card.
• Unable to create • Delete files or insert 41, 262
new folder.
new memory card.
n
413
Indicator
Monitor
Control
panel
Problem
Solution
This card is not
Memory card has Format memory card
formatted.
C
not been formatted or insert new
Format the
(blinks)
for use in camera. memory card.
card.
Folder
contains no
images.
All images are
hidden.
File does not
contain image
data.
n
414
Page
41,43
No images on
memory card or in
folder(s) selected
for playback.
Select folder
containing images
from Playback folder
41, 263
menu or insert
different memory
card.
—
All photos in
current folder are
hidden.
No images can be
played back until
another folder has
been selected or
Hide image used to
allow at least one
image to be
displayed.
—
File has been
created or modified
using a computer File can not be played
or different make of back on camera.
camera, or file is
corrupt.
—
263
—
Indicator
Monitor
Cannot select
this file.
Control
panel
—
Problem
Solution
Memory card does
Images created with
not contain images
other devices can not
that can be
be retouched.
retouched.
Check printer. To
resume, select
Continue (if
available).
Page
350
244 *
Check printer.
—
Printer error.
Check paper.
—
Insert paper of
Paper in printer is
correct size and select
not of selected size.
Continue.
244 *
Paper jam.
—
Paper is jammed in Clear jam and select
printer.
Continue.
244 *
Out of paper.
—
Printer is out of
paper.
Insert paper of
selected size and
select Continue.
244 *
n
415
Indicator
Monitor
Control
panel
Problem
416
Page
Check ink
supply.
—
Ink error.
Check ink. To resume,
select Continue.
244 *
Out of ink.
—
Printer is out of ink.
Replace ink and
select Continue.
244 *
* See printer manual for more information.
n
Solution
Appendix
The Appendix covers the following topics:
• Defaults ................................................................................................ pg. 418
• Memory Card Capacity ................................................................. pg. 423
• Exposure Program .......................................................................... pg. 426
• Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range .................................... pg. 427
n
417
Defaults
The following defaults are restored either with a two-button reset
or using Reset shooting menu or Reset custom settings.
❚❚ Defaults Restored with a Two-Button Reset (pg. 196) 1
Option
Default
ISO sensitivity (pg. 106)
200
Image quality (pg. 64)
JPEG normal
L
Shooting Image size (pg. 69)
menu 2 White balance (pg. 140)
Auto
Fine tuning (pg. 143)
Off
5000 K
Choose color temp. (pg. 147)
Focus point (pg. 76)
Center
Exposure mode (pg. 114)
Programmed auto
Flexible program (pg. 117)
Off
AE lock hold (pg. 126)
Off
Off
Other Exposure compensation (pg. 128)
settings Flash compensation (pg. 190)
Off
Bracketing (pg. 130)
Off
Flash mode (pg. 188)
Front-curtain sync
FV lock (pg. 192)
Off
Multiple exposure (pg. 198)
Off
1 If the current Picture Control has been modified, existing settings for
the Picture Control will also be restored.
2 Only the settings in the bank currently selected using the Shooting
menu bank option will be reset (pg. 269). Settings in all other banks are
unaffected.
n
418
❚❚ Defaults Restored with Reset Shooting Menu (pg. 271) 1
Option
File naming (pg. 274)
Image quality (pg. 64)
Image size (pg. 69)
Image area (pg. 58)
Auto DX crop (pg. 58)
Choose image area (pg. 59)
JPEG compression (pg. 67)
NEF (RAW) recording (pg. 67)
Type (pg. 67)
NEF (RAW) bit depth (pg. 68)
White balance (pg. 140)
Fine tuning (pg. 143)
Choose color temp. (pg. 147)
Set Picture Control (pg. 160)
Color space (pg. 181)
Active D-lighting (pg. 180)
Vignette control (pg. 276)
Long exp. NR (pg. 277)
High ISO NR (pg. 278)
ISO sensitivity settings (pg. 106)
ISO sensitivity (pg. 106)
ISO sensitivity auto control (pg. 108)
Live view
Live view mode (pg. 90)
Release mode (pg. 91)
Multiple exposure (pg. 198)
Interval timer shooting (pg. 203)
Default
DSC
JPEG normal
Large
On
FX format (36 x 24)
Size priority
Lossless compressed
12-bit
Auto
Off
5000K
Standard
sRGB
Off
Normal
Off
Normal
200
Off
Hand-held
Single frame
Reset 2
Reset 3
1 With the exception of Multiple exposure and Interval timer
shooting, only settings in the current shooting menu bank will be
reset.
2 Applies to all banks. Reset shooting menu can not be selected while
shooting is in progress.
3 Applies to all banks. Shooting ends when reset is performed.
n
419
❚❚ Defaults Restored with Reset Custom Settings (pg. 282) *
a1
a2
a3
a4
a5
a6
a7
a8
a9
a10
b1
b2
b3
b4
b5
b6
c1
c2
c3
c4
n
420
Option
AF-C priority selection (pg. 283)
AF-S priority selection (pg. 284)
Dynamic AF area (pg. 285)
Focus tracking with lock-on (pg. 287)
AF activation (pg. 287)
AF point illumination (pg. 288)
Focus point wrap-around (pg. 288)
AF point selection (pg. 289)
Built-in AF-assist illuminator (pg. 290)
AF-ON for MB-D10 (pg. 291)
ISO sensitivity step value (pg. 292)
EV steps for exposure cntrl. (pg. 292)
Exp comp/fine tune (pg. 292)
Easy exposure compensation (pg. 293)
Center-weighted area (pg. 294)
Fine tune optimal exposure (pg. 294)
Matrix metering
Center-weighted
Spot metering
Shutter-release button AE-L (pg. 296)
Auto meter-off delay (pg. 296)
Self-timer delay (pg. 297)
Monitor off delay (pg. 297)
Playback
Menus
Shooting info display
Image review
Default
Release
Focus
9 points
Normal
Shutter/AF-ON
Auto
No wrap
51 points
On
AF-ON
1/3 step
1/3 step
1/3 step
Off
ø 12 mm
0
0
0
Off
6s
10 s
10 s
20 s
10 s
4s
* Only the settings in the bank currently selected using the Custom
setting bank option will be reset (pg. 282). Settings in all other banks
are unaffected.
d1
d2
d3
d4
d5
d6
d7
d8
d9
d10
d11
e1
e2
e3
e4
e5
e6
e7
Option
Beep (pg. 298)
Viewfinder grid display (pg. 298)
Screen tips (pg. 298)
CL mode shooting speed (pg. 299)
Max. continuous release (pg. 299)
File number sequence (pg. 300)
Shooting info display (pg. 301)
LCD illumination (pg. 302)
Exposure delay mode (pg. 302)
MB-D10 battery type (pg. 302)
Battery order (pg. 304)
Flash sync speed (pg. 305)
Flash shutter speed (pg. 308)
Flash cntrl for built-in flash (pg. 309)
Modeling flash (pg. 315)
Auto bracketing set (pg. 315)
Auto bracketing (Mode M) (pg. 316)
Bracketing order (pg. 317)
Default
High
Off
On
3 fps
100
On
Auto
Off
Off
LR6 (AA alkaline)
Use MB-D10 batteries first
1/250 s
1/60 s
TTL
On
AE & flash
Flash/speed
MTR > under > over
n
421
Option
f1 D switch (pg. 318)
Multi selector center button (pg. 318)
f2
Shooting mode
Playback mode
f3 Multi selector (pg. 319)
f4 Photo info/playback (pg. 320)
Assign FUNC. button (pg. 320)
FUNC. button press
f5
FUNC. button+dials
Assign preview button (pg. 324)
f6
Preview button press
Preview+command dials
Assign AE-L/AF-L button (pg. 325)
f7
AE-L/AF-L button press
AE-L/AF-L+command dials
Shutter spd & aperture lock (pg. 326)
f8
Shutter speed lock
Aperture lock
Customize command dials (pg. 326)
Reverse rotation (pg. 326)
f9
Change main/sub (pg. 326)
Aperture setting (pg. 327)
Menus and playback (pg. 327)
f10 Release button to use dial (pg. 328)
f11 No memory card? (pg. 329)
f12 Reverse indicators (pg. 330)
n
422
Default
LCD backlight (D)
Select center focus point
Thumbnail on/off
Do nothing
Info /Playback
None
Auto bracketing
Preview
None
AE/AF lock
None
Off
Off
No
Off
Sub-command dial
Off
No
Enable release
Memory Card Capacity
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures
that can be stored on a 2 GB SanDisk Extreme IV (SDCFX4) card at
different image quality, image size, and image area settings.
❚❚ FX Format (36 × 24) Image Area 1
Image quality
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
14-bit
TIFF (RGB)
JPEG fine 4
JPEG normal 4
JPEG basic 4
Image size
File size 2
No. of images 2 Buffer capacity 3
—
13.3 MB
100
23
—
16.3 MB
77
20
—
11.0 MB
138
26
—
13.8 MB
114
23
—
18.8 MB
100
19
—
24.7 MB
77
17
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
35.9 MB
20.7 MB
10.0 MB
5.7 MB
3.2 MB
1.4 MB
2.9 MB
1.6 MB
0.7 MB
1.4 MB
0.8 MB
0.4 MB
53
95
211
279
496
1000
548
976
2000
1000
1800
3900
17
20
28
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
n
423
❚❚ DX Format (24 × 16) Image Area 1
Image quality
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW), Lossless
compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Compressed, 14-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
12-bit
NEF (RAW),
Uncompressed,
14-bit
TIFF (RGB)
JPEG fine 4
JPEG normal 4
JPEG basic 4
n
424
Image size
File size 2
No. of images 2 Buffer capacity 3
—
5.7 MB
229
65
—
7.0 MB
177
46
—
4.7 MB
312
95
—
6.0 MB
260
63
—
8.1 MB
229
39
—
10.7 MB
177
31
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
L
M
S
15.3 MB
8.8 MB
4.3 MB
2.5 MB
1.4 MB
0.6 MB
1.2 MB
0.7 MB
0.3 MB
0.6 MB
0.3 MB
0.2 MB
124
220
480
637
1100
2400
1200
2000
4400
2400
3900
7800
23
29
59
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
100
1 If Auto DX crop is selected for Image area, DX-format images will be recorded
with DX lenses, FX-format images with other lenses.
2 All figures are approximate. File size varies with scene recorded.
3 Maximum number of exposures that can be stored in memory buffer. Drops if
Optimal quality is selected for JPEG compression, ISO sensitivity is set to P
or higher, High ISO NR is on when auto ISO sensitivity control is on or ISO
sensitivity is set to 2000 or higher, or long exposure noise reduction, active Dlighting, or image authentication is on.
4 Figures assume JPEG compression is set to Size priority. Selecting Optimal
quality increases the file size of JPEG images; number of images and buffer
capacity drop accordingly.
A d5—Max. Continuous Release (pg. 299)
The maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst
can be set to any amount between 1 and 100.
n
425
Exposure Program
The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the
following graph:
12
14
f/1
16 15
f/1.4
1
/3
17
17
18
19
f/5.6
f/8
20
f/2.8
f/1.4 − f/16
Aperture
f/2
f/4
21
f/11
22
f/16
23
f/22
f/32
13
11
9
10
8
7
5
6
3
2
4
0
1
-1
-3
-2
]
V
[E
-4
ISO 200; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and minimum
aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF 50mm f/1.4 D)
30" 15" 8" 4"
2"
1"
2
4
8
15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000
Shutter speed
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with ISO
sensitivity; the above graph assumes an ISO sensitivity of ISO 200
equivalent. When matrix metering is used, values over 17 1/3 EV
are reduced to 17 1/3 EV.
n
426
Aperture, Sensitivity, and Flash Range
The range of the built-in flash varies with sensitivity (ISO
equivalency) and aperture.
200
1.4
2
2.8
4
5.6
8
11
16
Aperture at ISO equivalent of
400
800
1600 3200
2
2.8
4
5.6
2.8
4
5.6
8
4
5.6
8
11
5.6
8
11
16
8
11
16
22
11
16
22
32
16
22
32
—
22
32
—
—
Range
6400
8
11
16
22
32
—
—
—
m
1.0–8.5
0.7–6.1
0.6–4.2
0.6–3.0
0.6–2.1
0.6–1.5
0.6–1.1
0.6–0.8
ft.
3ft. 3in.–27ft. 11in.
2ft. 4in.–20ft.
2ft.–13ft. 9in.
2ft.–9ft. 10in.
2ft.–6ft. 11in.
2ft.–4ft. 11in.
2ft.–3ft. 7in.
2ft.–2ft. 7in.
The built-in flash has a minimum range of 0.6 m (2 ft.).
In programmed auto exposure mode (mode e), the maximum
aperture (minimum f-number) is limited according to ISO
sensitivity, as shown below:
Maximum aperture at ISO equivalent of:
200
3.5
400
4
800
5
1600
5.6
3200
7.1
6400
8
For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400),
aperture is stopped down by half an f-stop. If the maximum
aperture of the lens is smaller than given above, the maximum
value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.
n
427
Specifications
❚❚ Nikon D700 Digital Camera
Type
Type
Lens mount
Single-lens reflex digital camera
Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)
Effective pixels
Effective pixels
12.1 million
Image sensor
Image sensor
Total pixels
Dust-reduction system
Storage
Image size (pixels)
File format
Picture Control System
Media
File system
n
428
36.0 × 23.9 mm CMOS sensor (Nikon FX format)
12.87 million
Image sensor cleaning, Image Dust Off reference data
(optional Capture NX 2 software required)
• FX format (36 × 24) image area
4,256 × 2,832 (L) 3,184 × 2,120 (M) 2,128 × 1,416 (S)
• DX format (24 × 16) image area
2,784 × 1,848 (L) 2,080 × 1,384 (M) 1,392 × 920 (S)
• NEF (RAW): 12 or 14 bit, lossless compressed, compressed,
or uncompressed
• TIFF (RGB)
• JPEG: JPEG-Baseline compliant with fine (approx. 1 : 4),
normal (approx. 1 : 8), or basic (approx. 1 : 16)
compression (Size priority); Optimal quality
compression available
• NEF (RAW)+JPEG: Single photograph recorded in both NEF
(RAW) and JPEG formats
Can be selected from Standard, Neutral, Vivid,
Monochrome; storage for up to nine custom Picture
Controls
Type I CompactFlash memory cards (UDMA compliant)
DCF (Design Rule for Camera File System) 2.0, DPOF
(Digital Print Order Format), Exif 2.21 (Exchangeable Image
File Format for Digital Still Cameras), PictBridge
Viewfinder
Viewfinder
Frame coverage
Magnification
Eyepoint
Diopter adjustment
Focusing screen
Reflex mirror
Depth-of-field preview
Lens aperture
Lens
Compatible lenses
Shutter
Type
Speed
Flash sync speed
Release
Release mode
Eye-level pentaprism single-lens reflex viewfinder
Approx. 95% horizontal and 95% vertical
Approx. 0.72 × (50-mm f/1.4 lens at infinity, –1.0 m–1)
18 mm (–1.0 m–1)
–3–+1 m–1
Ships with type B BriteView Clear Matte Mark VI screen
with AF area brackets (framing grid can be displayed)
Quick return
When depth of field preview button is pressed, lens
aperture is stopped down to value selected by user (g and
h modes) or by camera (e and f modes)
Instant return, electronically controlled
• DX AF Nikkor: All functions supported
• Type G or D AF Nikkor: All functions supported (PC MicroNikkor does not support some functions). IX Nikkor
lenses not supported.
• Other AF Nikkor: All functions supported except 3D color
matrix metering II. Lenses for F3AF not supported.
• AI-P Nikkor: All functions supported except 3D color matrix
metering II
• Non-CPU: Can be used in exposure modes g and h;
electronic rangefinder can be used if maximum aperture
is f/5.6 or faster; color matrix metering and aperture
value display supported if user provides lens data (AI
lenses only)
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane shutter
– 30 s in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV, bulb, X250
X= 1/250 s; synchronizes with shutter at 1/320 s or slower
(flash range drops at speeds between 1/250 and 1/320 s)
1/8000
S (single frame), CL (continuous low speed), CH (continuous
high speed), a (live view), E (self-timer), MUP (mirror up)
n
429
Release
Frame advance rate
Self-timer
Exposure
Metering
Metering method
• With EN-EL3e: From 1 to up to 5 fps (CL); up to 5 fps (CH)
• With optional MB-D10 multi-power battery pack and EN-EL4a/ENEL4 or AA batteries or with optional EH-5a/EH-5 AC adapter: From 1
to up to 7 fps (CL); up to 8 fps (CH)
Can be selected from 2, 5, 10, and 20 s duration
TTL exposure metering using 1,005-segment RGB sensor
• Matrix: 3D color matrix metering II (type G and D lenses);
color matrix metering II (other CPU lenses); color matrix
metering available with non-CPU lenses if user provides
lens data
• Center-weighted: Weight of 75% given to 8, 12, 15, or
20-mm circle in center of frame, or weighting based on
average of entire frame (non-CPU lenses use 12-mm
circle or average of entire frame)
• Spot: Meters 4-mm circle (about 1.5% of frame) centered
on selected focus point (on center focus point when nonCPU lens is used)
Range (ISO 100, f/1.4 lens, • Matrix or center-weighted metering: 0–20 EV
20 °C/68 °F)
• Spot metering: 2–20 EV
Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and AI
Exposure mode
Programmed auto with flexible program (e); shutterpriority auto (f ); aperture priority auto (g); manual (h)
Exposure compensation –5 – +5 EV in increments of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV
Exposure bracketing
2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV
Flash bracketing
2–9 frames in steps of 1/3, 1/2, 2/3, or 1 EV
White balance bracketing 2–9 frames in steps of 1, 2, or 3
Exposure lock
Luminosity locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L button
n
430
Exposure
ISO sensitivity
ISO 200 – 6400 in steps of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV. Can also be set to
(Recommended Exposure approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, or 1 EV (ISO 100 equivalent) below ISO
Index)
200 or to approx. 0.3, 0.5, 0.7, 1 EV, or 2 EV (ISO 25600
equivalent) above ISO 6400.
Active D-Lighting
Can be selected from Auto, High, Normal, or Low
Focus
Autofocus
Detection range
Lens servo
Focus point
AF-area mode
Focus lock
Flash
Built-in flash
Nikon Multi-CAM 3500FX autofocus module with TTL
phase detection, fine-tuning, 51 focus points (including 15
cross-type sensors), and AF-assist illuminator (range
approx. 0.5–3 m/1 ft. 8 in.–9 ft. 10 in.)
–1 – +19 EV (ISO 100, 20 °C/68 °F)
• Autofocus: Single-servo AF (S); continuous-servo AF (C);
predictive focus tracking automatically activated
according to subject status
• Manual (M): Electronic range finding supported
Can be selected from 51 or 11 focus points
Single-point AF, dynamic-area AF, auto-area AF
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button
halfway (single-servo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L button
Manual pop-up with button release and a Guide Number
of 17/56 (m/ft, ISO 200, 20 °C/68 °F; GN at ISO 100 is 12/39)
or 18/59 in manual mode (m/ft, ISO 200, 20 °C/68 °F; GN at
ISO 100 is 13/43)
n
431
Flash
Flash control
Flash mode
Flash compensation
Flash-ready indicator
Accessory shoe
Nikon Creative Lighting
System (CLS)
Sync terminal
White balance
White balance
Live view
Modes
Autofocus
n
432
• TTL: i-TTL balanced fill-flash and standard i-TTL flash for
digital SLR using 1,005-segment RGB sensor are available
with built-in flash and SB-900, SB-800, SB-600, or SB-400
• Auto aperture: Available with SB-900, SB-800 and CPU lens
• Non-TTL auto: Supported flash units include SB-900,
SB-800, SB-28, SB-27, and SB-22s
• Distance-priority manual: Available with SB-900 and SB-800
Front curtain sync, slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-eye
reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync
–3 – +1 EV in increments of 1/3, 1/2, or 1 EV
Lights when built-in flash or Speedlight such as SB-900,
SB-800, SB-600, SB-400, SB-80DX, SB-28DX, or SB-50DX is
fully charged; blinks after flash is fired at full output
Standard ISO 518 hot-shoe contact with safety lock
Advanced Wireless Lighting supported with built-in flash,
SB-900, SB-800, or SU-800 as commander and SB-900,
SB-800, SB-600, or SB-R200 as remotes; Auto FP HighSpeed Sync and modeling illumination supported with all
CLS-compatible flash units except SB-400; Flash Color
Information Communication and FV lock supported with
all CLS-compatible flash units
Standard ISO 519 terminal
Auto (TTL white-balance with main image sensor and
1,005 segment RGB sensor); 7 manual modes with finetuning; color temperature setting
Hand-held, tripod
• Hand-held: Phase-detection AF with 51 focus points
(including 15 cross-type sensors)
• Tripod: Contrast-detect AF anywhere in frame
Monitor
Monitor
Playback
Playback
Interface
USB
Video output
HDMI output
Ten-pin remote terminal
Supported languages
Supported languages
Power source
Battery
Battery pack
AC adapter
Tripod socket
Tripod socket
3-in., 920k-dot (VGA), low-temperature polysilicon TFT LCD
with 170 ° viewing angle, 100% frame coverage, and
brightness adjustment
Full-frame and thumbnail (four or nine images) playback
with playback zoom, slide show, highlights, histogram
display, auto image rotation, and image comment (up to
36 characters)
Hi-Speed USB
Can be selected from NTSC and PAL
Type C mini-pin HDMI connector; camera monitor turns off
when HDMI cable is connected
Can be used to connect remote control or GPS device
compliant with NMEA0183 version 2.01 or 3.01 (requires
optional MC-35 GPS adapter cord and cable with D-sub 9pin connector)
Chinese (Simplified and Traditional), Dutch, English,
Finnish, French, German, Italian, Japanese, Korean, Polish,
Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Swedish
One rechargeable Li-ion EN-EL3e battery
Optional MB-D10 multi-power battery pack with one
rechargeable Nikon EN-EL3e, EN-EL4a, or EN-EL4 Li-ion
battery or eight AA alkaline, NiMH, lithium, or nickelmanganese batteries; EN-EL4a/EN-EL4 and AA batteries
available separately; A BL-3 battery-chamber cover is
required when using EN-EL4a or EN-EL4 batteries.
EH-5a or EH-5 AC adapter (available separately)
1/ 4
in. (ISO 1222)
n
433
Dimensions/weight
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Weight
Approx. 147 × 123 × 77 mm (5.8 × 4.8 × 3.0 in.)
Approx. 995 g (2.19 lb.) without battery, memory card,
body cap, or monitor cover
Operating environment
Temperature
0–40 °C (32–104 °F)
Humidity
Less than 85% (no condensation)
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery
operating at an ambient temperature of 20 °C (68 °F).
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and
software described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will
not be held liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual
may contain.
MH-18a quick charger
Rated input
Rated output
Supported batteries
Charging time
Operating temperature
Dimensions (W × H × D)
Length of cord
Weight
AC 100–240 V (50/60 Hz)
DC 8.4 V/900 mA
Nikon EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery
Approx. 2 hours and 15 minutes when battery is fully
discharged
0–40 °C (+32–104 °F)
Approx. 90 × 35 × 58 mm (3.5 × 1.4 × 2.3 in.)
Approx. 1800 mm (5 ft. 11 in.)
Approx. 80 g (2.8 oz.), excluding power cable
EN-EL3e rechargeable Li-ion battery
Type
Rechargeable lithium-ion battery
Rated capacity
7.4 V/1500 mAh
Dimensions (W × H × D) Approx. 39.5 × 56 × 21 mm (1.6 × 2.2 × 0.8 in.)
Weight
Approx. 80 g (2.8 oz.), excluding terminal cover
n
434
A Supported Standards
• DCF Version 2.0: The Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF) is a standard
widely used in the digital camera industry to ensure compatibility
among different makes of camera.
• DPOF: Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that
allows pictures to be printed from print orders stored on the memory
card.
• Exif version 2.21: The camera supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File
Format for Digital Still Cameras) version 2.21, a standard in which
information stored with photographs is used for optimal color
reproduction when the images are output on Exif-compliant printers.
• PictBridge: A standard developed through cooperation with the digital
camera and printer industries, allowing photographs to be output
directly to a printer without first transferring them to a computer.
• HDMI: High-Definition Multimedia Interface is a standard for multimedia
interfaces used in consumer electronics and AV devices capable of
transmitting audiovisual data and control signals to HDMI-compliant
devices via a single cable connection (the camera uses a type C mini-pin
connector).
n
435
A
Battery Life
The number of shots that can be taken with fully-charged batteries varies
with the condition of the battery, temperature, and how the camera is
used. In the case of AA batteries, capacity also varies with make and
storage conditions; some batteries can not be used. Sample figures for
the camera and optional MB-D10 multi-power battery pack are given
below.
• CIPA standard 1
One EN-EL3e battery (camera): Approximately 1000 shots
One EN-EL3e battery (MB-D10): Approximately 1000 shots
One EN-EL4a battery (MB-D10): Approximately 1900 shots
Eight AA batteries (MB-D10): Approximately 700 shots
• Nikon standard 2
One EN-EL3e battery (camera): Approximately 2500 shots
One EN-EL3e battery (MB-D10): Approximately 2500 shots
One EN-EL4a battery (MB-D10): Approximately 4300shots
Eight AA batteries (MB-D10): Approximately 1000 shots
1 Measured at 23 °C/73.4 °F (±2 °C/3.6 °F) with an AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–
5.6G ED lens under the following test conditions: lens cycled from infinity
to minimum range and one photograph taken at default settings once
every 30 s; flash fired once every other shot. Live view not used.
2 Measured at 20 °C/68 °F with an AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G ED lens under
the following test conditions: image quality set to JPEG basic, image size
set to M (medium), shutter speed 1/250 s, shutter-release button pressed
halfway for three seconds and focus cycled from infinity to minimum
range three times; six shots are then taken in succession and monitor
turned on for five seconds and then turned off; cycle repeated once
exposure meters have turned off.
n
436
The following can reduce battery life:
• Using the monitor
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway
• Repeated autofocus operations
• Taking NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) photographs
• Slow shutter speeds
• Using the optional WT-4 wireless transmitter
• Using VR (vibration reduction) mode with VR lenses
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL3e
batteries:
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery
performance.
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge
if left unused.
n
437
Index
Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in bold.
Symbols
D Switch, 318
K (Single-point AF), 74, 75
I(Dynamic-area AF), 74, 75, 285
H(Auto-area AF), 74, 75
S, 84
CL, 84, 86, 91, 299
CH, 84, 86
a, 89
E (Self-timer), 102
MUP, 104
a (Matrix), 112, 113, 295
Z (Center-weighted), 112, 294, 295
b (Spot), 112, 295
e (Programmed auto), 116
f (Shutter-priority auto), 118
g (Aperture-priority auto), 119
h (Manual), 121
Q (Help), 26, 31
t (Memory buffer), 53
L (Preset manual), 141, 148
Numerics
1,005-segment RGB sensor, 140
3D color matrix metering II, 113
3D-tracking, 74, 75, 286
A
AC adapter, 385
Accessories, 385
Active D-Lighting, 179
Active folder, 272
AE-L, 79, 126, 325
AF, 72, 74, 76, 80
AF activation, 287
AF area brackets, 45, 94
AF assist, 53, 290, 375
AF fine tune, 347
AF point illumination, 288
AF point selection, 289
AF-area mode, 74
auto-area AF, 74, 75
dynamic-area AF, 74, 75, 285
single-point AF, 74, 75
438
AF-C priority selection, 283
B button, 73, 96, 287, 291
AF-On for MB-D10, 291
AF-S priority selection, 284
After delete, 265
A-M switch, 36
Amber, 144, 358
Aperture, 119–122
maximum, 82, 210
minimum, 37, 114
Aperture-priority auto, 119
Assign AE-L/AF-L button, 325
Assign FUNC. button, 320
Assign preview button, 324
Auto bracketing, 130, 315, 316
Auto bracketing (Mode M), 316
Auto bracketing set, 315
AE & flash, 315
AE only, 315
Flash only, 315
WB bracketing, 315
Auto DX Crop, 58
Auto FP high-speed sync., 305, 306, 377
Auto image rotation, 336
Auto meter off, 48, 296
Auto meter-off delay, 296
Auto-area AF, 74, 75
Autofocus, 72, 74, 76, 78, 80
B
Backlight, 48, 302
Battery, 32, 34, 46, 302, 304, 340
charging, 32
pack, 302, 304, 341, 385
Battery info, 340
Battery order, 304
Beep, 298
Body cap, 5, 36, 388
Bracketing, 130, 315, 316
exposure, 130, 315, 316
flash, 130, 315, 316
white balance, 130, 135
Bracketing order, 317
Built-in AF-assist illuminator, 290
Bulb, 122, 124
Burst, 200, 299, 321
C
C, 72, 79, 283, 285
Camera Control Pro 2, 239, 388
Capture NX 2, 64, 172, 337, 388
Center-weighted, 112, 294, 295
Center-weighted area, 294
CL mode shooting speed, 299
Clean image sensor, 392
Clock, 39, 334
battery, 40
CLS, 377
Color balance, 358
Color space, 181
Adobe RGB, 181
sRGB, 181
Color temperature, 141, 142, 147
CompactFlash, 41, 332, 390
Computer, 238
Control panel, 8
Copyright information, 343
CPU lens, 37, 370
Creative Lighting System, 377
Custom setting bank, 282
Custom Settings, 280
Customize command dials, 326
D
Date and time, 39, 334
Daylight saving time, 39, 334
DCF version 2.0, 182, 435
Default settings, 196, 271, 282, 418
restoring, 196, 271, 282
Delete, 56, 236, 262
all images, 262
current image, 56, 236
selected images, 262
Delete, 262
All, 262
Selected, 262
Depth-of-field, 115
Depth-of-field preview button, 115, 315,
324
Digital Print Order Format, 243, 249, 253,
435
Diopter, 45, 386
adjustment control, 45
Display mode, 264
D-Lighting, 354
DPOF, 243, 249, 253, 435
Dust off ref photo, 337
DX format (24x16), 59
Dynamic AF area, 285
51 points (3D-tracking), 286
Dynamic-area AF, 74, 75, 285
E
Easy exposure compensation, 293
Electronic analog exposure display, 123
Ethernet, 242, 385
EV steps for exposure cntrl., 292
Exif version 2.21, 182, 435
Exp comp/fine tune, 292
Exposure, 111, 112, 126, 128
lock, 126
meters, 48, 296
mode, 114
aperture-priority auto, 119
manual, 121
programmed auto, 116
shutter-priority auto, 118
program, 426
Exposure bracketing, 130, 315, 316
Exposure compensation, 128
Exposure delay mode, 302
Eyepiece shutter lever, 45, 102, 205
F
File information, 221
File naming, 274
File number sequence, 300
Filter effects, 358
Skylight, 358
Warm filter, 358
Fine tune optimal exposure, 294
Firmware version, 348
Flash, 185, 188, 190, 192
bracketing, 130, 315, 316
compensation, 190
control, 184, 377
i-TTL balanced-fill flash for digital SLR,
184, 377
standard i-TTL flash for digital SLR,
184
mode, 188
439
Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in bold.
modeling, 115, 315
monitor pre-flash, 184, 193
range, 307, 427
ready indicator, 103, 185, 193
sync speed, 118, 305, 306
sync terminal, 384
Flash cntrl for built-in flash, 309
Commander mode, 311
Manual, 310
Repeating flash, 310
Flash shutter speed, 308
Flash sync speed, 305
Flexible program, 117
Fn button, 62, 131, 135, 193, 212, 320
f-number, 119, 120, 371
Focal length, 210, 374
Focal length scale, 37
Focal plane mark, 82
Focus, 71, 72, 74, 76, 78, 81
autofocus, 72, 74, 76, 80
contrast-detect, 90, 98
phase-detection, 90
electronic rangefinder, 82, 370, 372
indicator, 53, 82
lock, 78
mode, 72
continuous-servo AF, 72, 79, 283, 285
manual, 72, 81, 94
single-servo AF, 72, 78, 284
point, 74, 76, 97, 264, 285, 289
contrast-detect, 97
tracking, 73, 286, 287
3D, 74, 286
predictive, 72, 73
Focus point wrap-around, 288
Focus tracking with lock-on, 287
Focusing screen, 429
Format, 43, 332
Format memory card, 332
Front-curtain sync, 188
FV lock, 192
FX format (36x24), 59
G
GPS, 213, 229
connecting, 213
440
data, 214, 229
GPS, 213
GPS data, 229
H
HDMI, 257, 435
HDMI, 333
Help, 26, 31
HI, 107
Hide image, 263
High definition, 257, 333, 435
High ISO NR, 278
Highlights, 222, 264
Histogram, 223, 224, 264
I
Image area, 58, 69
Image area, 58, 61
Auto DX crop, 58, 61
Choose image area, 59, 61
FX format (36x24), 59
Image authentication, 342
Image comment, 335
Image Dust Off, 337
Image file, 435
Image overlay, 359
Image quality, 58
Image quality, 64
Image review, 264
Image size, 69
Image size, 69
Index print, 252
In-focus indicator, 53, 72
Information, 220, 264
Interval timer shooting, 203
Interval timer shooting, 203
ISO sensitivity, 105, 106, 108
ISO sensitivity settings, 107
ISO sensitivity, 107
ISO sensitivity auto control, 108
Maximum sensitivity, 108
Minimum shutter speed, 108
ISO sensitivity step value, 292
i-TTL, 184, 185, 311, 377
J
JPEG, 64, 67
JPEG basic, 64
JPEG compression, 67
Optimal quality, 67
Size priority, 67
JPEG fine, 64
JPEG normal, 64
L
L, 69
LAN, 385
Language, 38, 334
LCD, 48, 302, 332
LCD brightness, 332
LCD illumination, 302
Lens, 36, 210, 346, 347, 370
attaching, 36
cap, 37
cap, rear, 36, 37
compatible, 370
CPU, 37, 373
distance information, 184
focus mode switch, 36, 37
focus ring, 37, 81
mounting index, 37
non-CPU, 210
data, 211
removing, 37
Lens mount, 5, 82
Live view, 89–101
Live view, 89
Live view mode, 90
Hand-held, 90
Tripod, 90
Release mode, 91
Lo, 107
Local area network, 385
Lock mirror up for cleaning, 395
Long exp. NR, 277
M
M, 72, 81, 94, 121
M (medium), 69
Magenta, 144, 358
Manage Picture Control, 168
Manual, 72, 81, 94, 121
Matrix, 112, 113, 295
Max. continuous release, 299
MB-D10, 291, 302, 304, 341, 385
MB-D10 battery type, 302
Memory buffer, 53, 84, 87, 88
Memory card, 41, 332, 390
capacity of, 423
formatting, 43, 332
Metering, 112
center-weighted, 112, 294, 295
matrix, 112, 113, 295
selector, 51, 113
spot, 112, 295
Mired, 145
Mirror, 89, 104, 395
lock up for cleaning, 395
Modeling flash, 315
Monitor, 12, 55, 89, 218, 332
cover, 21
Monitor off delay, 297
Monochrome, 357
Black-and-white, 357
Cyanotype, 357
Sepia, 357
Mounting index, 37
Multi selector, 319
Multi selector center button, 318
Multiple exposure, 198
Multiple exposure, 198
My Menu, 364
Add items, 364
Rank items, 367
Remove items, 366
N
NEF, 64, 67
NEF (RAW), 64, 68
NEF (RAW) recording, 67
NEF (RAW) bit depth, 68
12-bit, 68
14-bit, 68
Type, 67
Compressed, 67
Lossless compressed, 67
Uncompressed], 67
Nikon Transfer, 238
No memory card?, 329
Non-CPU lens data, 210
O
Optional flash, 309, 320
Overview data, 230
P
Photo info, 220, 264
441
Menu items and options in the camera monitor are shown in bold.
Photo info/playback, 320
PictBridge, 244, 435
Picture angle, 58, 376
Picture Controls, 160
Playback, 55, 217
folder, 263
full-frame, 218
information, 220, 264
menu, 260
slide show, 266
thumbnail, 232
zoom, 234
Playback folder, 263
Predictive, 73
Print (DPOF), 249
Border, 251
Page size, 251
Start printing, 251
Time stamp, 251
Print options (PictBridge Setup menu),
247
Border, 247
Cropping, 248
No. of copies, 247
Page size, 247
Start printing, 248
Time stamp, 247
Print select, 249
Border, 251
Page size, 251
Start printing, 251
Time stamp, 251
Print set (DPOF), 243
Printing, 243
Programmed auto, 116
Protecting photographs, 235
R
Rear-curtain sync, 189
Recent settings, 368
Red-eye correction, 355
Red-eye reduction, 188
Release button to use dial, 328
Release mode, 83, 91
continuous, 84, 86, 91
high speed, 84, 86
442
low speed, 84, 86, 91, 299
dial, 85
lock release, 85
live view, 89
mirror up, 104
self-timer, 102
single-frame, 84
Remote cord, 101, 104, 389
Reset, 196, 271, 282, 418
Reset custom settings, 282
Reset shooting menu, 271
Reverse indicators, 330
RGB, 64, 181, 222, 223
RGB Histogram, 223, 264
Rotate tall, 265
S
S (small), 69
Save/load settings, 344
Saving camera settings, 344
Self-timer delay, 297
Sensitivity, 105, 106, 108
Set Picture Control, 162
Monochrome, 162
Filter effects, 165, 167
Toning, 165, 167
Neutral, 162
Standard, 162
Vivid, 162
Setup menu, 331
Shooting data, 225, 226, 227, 228
Shooting info display, 12, 301
Shooting info display, 301
Shooting menu, 268
Shooting menu bank, 269
Shutter spd & aperture lock, 326
Shutter-priority auto, 118
Shutter-release button, 53, 54, 78, 126, 296
half press, 53, 54, 78, 126
Shutter-release button AE-L, 296
Side-by-side comparison, 362
Single-point AF, 74, 75
Single-servo AF, 72, 78, 284
Size, 69
Slide show, 266
Slide show, 266
Frame interval, 266
Slow sync, 188
Speedlight, 377
Spot, 112, 295
T
Television, 255, 333
Ten-pin remote terminal, 213, 389
Thumbnail, 232
TIFF (RGB), 64
Time, 39, 334
Time exposure, 124
Timer, 102, 203
Trim, 356
Two-button reset, 196
network, 242, 385
transmitter, 242, 385
Wireless transmitter, 242
World time, 39, 334
Date and time, 39, 334
Date format, 40, 334
Daylight saving time, 39, 334
Time zone, 39, 334
WT-4, 242, 385
U
USB, 238, 245
cable, 240, 245
UTC, 39, 215, 229
V
Video, 101, 255, 333
cable, 255
mode, 333
Video mode, 333
Viewfinder, 10, 45, 429
eyepiece, 45, 102, 205
focus, 45, 81
Viewfinder grid display, 298
ViewNX, 64, 161, 182, 243
Vignette control, 276
Virtual horizon, 99, 322, 346
Virtual horizon, 346
W
WB, 135, 140
White balance, 135, 140
bracketing, 135
preset manual, 141, 148
White balance, 140
Auto, 140
Choose color temp., 141, 147
Cloudy, 141
Direct sunlight, 140
Flash, 141
Fluorescent, 140
Incandescent, 140
Preset manual, 141, 148
Shade, 141
Wireless, 242, 385
443
444
Q0610_UM_USEn_Cover.fm Page 1 Monday, July 14, 2008 3:50 PM
DIGITAL CAMERA
User's Manual
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in whole or in part
(except for brief quotation in critical articles or reviews), may be
made without written authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.
En_04
6MB02311-04
En
© 2008 Nikon Corporation
Printed in Japan
SB8G04(11)
En